2012 BMW x5 Xdrive35d 17743

Owner's Manual for
Contents
Vehicle
The Ultimate Driving

Machine
A-Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 735 - 03 11 500

X5 xDrive35i Owner's Manual for Vehicle
X5 xDrive50i Thank you for choosing a BMW.
X5 xDrive35d The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you
will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
X6 xDrive35i
X6 xDrive50i Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
It contains important information on vehicle operation that will
X5 M help you make full use of the technical features available in your
X6 M BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Please also note the additional items of onboard literature, for in‐
stance the BMW X5 M / BMW X6 M Supplementary Owner's
Manual.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG

© 2011 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English II/11, 03 11 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Contents
At a glance
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Communication
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 216 Telephone
page 302. 227 Office
235 Contacts
Using this Owner's Manual
237 ConnectedDrive
Controls
6 Notes
Mobility
At a glance
246 Refueling
12 Cockpit
248 Fuel
18 iDrive
252 Wheels and tires
Driving tips
24 Voice activation system
263 Engine compartment
Controls 268 Maintenance
28 Opening and closing 270 Replacing components
45 Adjusting 280 Breakdown assistance
56 Transporting children safely 285 Care
Navigation
61 Driving
Reference
71 Displays
290 Technical data
81 Lamps
295 Short commands for voice activation
86 Safety
system
96 Driving stability control systems
302 Everything from A to Z
Communication Entertainment
102 Driving comfort
119 Climate
127 Interior equipment
134 Storage compartments
Driving tips
142 Things to remember when driving
Navigation
152 Navigation system
153 Destination entry
161 Destination guidance
168 What to do if...
Entertainment
Mobility
172 Tone
174 Radio
181 CD/multimedia
200 DVD system in rear
Reference

Notes
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual Your individual vehicle

The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ You have decided in favor of a vehicle with indi‐
ular topic is by using the index. vidualized equipment and features.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in This Owner's Manual describes the entire array
the first chapter. of options and equipment available for a specific
model.
Additional sources of information As a result, the manual may contain accessories
Should you have any questions, your service and equipment that you may not have specified
center will be glad to advise you at any time. for your own vehicle.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is All options and special equipment are marked
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com. with an asterisk*.
For options and equipment not described in this
Owner's Manual, please refer to the Supple‐
Symbols mentary Owner's Manuals.
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of per‐
sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle. Status of this Owner's Manual
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐ at time of printing
tion. The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
* Indicates special equipment, country-specific icy of constant development that is conceived
equipment and optional accessories, as well as to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody
equipment and functions not yet available at the the highest quality and safety standards. In rare
time of printing. cases, therefore, the features described in this
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐ Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
lect individual functions. vehicle.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐

Updates made after the editorial
tivation system.
deadline
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for
voice activation system.
the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen‐
Refers to measures that can be taken to help dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.
protect the environment.
Symbols on vehicle components For your own safety

Indicates that you should consult the rele‐
vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor‐ Maintenance and repairs
mation on a particular part or assembly. Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics, re‐
quires suitable maintenance and repair meth‐
ods.
6
Therefore, have this work performed only by a California Proposition 65 Warning
At a glance
BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐ California laws require us to state the following
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐ warning:
ately trained personnel.
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile
If this work is not carried out properly, there is components and parts, including components
the danger of subsequent damage and related found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, con‐
safety hazards. tain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cal‐
ifornia to cause cancer and birth defects and re‐
Controls
Parts and accessories productive harm. In addition, certain fluids
For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac‐ contained in vehicles and certain products of
cessories approved by BMW. When you pur‐ component wear contain or emit chemicals
chase accessories tested and approved by known to the State of California to cause cancer
BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane‐ and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
Driving tips
ously acquire the assurance that they have been
thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
performance when installed on your vehicle. hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
BMW warrants these parts to be free from de‐ chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
fects in material and workmanship. BMW will not animals. Always protect your skin by washing
accept any liability for damage resulting from in‐ thoroughly with soap and water.
stallation of parts and accessories not approved
Navigation
by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made Service and warranty
by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used We recommend that you read this publication
on a BMW safely and without risk to either the thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
vehicle, its operation, or its occupants. Genuine lowing warranties:
BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other prod‐ ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty
ucts approved by BMW, together with profes‐
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
sional advice on using these items, are available
from all BMW centers. Installation and operation ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
of non-BMW approved accessories such as ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, ▷ California Emission Control System Limited
wheels, suspension components, brake dust Warranty
shields, telephones, including operation of any
mobile phone from within the vehicle without Detailed information about these warranties is
using an externally mounted antenna, or trans‐ listed in the Service and Warranty Information
ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie- Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com‐ Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's designed to meet the particular operating con‐
electrical system or affect the validity of the ditions and homologation requirements in your
BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center country and continental region in order to deliver
for additional information. Maintenance, re‐ the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is op‐
Mobility
placement, or repair of the emission control de‐ erated under those conditions. If you wish to op‐
vices and systems may be performed by any au‐ erate your vehicle in another country or region,
tomotive repair establishment or individual you may be required to adapt your vehicle to
using any certified automotive part. meet different prevailing operating conditions
and homologation requirements. You should
also be aware of any applicable warranty limita‐
Reference
tions or exclusions for such country or region. In
7
Notes such case, please contact Customer Relations Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
for further information. You can also obtain other information about mo‐
tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road For Canadian customers
safety, operational reliability and the New Vehi‐ Canadian customers who wish to report a
cle Limited Warranty. safety- related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
ures: the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehi‐
▷ BMW Maintenance system
cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov‐
ered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited War‐
ranty.
Reporting safety defects

For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
8
9
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.

Cockpit
Cockpit
All around the steering wheel
1 Rear window safety switch 41 Low beams 81

2 Power windows 40
3 Exterior mirror operation 53 Automatic headlamp con‐
4 Lamps trol* 82
Instrument lighting 84 Adaptive light control* 82
High-beam Assistant* 83
Front fog lamps* 84 5 Head-up Display* 117
Parking lamps 81 6 Steering column stalk, left
12
Turn signal 66 Recirculated-air mode 122
At a glance
High beams, head‐ Steering wheel heating* 55
lamp flasher 83
High-beam Assistant* 83 Lane departure warning* 93
Controls
Roadside parking lamps* 83 13 Horn, the entire surface
14
Computer 73
15 Cruise control lever
Driving tips
Settings and information about the
Cruise control* 108
vehicle 71
7 BMW X6: shifting up or down with automatic Active cruise control* 102

transmission 69
8 Instrument cluster 14
16 Steering wheel buttons, left
9 Steering column stalk, right
Navigation
Telephone* 216
Windshield wipers 67
Volume
Rain sensor 67
Activate/deactivate the voice acti‐
BMW X5: rear window wip‐
vation system* 24
ers 68
17 Releasing the hood 264

10 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 61
11 Ignition lock 61
12 Steering wheel buttons, right
Change the radio station
Stopping a traffic announcement
Select a music track
Scrolling through the redial list
Next entertainment source

Mobility
Reference
13
Instrument cluster
Cockpit
1 Turn signal indicator lamp ▷ BMW X5: reserve display for diesel ex‐
2 Speedometer haust fluid 249
3 Indicator/warning lamps 15 8 Display for
4 Active cruise control* 102 ▷ Automatic transmission position 69
5 Tachometer 72 ▷ HDC Hill Descent Control 98
6 BMW X5: current fuel consumption 72 ▷ Computer 73
BMW X6: engine oil temperature 72 or ▷ Date of next scheduled service, and re‐
current fuel consumption 72 maining distance to be driven 75
7 Display for ▷ Odometer and trip odometer 71
▷ Clock 71 ▷ High-beam Assistant* 83
▷ External temperature 71 ▷ Check Control message

present 76
▷ Indicator/warning lamps 15
▷ Adaptive Drive*: Sport chassis and sus‐
▷ Cruise control* 108
pension tuning 99
▷ Active Cruise Control* 102
9 Fuel gauge 73
10 Resetting the trip odometer 71
Viewing service requirement display 71
14
Indicator/warning lamps In urgent cases, this information will be shown
At a glance
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
The concept
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps notify you that
certain functions are active:
Symbol Function or system
Controls
Parking brake set, refer to
page 63
Canada: parking brake set, refer to

page 63
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
Driving tips
a variety of combinations and colors. High beams/headlamp flasher, refer
Several of the lamps are checked for proper to page 83
functioning when the engine is started or the ig‐
nition is switched on, and light up briefly. Front fog lamps*, refer to page 84
Text messages
Navigation
Lamp flashes:
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed in‐ DSC or DTC controls the drive and
dicator and warning lamps. braking forces for maintaining vehi‐
cle stability, refer to page 96
Supplementary text messages Engine malfunction with adverse ef‐
You can call up more information, e.g., on the fect on emissions, refer to
cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, page 269
via Check Control, refer to page 76.
Mobility
Reference
15
All around the center console
Cockpit
1 Headliner 17 7 Open the tailgate 33 36

2 Control Display 19
3 Hazard warning system 280 Active seat* 49
Central locking system 33 Park Distance Control

PDC* 110
Top View* 114
4 Opening glove compartment 134
Backup camera* 112
5 Automatic climate control with 2-zone con‐
trol 120 HDC Hill Descent Control 97
Automatic climate control with 4-zone con‐
trol* 124
6 Radio and CD/DVD drive* 174
16
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ 10 Parking brake 63
At a glance
trol 96
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 97 11 Adaptive Drive* 99
Side View* 116 12 Selector lever for automatic transmis‐

sion 69
8 Controller with buttons 18
Controls
9 Automatic Hold 64
Driving tips
All around the headliner
Navigation
1 Emergency Request* 280 4 Reading lamps 85
2 Glass sunroof* 42 43 5 Interior lamps 85

Mobility
3 Indicator lamp for the front pas‐

senger airbags* 87
Reference
17
iDrive
iDrive
The concept Using the iDrive during a trip

To avoid becoming distracted and posing
The iDrive combines the functions of a multitude
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐
of switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
ated from a central location.
use the controls or enter information unless traf‐
fic and road conditions allow this.◀
Controls at a glance
Controls
1 Control Display ▷ Move in four directions, arrow 3

2 Controller with buttons ▷ Turn, arrow 4
The buttons can be used to open the menus ▷ Push, arrow 5
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and create the settings.
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and create the settings.
18
Buttons on controller Operating concept
At a glance
Press the button Function Opening the main menu
MENU Opens the main menu. Press the button.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
CD Opens the CD/Multimedia

menu.
Controls
NAV Opens the Navigation
menu.
TEL Opens the Telephone

menu.
Driving tips
BACK Displays the previous
panel. The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
menu.
Control Display Selecting menu items
Navigation
Menu items shown in white can be selected.
Notes
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care
item is highlighted.
instructions, refer to page 287.
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
Switching off
1. Press the button.

2. "Switch off control display"
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual

In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Mobility
Changing between panels

After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
Switching on new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
Press the controller again to switch the screen ▷ Move the controller to the left.
back on. The current panel is closed and the previous
Reference
panel is displayed.
19
Options menu
iDrive The previous panel is opened again by
pressing the BACK button. In this case, the The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
current panel is not closed.
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Switch off control
▷ Move the controller to the right. display".
A new panel is opened on top of the previous ▷ Control options for the selected main menu,
display. e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, for instance "Store
station".
Changing settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate

that additional panels can be opened.
View of an opened menu

When a menu is opened, it generally opens with
the panel that was last selected in that menu. To
display the first panel of a menu:
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed. 3. Press the controller.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice. Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
Opening the Options menu box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
Press the button. vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The "Options" menu is displayed. The function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
Additional options: move the controller to the

right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is dis‐
played.
20
Example: setting the clock Status information
At a glance
Setting the clock Status field
The following information is displayed in the sta‐
1. Press the button. The main menu is tus field at the top right:
displayed.
▷ Time.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
▷ Current entertainment source.
lighted, and then press the controller.
Controls
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Telephone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Driving tips
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped into various catego‐
ries.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left Radio symbols

to display "Time/Date".
Symbol Meaning
Navigation
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller. Traffic bulletins* switched on.
HD Radio* is switched on.
Satellite radio* is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call*.

5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐ Missed call*.
lighted, and then press the controller.
Wireless network reception
strength* Symbol flashes: searching
for network.
Wireless network is not available*.
Bluetooth* is switched on.
Roaming* is active.
Mobility
Text message*, e-mail* was re‐

ceived.
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller. Check the SIM card*.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and SIM card* is blocked.
Reference
press the controller.
21
Selecting* the display
iDrive Symbol Meaning
SIM card* is missing. 1. Press the button.

Enter the PIN*. 2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
Entertainment symbols selected.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
Symbol Meaning content".
CD/DVD* player. 5. Select the desired menu item.
Music collection*.
Gracenote® database*.
AUX-IN port.
USB audio interface*.
Mobile phone audio interface*.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning Programmable memory

Spoken instructions* are switched buttons
off.
General information
Request of the current vehicle posi‐ The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
tion*. grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
Split screen* menu.
The settings are stored for the remote control
General information currently in use.
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information Saving a function
from the computer. 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even 2. Press the desired button for more
when you change to another menu. than two seconds.
Switching the split screen on and off* Running a function

Press the button.
1. Press the button. The function will run immediately. This
2. "Split screen" means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
22
Displaying the button assignment Switching between upper and lower
At a glance
Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear case letters
gloves or use objects. Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
The key assignment is displayed at the top edge tween entering uppercase and lowercase let‐
of the screen. ters.
Symbol Function
Move the controller forward:
Controls
switch from upper to lower case
letters.
Move the controller forward:

switch from lower to upper case
letters.
Driving tips
▷ To display short information: touch the but‐ Entry comparison
ton. Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
▷ To display detailed information: touch the narrowed down every time a letter is entered and
button for an extended period. letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
Navigation
data stored in the vehicle.
Entering letters and numbers ▷ Only those letters are offered during the en‐
try for which data is available.
1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers. ▷ Destination search: town/city names can be
entered using the spelling of language avail‐
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
able on the Control Display.
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the letter

or number.
Press the controller for an extended

period: delete all letters or numbers.
Enter a blank space.
Switching between letters and

numbers
Mobility
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐

tween entering letters and numbers.
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.

Reference
Enter the numbers.
23
Voice activation system*
Voice activation system
The concept Terminating the voice activation

system
▷ The voice activation system can be used to
Briefly press the button on the steering wheel
operate functions by means of spoken com‐
or ›Cancel‹.
mands. The system prompts you to make
your entries.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
Possible commands
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated us‐
ing the voice activation system. Most menu items on the Control Display can be
▷ The system uses a special microphone lo‐ voiced as commands.
cated in the area of the interior rearview mir‐ The available commands depend on the menu
ror. that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's play.
Manual to use with the voice activation sys‐ The functions of the main menu have short com‐
tem. mands.
Some list items, such as the phone book en‐
tries*, can also be selected via the voice activa‐
Requirements tion system. Say the list items exactly as they are
displayed on the list.
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
Having possible commands read aloud
so that the spoken commands can be identified.
To have the available commands read out
Set the language, refer to page 80.
loud: ›Voice commands‹
For example, if the "Settings" menu is displayed,
the commands for the settings are read out loud.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system Executing functions using short
commands
1. Press the button on the steering Functions on the main menu can be performed
wheel. directly by means of short commands, irrespec‐
tive of which menu item is currently selected, for
2. Wait for the signal.
instance ›Vehicle status‹.
3. Say the command.
List of short commands of the voice activation
The command appears on the Control Dis‐ system, refer to page 295.
play.
The symbol on the Control Display indicates Help dialog for the voice activation
that the voice activation system is active. system
If no other commands are available, continue Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
operating the function via iDrive. Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about the
current operating options and the most im‐
portant commands for them are announced.
24
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information Adjusting the volume
At a glance
about the principle of operation for the voice
activation system is announced. Turn the volume button while giving an instruc‐
tion until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
Example: playing back a CD volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote control
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output currently in use.
if necessary.
Controls
2. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Notes on Emergency
Requests
3. ›C D and multimedia‹
The medium last played is played back. Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
Driving tips
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
4. Press the button on the steering the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
wheel. unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel‐
ephone connection.
5. ›C D track ...‹ e.g., CD track 4.
Instead, use the SOS button*, refer to
page 280, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Navigation
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use the Environmental conditions
standard dialog or a shorter version.
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the an‐ smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
nouncements from the system are issued in an sis, and speed.
abbreviated form.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
On the Control Display: the voice activation system.
1. "Settings" ▷ When selecting a radio station, use the com‐
2. "Language/Units" mon pronunciation of the station name.
3. "Speech mode:" ▷ Keep doors, windows and */panoramic
glass sunroof* closed to prevent noise in‐
4. Select the setting.
terference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Mobility
Reference
25
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that are
useful for driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience are described here.

Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Remote control/key Integrated key
Buttons on the remote control
Press button 1 and pull out the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:

1 Unlocking
▷ Driver's door, refer to page 32.
2 Locking
▷ Cargo floor cover in cargo area, refer to
3 Opening tailgate page 137.
General information New remote controls

The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls You can obtain new remote controls from your
with keys. service center.
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is automatically recharged when it Loss of the remote controls
is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven. Lost remote controls can be blocked by your
Use each remote control at least twice a year for service center.
longer road trips in order to maintain the batter‐
ies' charge status.
In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access*, the Personal Profile
remote control contains a replaceable battery,
refer to page 39. The concept
The settings called up and implemented when You can set several of your vehicle's functions
the vehicle is unlocked depend on which remote to suit your personal needs and preferences.
control is used to unlock the vehicle, refer to
▷ The settings are automatically saved in the
Personal Profile.
profile currently activated in the remote con‐
In addition, information about service require‐ trol.
ments is stored in the remote control, Service
▷ The remote control used is detected when
data in the remote control, refer to page 268.
the vehicle is unlocked and the stored profile
is called up.
▷ Your personal settings will be recognized
and called up again even if the vehicle has
been used in the meantime by someone else
with another remote control.
28
The individual settings are stored for a maximum ▷ Adaptive Drive*: selected chassis and sus‐
At a glance
of four remote controls. They are stored for two pension tuning, refer to page 99.
remote controls if Comfort Access* is in use. ▷ Light settings:
▷ Triple turn signal activation, refer to
Personal Profile settings
page 66.
The following functions and settings can be
▷ Welcome lamps, refer to page 81.
stored in a profile.
▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer
More information on the settings can be found
Controls
to page 81.
under:
▷ Daytime running lights, refer to
▷ Assigning the programmable memory but‐
page 82.
tons, refer to page 22.
▷ High-beam Assistant*, refer to
▷ Response of the central locking system
page 83.
when the car is being unlocked, refer to
Driving tips
page 30. ▷ Automatic climate control with 2-zone con‐
trol: settings, refer to page 120.
▷ Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 33. ▷ Navigation:
▷ Driver's seat, exterior mirror and steering ▷ Voice activation, refer to page 163.
wheel positions*, refer to page 53. ▷ Route criteria, refer to page 161.
▷ Settings for the display on the Control Dis‐ ▷ Map view settings, refer to page 164.
Navigation
play and in the instrument cluster: ▷ Entertainment:
▷ 12h/24h clock format, refer to ▷ Tone control, refer to page 172.
page 79.
▷ Radio, stored stations, refer to
▷ Date format, refer to page 79. page 180.
▷ Brightness of the Control Display, refer
▷ CD/multimedia, audio source listened to
to page 80. last, refer to page 181.
▷ Language on the Control Display, refer ▷ Telephone: volume, refer to page 220.
to page 80.
▷ Units of measure for fuel consumption,
distance covered/remaining distances, Central locking system
and temperature, refer to page 80.
▷ Show visual warning for the Park Distance The concept
Control PDC*, refer to page 111. The central locking system becomes active
▷ Show visual warning for Top View*, refer to when the driver's door is closed.
page 114. The system simultaneously engages and re‐
▷ Show Side View*, refer to page 116. leases the locks on the following:
▷ Backup camera*: ▷ Doors.
▷ Function selection, refer to page 113. ▷ Tailgate.
Mobility
▷ Type of display, refer to page 114. ▷ Fuel filler flap.

▷ Lane departure warning*: last setting, on/
off, refer to page 93. Operating from the outside
▷ Head-up Display*: selection, brightness and ▷ Via the remote control.
position of the display, refer to page 117. ▷ Via the door lock*.
Reference
29
Opening and closing ▷ In cars with Comfort Access*, via the door 3. "Unlock button:"
handles.
The following takes place simultaneously when
locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote
control:
▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and
courtesy lamps* are switched on and off.
▷ The alarm system* is armed or disarmed,
refer to page 39.
Operating from the inside 4. Select the desired function:

Via the button for the central locking system, re‐ ▷ "All doors"
fer to page 33. The entire vehicle is unlocked.
If the vehicle is locked from the inside, the fuel ▷ "Driver's door only"
filler flap remains unlocked.
Only the driver's door and the fuel
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again
central locking system unlocks automatically.
unlocks the entire vehicle.
The hazard warning system and interior lamps
come on. Convenient opening
Press and hold the button on the remote
control.
Opening and closing: from the
The windows and the glass sunroof*/panoramic
outside glass sunroof* open.
Using the remote control

Locking
General information Press the button on the remote control.
Take the remote control with you Locking from the outside
People or animals left unattended in a Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐ there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
side. Always take the remote control with you unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can edge.◀
then be opened from the outside.◀
Switching on the interior lamps,
Unlocking courtesy lamps*, and welcome lamps
Press the button. The vehicle is unlocked. Press the button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
You can also use this function to locate your ve‐
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ hicle in parking garages, etc.
rently in use.
1. "Settings" Panic mode*

2. "Door locks" You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
30
Press the button on the remote control for at Retrieving the seat, mirror, and
At a glance
least 3 seconds. steering wheel settings*
To switch off the alarm: press any button. The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering
wheel positions* selected last are stored for the
Unlocking tailgate currently used remote control.
Press the button on the remote control for When the vehicle is being unlocked, these po‐
approx. 1 second and release. sitions are automatically retrieved if the setting
is activated.
The tailgate will open slightly, regardless of
Controls
whether it was previously locked or unlocked. Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
With automatic tailgate operation*: the tailgate If this function is used, first make sure that
opens automatically. the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty.
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or
damage to objects behind the seat as a result of
Driving tips
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
a rearward movement of the seat.◀
fore opening.
To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
not place the remote control into the cargo area. ▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is ▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐
pushed closed. ory is pressed.
Before and after each trip, check that the tailgate
Navigation
has not been inadvertently unlocked. Selecting automatic activation
Provide edge protection 1. "Settings"
Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear 2. "Door locks"
window while driving and damage the heating 3. "Last seat position auto."
wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐
tion.◀
Confirmation signals from the vehicle

1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Flash when lock/unlock"
Malfunctions
Local radio waves may interfere with the remote
control.
In this case, unlock and lock the car at the door
lock with the integrated key.
Mobility
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote

control, the battery in the remote control is dis‐
charged. Use the remote control during an ex‐
tended drive in order to recharge the battery,
refer to page 28. The remote control for Comfort
Reference
31
Opening and closing Access* contains a battery that may need to be
replaced, refer to page 39.
For US owners only

The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
When unlocking:
LX8766S
LX8766E 1. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's
door and the fuel filler flap.
LX8CAS
2. Turning the key a second time unlocks the
LX8CAS2
remaining doors and the tailgate.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Convenient operation
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two You can use the door lock to operate the win‐
conditions: dows and the glass sunroof*/panoramic glass
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐ sunroof*.
ence, and With the door closed, turn the key to the unlock
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐ or lock position and hold it there.
ceived, including interference that may Turning the key back to the original position
cause undesired operation. stops the motion.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to Monitor the closing process
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment. Monitor the closing process to ensure that
no one becomes trapped; otherwise, injuries
Using the door lock may result.◀
General information Manual operation

Locking from the outside If an electrical malfunction occurs, unlock or lock
the driver's door using the integrated key in the
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
door lock.
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
32
Opening and closing: from the Unlocking and opening*
At a glance
inside ▷ Press the button. The doors are un‐
locked. To open, pull the door han‐
dle above the armrest.
▷ Pull the door handle above the armrest
twice: the door is unlocked the first time and
opened the second time.
Controls
Locking
▷ Press the button. The doors are
locked.
▷ Press the lock button of a door. To prevent
Locking and unlocking you from being locked out, the opened driv‐
Driving tips
Press the button in the vehicle. er's door cannot be locked using the lock
button.
The doors and the tailgate are locked or un‐ Take the remote control with you
locked when the front doors are closed, but they People or animals left unattended in a
are not secured against theft. parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. side. Always take the remote control with you
Navigation
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
Automatic locking then be opened from the outside.◀
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1. "Settings" Doors
2. "Door locks" Automatic soft closing*
3. Select the desired function: To close the doors, push lightly. It is closed au‐
▷ "Lock if no door is opened" tomatically.
The vehicle locks automatically after a Danger of pinching
short period of time if a door is not
Make sure that the closing path of the
opened.
doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
▷ "Lock after start. to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive away.
BMW X5: upper tailgate
Opening
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Mobility
fore opening.
Reference
33
Opening and closing Provide edge protection 1. From the cargo area, press out the handle in
Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear the tailgate, refer to arrow, with a screw‐
window while driving and damage the heating driver and pull. The tailgate is unlocked.
wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐
tion.◀
Opening from the inside
2. Open the tailgate from the outside and press

in the handle.
The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is
closed.
Press the button. The tailgate opens somewhat
unless it has been locked. Closing
Opening from the outside
Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate

can be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐
Press the button, see arrow, or the button gate.
of the remote control for approx. 1 second. The Danger of pinching
tailgate opens slightly. It can be swung upward. Make sure that the closing path of the tail‐
gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Opening manually
In case of an electrical malfunction:
Automatic soft closing*
To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly
only. It is closed automatically.
Automatic tailgate operation*
Adjusting opening height

You can set how far the tailgate should open.
34
Adjusting the opening height ▷ By pressing the button in the center
At a glance
When adjusting the opening height, en‐ console again.
sure that there is a clearance of at least 4 in/ ▷ By pressing the button on the remote
10 cm above the tailgate. Otherwise, the ceiling control for a longer period.
may not be high enough for the open tailgate if ▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the
the load situation changes.◀ tailgate.
1. "Settings" ▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate.
Controls
2. "Tailgate"
3. Turn the controller until the desired opening
Closing
height is selected.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the tail‐
Driving tips
gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Function requirement:
The lower tailgate is closed and must be locked
on both sides.
Navigation
Opening
fore opening.
The tailgate opens automatically to the adjusted
opening height.
The tailgate closes automatically when the but‐
ton on the inside of the tailgate is pressed.
To stop the closing process:
▷ Press the button on the inside of the tailgate.
▷ Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐
gate.
Closing is not canceled when you put the vehicle
into motion.
▷ Press the button on the outside of the tail‐ Manually opening or closing
gate when the vehicle is unlocked. In case of an electrical defect of the automatic
▷ Press the button in the center con‐ tailgate operation function:
Mobility
sole.
1. Manually release the tailgate, refer to
▷ Press the button on the remote control page 34.
for approx. 1 second and release.
2. Open or close the tailgate slowly and with‐
The opening procedure is interrupted: out making sudden movements.
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
Reference
35
Opening and closing Do not use force to open or close 3. Turn the controller until the desired opening
If the tailgate offers increased resistance, height is selected.
do not forcefully open or close the tailgate; oth‐
erwise, injury or damage may result.◀
BMW X5: lower tailgate

Opening
Opening
fore opening.
The tailgate opens automatically to the adjusted
opening height.
Pull the lever and swing the tailgate downward.
The opened tailgate can be loaded with up to

550 lbs/250 kg.
Closing
Fold the tailgate up and press closed.
BMW X6: tailgate ▷ Press the button on the outside of the tail‐
gate when the vehicle is unlocked.
Automatic tailgate operation
▷ Press the button in the center con‐
Adjusting opening height sole.
You can set how far the tailgate should open. ▷ Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second and release.
Adjusting the opening height
The opening procedure is interrupted:
When adjusting the opening height, en‐
sure that there is a clearance of at least 4 in/ ▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
10 cm above the tailgate. Otherwise, the ceiling ▷ By pressing the button in the center
may not be high enough for the open tailgate if console again.
the load situation changes.◀ ▷ By pressing the button on the remote
1. "Settings" control for a longer period.
2. "Tailgate" ▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the

tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate.
36
Closing 3. Open or close the tailgate slowly and with‐
At a glance
out making sudden movements.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the tail‐ Do not use force to open or close
gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ If the tailgate offers increased resistance,
do not forcefully open or close the tailgate; oth‐
erwise, injury or damage may result.◀
Controls
Comfort Access*
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
Driving tips
The tailgate closes automatically when the but‐ All you need to do is to have the remote control
ton on the inside of the tailgate is pressed. with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
To stop the closing process: The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is nearby or in the passenger
▷ Press the button on the inside of the tailgate.
compartment.
▷ Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
Navigation
gate.
tions:
Closing is not canceled when you put the vehicle
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
into motion.
▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately.
Automatic closing
▷ Starting the engine.
The tailgate closes automatically without
button operation if it is weighed down by an ad‐ ▷ Convenient closing.
ditional weight of approx. 11 lbs/5 kg, such as
snow or ice.◀ Functional requirement
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must
Manually opening or closing be located outside of the vehicle.
In case of an electrical malfunction: ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
1. Push out cover 1 on the tailgate with a
▷ The engine can only be started if the remote
screwdriver.
control is inside the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote

control
The functions can be controlled by pressing the
buttons or via Comfort Access.
Mobility
Should a short delay occur when opening or

closing the windows or the glass sunroof*/pan‐
oramic glass sunroof*, the system checks
whether a remote control is located in the vehi‐
2. Push the catch 2 in the direction of the ar‐ cle. Please repeat opening or closing if neces‐
row. sary.
Reference
37
Unlocking Unlocking the tailgate separately
Opening and closing
Press the button on the exterior of the tailgate.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
If a remote control accidentally left in the cargo
area is detected in the locked vehicle, the tail‐
gate opens again.
The hazard warning flashers flash and a signal*
sounds.
Ignition on
Fully grasp a door handle, arrow 1.
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig‐
This corresponds to pressing the button. nition on.
When doing so, do not depress the brake pedal,
Locking otherwise the engine will start.
Starting the engine

The engine can be started or the ignition can be
switched on when a remote control is inside the
vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote
control into the ignition lock, refer to page 61.
As long as no remote control is detected in the
vehicle, it is only possible to restart the engine
within approx. 10 seconds after it is switched off
Touch the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with if no door has been opened.
your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the but‐ Switching off the engine
ton. ▷ Remote control not in ignition lock:
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition After switching off the engine, the transmis‐
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐ sion is automatically switched into transmis‐
sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐ sion position P.
hicle. ▷ Remote control in ignition lock:
If a remote control is detected within the vehicle, If transmission position N is engaged, the
the vehicle does not lock or is unlocked again. transmission remains in this position after
the engine is switched off.
Convenient closing
Press the area, arrow 2, with your finger and Malfunction
hold. Comfort Access may not function properly if it
In addition, the windows and the glass sunroof*/ experiences interference from local radio waves,
panoramic glass sunroof* close. e.g., mobile phones.
If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using the
Monitor the closing process
buttons on the remote control or use the
Watch during the closing process to be integrated key in the door lock.
sure that no one is injured. Removing the hand
To start the engine afterward, insert the remote
from the door handle immediately stops the
control into the ignition switch.
closing process.◀
38
Warning lamps Alarm system
At a glance
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when you attempt to The concept
start the engine: the engine cannot be The vehicle alarm system responds to:
started.
▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.
The remote control is not in the vehicle or has a
▷ Movements in the vehicle: interior motion
malfunction. Take the remote control with you
sensor, refer to page 40.
inside the vehicle or have it checked. If neces‐
Controls
sary, insert another remote control into the ig‐ ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐
nition switch. tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up while the engine is The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
running: the remote control is no lon‐ ▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
Driving tips
ger inside the vehicle. ▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.
After switching off the engine, the engine can ▷ By flashing the high beams.
only be started again within approx. 10 seconds
if no door has been opened. Arming and disarming the alarm
The indicator lamp in the instrument system
cluster comes on and a message ap‐ When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
Navigation
pears on the Control Display: replace the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
the remote control battery. system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
Replacing the battery Door lock and armed alarm system

The remote control for Comfort Access con‐ Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm
tains a battery that will need to be replaced from on some market-specific versions.
time to time. This alarm can only be ended by pressing the
button on the remote control.
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
control, refer to page 28.
Tailgate and armed alarm system
2. Remove the cover.
The tailgate can be opened using the remote
control, even if the alarm system is armed.
Press the button on the remote control.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni‐
tored again by the alarm system. The hazard
warning system flashes once.
In some market-specific versions, the tailgate
can only be opened using the remote control if
the vehicle was unlocked first.
Mobility
3. Insert a new battery of the same type with

the positive side facing upwards.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,
4. Press the cover closed.
refer to page 30.
Return used battery to a recycling collec‐
▷ Insert the remote control all the way into the
tion point or to your service center.
ignition lock.
Reference
39
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview Avoiding unintentional alarms
Opening and closing
mirror The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can be switched off together, such as in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and

interior motion sensor
▷ The indicator lamp flashes continuously:
Press the button on the remote control
The system is armed. twice in succession.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking: The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed onds and then flashes continuously.
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐ The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
cured. remain switched off until the vehicle is locked
The indicator lamp flashes continuously af‐ again.
ter approx. 10 seconds. The interior motion
sensor is not active.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking: Power windows
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
General information
▷ If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted in the ig‐ Take the remote control with you
nition, but for no longer than approx. 5 mi‐ Take the remote control with you when
nutes: leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
An alarm has been triggered. cannot operate the power windows and injure
themselves.◀
Panic mode*
In dangerous situations, trigger the alarm sys‐
tem:
Press the button on the remote control for at
least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Tilt alarm sensor

The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such Opening
as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
▷ Press the switch to the resistance
Interior motion sensor point.
For the sensor to function properly, the windows The window opens while the switch is held.
and glass sunroof*/panoramic glass sunroof*
must be closed.
40
Do not use window accessories
At a glance
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
Do not install any accessories in the range
ance point.
of movement of the windows; otherwise, the
The window opens automatically. pinch protection system will be impaired.◀
Pressing again stops the motion.
Closing without the pinch protection
Closing system
Danger of pinching For example, if there is an external danger or if
Controls
Monitor the closing process and make ice on the windows prevents a window from
sure that the closing path of the window is clear; closing normally, proceed as follows:
otherwise, injuries may result.◀ 1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there.
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point.
Driving tips
Pinch protection is limited and the window
The window closes while the switch is held. reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds
a certain value.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance 2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
point. again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
The window closes automatically. there.
Pressing the switch stops the motion. The window closes without pinch protec‐
Navigation
Convenient operation, refer to page 30, via the tion.
remote control or the door lock.
Safety switch
Convenient closing, refer to page 38, with Com‐
fort Access*. With the safety switch, the rear windows are
prevented from being opened or closed via the
After the ignition is switched off switches in the rear passenger area, such as by
children.
When the remote control is removed or the ig‐
nition is switched off, the windows can continue
Press the button.
to be operated for approx. 1 minute as long as
no door is opened. The LED lights up if the safety function is
switched on.
Pinch protection system Safety switch for rear operation
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a Press the safety switch when transporting
window closes, the closing action is interrupted. children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result
The window reopens slightly. if the windows are closed without supervision.◀
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐

tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check
Roller sunblinds for the rear
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐ side windows*
Mobility
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain Pull the loop of the roller sun blind and hook onto
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀ bracket.
Reference
41
Opening/closing the sliding visor
Opening and closing Do not open the window while the roller
sunblind is tilted You can move the sliding visor independently
Do not open the window while the roller sunblind with the sunroof closed or tilted.
is tilted; otherwise, there is a risk of damage at ▷ Press the switch in the de‐
high speeds that may result in personal injury.◀ sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
The sliding visor moves while
X5: panoramic glass sunroof* the switch is being held.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
General information past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
The sliding visor moves automatically.
operated together or separately using the
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
switch.
Danger of pinching Opening/closing the glass sunroof
Monitor the closing process and make With the sliding visor open, proceed as descri‐
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is bed under Sliding visor.
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
Take the remote control with you sliding visor together
Take the remote control with you when Press the switch twice in the de‐
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, sired direction past the resist‐
cannot operate the roof and injure themselves.◀ ance point.
The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor move together. Pressing the
switch again stops the motion.
Convenient operation, refer to page 30, via the

remote control or the door lock.
Convenient closing, refer to page 38, with Com‐
fort Access*.
Comfort function
Tilting the glass sunroof ▷ Press the switch twice with
the sunroof open:
Press the switch.
The sunroof is raised.
The closed sunroof is tilted and
the sliding visor opens slightly. ▷ When the sunroof is raised,
briefly press the switch twice
in the opening direction:
Do not use force to close the sliding visor The sunroof is opened all the
way.
Do not use force to close the sliding visor
with the glass sunroof in its tilted position, oth‐
erwise the mechanism will be damaged.◀
Comfort position
In the comfort position, the roof is not fully open.
This reduces wind noise in the passenger com‐
partment.
42
Each time the glass sunroof is opened or closed BMW X6: glass sunroof*,
At a glance
all the way, it stops in the comfort position. If
desired, continue the motion following this with
electric
the switch.
General information
After the ignition is switched off Danger of pinching
The roof can still be operated for approx. 1 mi‐ Monitor the closing process and make
nute, as long as no door has been opened. sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is
Controls
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Pinch protection system
Take the remote control with you
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐ Take the remote control with you when
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
one-third of the opening in the roof, or from the cannot operate the roof and injure themselves.◀
Driving tips
tilted position during closing.
The roof and the sliding visor open a short dis‐
tance.
tection
Navigation
Despite the pinch protection system, check that
the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the
closing action may not be interrupted in certain
extreme situations, such as when thin objects
are present.◀
Tilting the glass sunroof
Press the switch.
Closing without the pinch protection
system The closed sunroof is tilted and
the sliding visor opens slightly.
For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐
ceed as follows:
Press the switch forward beyond the resistance
Do not use force to close the sliding visor
point and hold. The roof closes without the pinch
protection system. Do not use force to close the sliding visor
with the glass sunroof in its tilted position, oth‐
Initialization after a power failure erwise the mechanism will be damaged.◀
After a power failure, it is only possible to raise

the roof, if necessary. Opening/closing the glass sunroof
Have the system initialized by your service cen‐ ▷ Press the switch in the de‐
ter. sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
Mobility
The glass sunroof moves

while the switch is being held.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof moves automatically.
Reference
43
Opening and closing The glass sunroof and sliding visor can be extreme situations, such as when thin objects
opened together. Close the sliding visor man‐ are present.◀
ually.
Convenient operation, refer to page 30, via the Closing without the pinch protection
remote control or the door lock. system
Convenient closing, refer to page 38, with Com‐ For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐
fort Access*. ceed as follows:
1. Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐

Opening/closing the glass sunroof
ance point and hold. The pinch protection
automatically
system is limited and the sunroof opens
Press the switch beyond the resistance point. slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain
The following movements are also automatic: value.
▷ Pressing the switch with the sunroof open: 2. Within about 4 seconds, slide the switch for‐
the sunroof is tilted fully. ward again beyond the resistance point and
▷ Pressing the switch in the Open direction hold it there. The roof closes without the
with the sunroof tilted: the sunroof is opened pinch protection system.
fully.
Initialization after a power failure
After a power failure, it is only possible to raise
Comfort position the roof, if necessary.
In the comfort position, the roof is not fully open. Have the system initialized by your service cen‐
This reduces wind noise in the passenger com‐ ter.
partment.
Each time the glass sunroof is opened or closed
all the way, it stops in the comfort position. If
desired, continue the motion following this with
the switch.
After the ignition is switched off

The roof can still be operated for approx. 1 mi‐
nute, as long as no door has been opened.
Pinch protection system

If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the
middle of the opening in the roof, or from the
tilted position during closing.
The glass sunroof opens again fully.
tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check that
the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the
closing action may not be interrupted in certain
44
Adjusting
At a glance
Sitting safely Adjusting manually*
The ideal seating position can make a vital con‐ Forward/backward

tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
Controls
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 50.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 51.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 86.
Driving tips
Seats
Pull the lever and slide the seat into the desired
Note before adjusting position. After releasing the lever, move the seat
forward or back slightly to make sure it engages
Do not adjust the seat while driving
properly.
Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat
Navigation
while driving.
Thigh support*
The seat could respond with unexpected move‐
ment and the ensuing loss of vehicle control
could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the
rear
Do not incline the backrest on the front passen‐
ger side too far to the rear during driving. Oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of sliding under the
safety belt in an accident. This would eliminate
the protection normally provided by the belt.◀ Pull the lever and move the thigh support for‐
ward or back.
Mobility
Reference
45
Adjusting electrically
Adjusting
1 Backrest width*
1 Forward/backward 2 Shoulder support*
2 Height 3 Thigh support*
3 Seat tilt 4 Lumbar support*
Backrest width*
The width of the backrest can be changed with
the side wings to adjust the side support to your
own needs.
Shoulder support*
This also supports the back in the shoulder area,
This creates a relaxed sitting position and helps
relieve stress on the shoulder muscles.
4 Backrest
The shoulder support is also used to adjust the
Differs depending on seat:
distance of the head restraint from the back of
the seat occupant's head.
Lumbar support*
1 Backrest
2 Height
Additional depending on seat:
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup‐
plementary support to help you maintain a re‐
laxed, upright sitting position.
▷ Increase or decrease curvature:
Press front or rear section of switch.
▷ Shift curvature up or down:
46
Press upper or lower section of switch.
At a glance
BMW X5: rear seats
2nd row seats
If the row of seats is divided*, each side can be
adjusted separately.
Controls
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Pull the lever and apply weight to or remove
Never adjust the 2nd row seats while the weight from the backrest as needed.
vehicle is moving, as otherwise the passengers
on the 3rd row seats could be injured.
Access to 3rd row seats*
Make sure that the locking devices of the 2nd
Driving tips
row seats engage properly. Otherwise the re‐
straining effect of the safety belts during an ac‐
cident could be reduced.◀
Longitudinal direction*
Navigation
Pull the lever and fold the seat forward.
The handle recess on the interior trim of the door
pillar makes climbing in easier.
Keep the footwell under the 2nd row seats
clear
1. Pull the lever and slide the seat into the de‐ When folding back the 2nd row seats, make sure
sired position. that the footwell under the 2nd row seats is
2. Release the lever and move the seat slightly clear. Otherwise persons in the 3rd row seats
forward or back so that it engages properly. could be injured or objects damaged.◀
Warning lamp for the 2nd row seats:

Backrest* lights up if the 2nd row seats are not
The backrests can be adjusted in four steps. locked. A message also appears on
the Control Display.
3rd row seats*

The 3rd row seats are divided and offer space
Mobility
for two persons.
Folding up backrest
Before folding up the backrest, remove the lug‐
gage compartment roller cover, refer to
Reference
47
Seat heating*
Adjusting page 132, and, if necessary, slide the 2nd row
seats slightly forward.
1. Pull the lever, refer to arrow. The backrest is Front

unlocked.
The temperature setting progresses one step

2. Fold up and engage the backrest. through its control sequence each time you
press the button. The maximum temperature is
Ensure that the lock is securely en‐ reached when three LEDs are lit.
gaged
To switch off: press and hold the button.
Make sure that the catch engages securely.
The temperature is reduced, if need be, down to
If it is not properly engaged, transported
no heat in order to reduce the load on the bat‐
cargo could enter the passenger compart‐
tery. The LEDs remain lit.
ment during braking or evasive maneuvers
and endanger the vehicle occupants.◀
Rear
3. Push the head restraints into the top posi‐
tion.
Folding backrest down

1. Push the head restraints down, refer to
page 52.
2. Pull the lever, refer to arrows. The backrests
are released.
Operation similar to front seat heating, without

temperature distribution.
3. Fold the backrest down.
48
Active seat ventilation* and Temperature distribution with active
At a glance
seat ventilation
seat heating*
The heat output can be distributed variously in
Front the seat cushion and the backrest.
1. Press button 1.
2. "Seat heating distribution"
Controls
Driving tips
1 Seat heating
2 Active seat ventilation
Press button 1 or 2 once depending on the tem‐ 3. Turn the controller to adjust the distribution.
perature or ventilation position. The LED in the The setting is applied.
respective button lights up.
The temperature and ventilation levels are dis‐ Heated rear seats
Navigation
played in bar form on the Control Display. A dis‐ Operation similar to front seat heating, without
play of three bars indicates the highest level of temperature distribution, refer to page 48.
seat heating or seat ventilation.
The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower
may be switched off entirely to save on battery Active seat*
power. The LEDs remain lit.
To switch off: press and hold button 1 or 2.
Temperature distribution without

active seat ventilation
The heat output can be distributed variously in
the seat cushion and the backrest.
1. Press button 1.
2. "Seat heating distribution"
The seat cushion is actively varied by alternately
raising and lowering the right and left half of the
seat cushion. This reduces muscular tension
and fatigue to help prevent lower back pain.
Press the button to switch on; the LED lights up.
Mobility
The action of the system is reduced and if need

be, switched off in order to reduce the load on
the battery. The LED remains lit.
When the active seat is switched off, it can take
3. Turn the controller to adjust the distribution. up to 1 minute before the two halves of the seat
cushion have returned to their initial position.
Reference
The setting is applied.
49
Safety belts Buckling the belt
Adjusting
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving away.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
Number of safety belts

Your vehicle has been fitted with safety belts for Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the
the safety of you and your passengers. belt buckle.
▷ BMW X5: five or seven* safety belts.
Unbuckling the belt
▷ BMW X6: four or five* safety belts.
1. Hold the belt firmly.
Notes 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
One person per safety belt 3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
Never allow more than one person to wear The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small correct for adult seat occupants of every build if
children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀ the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 45.
The two rear safety belt buckles integrated into
Putting on the belt
the rear seat are for passengers sitting on the
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly left and right. The belt buckle* embossed with
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the the word CENTER is intended exclusively for
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low use by passengers riding in the center position.
around the hips in the lap area and does not
press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can Safety belt reminder for the driver's and
slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal im‐ front passenger seat
pact and injure the abdomen.
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐
The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub nal sounds. In addition, a message ap‐
on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka‐ pears on the Control Display. Check
ble objects, or be pinched.◀ whether the safety belt has been fastened cor‐
rectly.
Reduction of restraining effect
Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the The safety belt reminder is active at speeds
belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac‐
belt periodically to readjust the tension across tivated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the senger seat.
safety belt may be reduced.◀
Damage to safety belts
Using the middle safety belt In the case of strain caused by accidents or
If the middle safety belt in the rear is used, damage:
the larger section of the backrest must be Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
locked. Otherwise, the safety belt will not have tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
a restraining effect.◀ checked.
50
Checking and replacing safety belts Adjusting the head restraint
At a glance
Have the work performed only by your Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased
that this safety feature will function properly.◀ risk of injury in an accident.◀
BMW X5: push the head restraints of the 3rd row

Belt-force limiter seats* into the top position.
The effect of the belt-force limiter on the driver's
seat is dependent on the position of the driver's Height
Controls
seat. Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐
To maintain the long-term accuracy of this func‐ prox. at ear level.
tion, the driver's seat must be calibrated if a cor‐
responding message is displayed on the Control Distance
Display. Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
Driving tips
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Calibrating driver's seat
The warning lamp lights up. A mes‐ Active front head restraints
sage also appears on the Control Dis‐ In the event of a rear-end collision of sufficient
play. Please calibrate the driver's seat. severity, the active head restraint reduces the
1. Move the driver's seat forward until it stops. distance to the head.
Navigation
2. Move the driver's seat forward again. It Reduced protective function
briefly moves toward the front in the proc‐ ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint cov‐
ess. ers.
3. Set the desired seating position again. ▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
The calibration is completed when the message directly on the head restraints.
on the Control Display disappears. Should this ▷ Only attach accessories approved by BMW
message continue to be displayed, repeat the to the seat or head restraint.
calibration. If the message does not disappear
Otherwise, the protective function of the active
even after repeated calibration, have the system
head restraint will be impaired and the personal
checked as soon as possible.
safety of the occupants will be endangered.
Do not carry out calibration while the ve‐ Have the active head restraints reset after they
hicle is moving are triggered in a rear-end collision. Have this
Never carry out calibration while the vehicle is work performed by the service center only; oth‐
moving, as this can cause accidents. erwise, this safety feature with not be opera‐
Make sure that no persons or objects become tional.◀
wedged during the calibration process, as this Please contact the service center if the front
can cause injuries or damage.◀ head restraints need to be removed or installed.
Front seats: adjusting the height

Mobility
Head restraints Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐
prox. at ear level.
Correctly adjusted head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Reference
51
Electrical Adjusting side extensions
Adjusting
Adjusting electrically. You can fold the side extensions on the head re‐
straint forward for increased lateral support in
Front seats: adjusting the distance the resting position.
from the back of the head
BMW X5: rear seats and 3rd row seats*
Adjusting the height
Press the button and pull the headrest cushion

forward or push it back.
▷ To raise: pull.
Compromised performance
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
Do not place any objects behind the head‐ push the head restraint down.
rest cushion. Otherwise, you can impair the
In vehicles equipped with 3rd row seats, the
proper function of the head restraint.◀
height of the middle head restraint is not adjust‐
able.
Comfort seat*
The distance from the back of the seat occu‐ Removing
pant's head can be adjusted using the shoulder 1. Pull the head restraint upward to the stop.
support, refer to page 46.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint out completely.
BMW X6: rear seats

The head restraints in the rear cannot be ad‐
justed and cannot be removed.
52
Seat, mirror, and steering Comfort function
At a glance
wheel memory* 1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or
switch on the radio ready state, refer to
General information page 61.
Two different driver's seat and front passenger 2. Briefly press the desired memory but‐
seat* positions, exterior mirror positions and ton 1 or 2.
steering wheel positions* can be stored and re‐ The seat is automatically moved to the stored
trieved. position.
Controls
The adjustment of the backrest width and the The procedure stops when a switch for setting
lumbar support is not stored in the memory. the seat or one of the memory buttons is
pressed.
Storing
Safety mode
Driving tips
1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni‐
tion on or off, refer to page 61.
2. Press and hold the desired memory button
1 or 2 until the setting procedure is com‐
pleted.
Navigation
Mirrors
1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐
tion, refer to page 61. Exterior mirrors
2. Set the desired seat, exterior mirror and
General information
steering wheel positions.
The mirror on the passenger side is more curved
3. Press the button. The LED in the than the driver's mirror.
button lights up. Estimating distances correctly
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2. The Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
LED goes out. than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
If the M button is pressed accidentally: to the traffic behind you based on what you see
in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an
Press the button again. The LED goes accident.◀
out.
Calling up settings
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving
Mobility
Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving,

as an unexpected seat movement could result
in an accident.◀
Reference
53
At a glance
Adjusting Deactivating
Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐
senger's side mirror position.
Fold in and out*

Press button 3.
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
▷ In car washes.
1 Adjusting ▷ In narrow streets.
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor* ▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded
away manually.
3 Folding in and out*
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
Selecting a mirror matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
To change over to the other mirror:
Before entering an automatic car wash,
Slide the mirror changeover switch. fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the
button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de‐
Adjusting electrically pending on the width of the vehicle.◀
The setting corresponds to the direction
in which the button is pressed. Automatic heating
Depending on the external temperature, both
Storing positions* exterior mirrors are automatically heated when
the engine is running or the ignition is switched
Seat and mirror memory*, refer to page 53.
on.
Adjusting manually
Interior rearview mirror
If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
press the edges of the mirror glass. Reducing the blinding effect
Automatic Curb Monitor*
When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐
senger side. This improves your view of the curb
and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for
example.
Activating
1. Slide the mirror changeover switch From behind when driving at night: turn the
to the driver's side mirror position. knob.
2. Engage reverse gear or move the selector
lever to position R.
54
Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic 3. Fold the lever back.
At a glance
dimming feature* Do not use force to swing the lever back.
Do not use force to swing the lever back
up; otherwise, the mechanism will be dam‐
aged.◀
Electric*
Controls
Two photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass, see arrow.
Driving tips
▷ On the back of the mirror.
For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐
rearview mirror and the windshield. rections.
Storing steering wheel positions, refer to Seat,
Navigation
mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer to
Steering wheel page 53.
General information Easy entry/exit*

To facilitate entry and exit, the steering wheel
Do not adjust while driving
temporarily moves into the uppermost position.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀ Steering wheel heating*
Switching on/off
Adjusting
Mechanical*
Mobility
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.

1. Fold the lever down. ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
Reference
tion.
55
Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely
The right place for children Installing child restraint fixing

systems
Note
Children in the vehicle Notes
Do not leave children unattended in the Manufacturer's information for child re‐
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐ straint fixing systems
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
doors.◀ systems, observe the information provided by
the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
Children should always be in the rear tective effect can be impaired.◀
Accident research shows that the safest place
Note the following in vehicles equipped
for children is on the rear seat.
with 3rd row seats
Transporting children in the rear BMW X5: in vehicles with 3rd row seats*, make
Transport children younger than 13 years sure that the seat of the 2nd row seats on which
of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm on the 2nd row the child restraint fixing system is mounted is
seats only, using child restraint fixing systems properly locked. Otherwise, there is an in‐
suitable for the age, weight, and height of the creased risk of injury for the child in an accident.
child. Otherwise, there is the increased danger Do not mount child restraint fixing systems on
of injury in an accident. the 3rd row seats, as otherwise the protection
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a provided by these child restraint fixing systems
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint may be reduced.◀
fixing system can no longer be used, due to their
BMW X5: before mounting a child restraint fixing
age, weight and size.◀
system in the center seat of the 2nd row seats,
move the outer seat cushions and backrests into
Children on the front passenger seat the rearmost positions.
Should it be necessary to use a child restraint
fixing system on the front passenger seat, make On the front passenger seat
sure that the front and side airbags on the front After installing a child restraint fixing system on
passenger side are deactivated. Automatic de‐ the front passenger seat, ensure that the front
activation of front passenger airbags, refer to and side airbags on the front passenger side are
page 87. deactivated.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
an increased risk of injury to the child when the an increased risk of injury to the child when the
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
fixing system.◀ fixing system.◀
56
Seat position and height 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
At a glance
Before installing a child restraint fixing system, pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
move the front passenger seat as far back as system. The safety belt is locked.
possible and adjust its height to the highest po‐
sition to obtain the best possible position for the Unlocking the safety belt
belt and to offer optimal protection in the event 1. Open the belt buckle.
of an accident. 2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
Do not change the seat position and height after 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
Controls
this. pletely.
Backrest width*
Before mounting a child restraint fixing system LATCH child restraint fixing
on the front passenger seat, open the backrest
system
Driving tips
width, refer to page 46, completely. Do not
change the backrest width after this. LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
Backrest width for the child seat
Note
Before installing a child restraint fixing
system in the front passenger seat, the backrest Manufacturer's information for LATCH
width must be opened completely. Do not child restraint fixing systems
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix‐
Navigation
change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the
stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀ ing systems, observe the operating and safety
information from the system manufacturer; oth‐
erwise, the level of protection may be reduced.◀
Child seat security
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint fix‐
ing system is resting snugly against the back‐
rest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered
may be reduced.◀
The rear safety belts
▷ BMW X5: all safety belts of the 2nd and 3rd
row seats*
▷ BMW X6: all safety belts of the 2nd row seats
And the safety belt for the front passenger can
be locked to prevent extension in order to permit
Mobility
attachment of child restraint fixing systems.
Locking the safety belt

1. Pull out the belt webbing completely. The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are
located at the points indicated by the arrows.
2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with
the belt.
Reference
57
Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing
Transporting children safely on the back of the rear seat backrests, see ar‐
systems rows.
1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer
to the operating instructions of the system. Retaining strap guide
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ Retaining strap
erly connected.
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it
Child restraint fixing system with a passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap
tether strap will not properly secure the child restraint fixing
system in the event of an accident.◀
Mounting points
LATCH mounting eyes BMW X5
Only use the mounting eyes for the upper
LATCH retaining strap to secure child restraint
fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes
could be damaged.◀
BMW X5
There are three additional mounting points for

child restraint fixing systems with a tether strap
on the 2nd row seats, refer to arrows. Fold out
before using the center mounting point.
1 Direction of travel
BMW X6 2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point
5 Backrest
6 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fixing
system
When using the cargo cover, pass the upper re‐
taining strap between the backrest of the 2nd
row seats and the cargo cover.
For child restraint fixing systems with tether

strap, there are three additional mounting points
58
At a glance
Controls
BMW X6: outer rear seats BMW X6: center rear seat
Driving tips
Navigation
1 Direction of travel 1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint 2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap 3 Strap guide
4 Mounting point 4 Hook for upper retaining strap
5 Backrest 5 Mounting point
6 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fixing 6 Backrest
system 7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fixing
When using the cargo cover, pass the upper re‐ system
taining strap between the rear seat backrest and When using the cargo cover, pass the upper re‐
Mobility
the cargo cover. taining strap between the rear seat backrest and
the cargo cover.
Reference
59
Transporting children safely 1. Slide the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the tether strap between the head re‐
straint brackets.
3. Hook in the tether strap on the mounting
point with the hook.
4. Slide the head restraint into the bottom po‐
sition.
5. Pull tether strap taut.
Attaching the retaining strap to the BMW X6

backrest of the 2nd row seats
1. Route the upper retaining strap over the
BMW X5 middle of the head restraint.
On outer seats: 2. Attach the upper retaining strap to the

mounting point with the hook.
1. Slide the head restraint upward. 3. Pull the retaining strap taut until it com‐
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the presses the cushion of the head restraint,
supports of the head restraint. thus preventing the strap from sliding off.
3. Attach the upper retaining strap to the
mounting point with the hook.
4. Slide the head restraint into the bottom po‐ Locking the doors and
sition. windows
5. Pull the upper retaining strap taut.
Rear doors
On the center seat when equipped with two
rows of seats:
1. Fold the center armrest somewhat toward

the front.
2. Guide the tether strap through the opening
in the center armrest.
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.

The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear

Press the button on the driver's door if
3. Fold back and engage the center armrest. children are being transported in the
4. Hook in tether strap on mounting point. rear.
5. Pull tether strap taut. This locks the rear window switches so that the
On the center seat when equipped with three windows cannot be operated from the rear:
rows of seats: safety switch, refer to page 41.
60
Driving
At a glance
Ignition lock Start/Stop button
Insert the remote control into the
ignition lock
Controls
Driving tips
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig‐
nition on or off and starts the engine.
The engine starts if the brake pedal is pressed

Insert the remote control all the way into the ig‐
when you press the Start/Stop button.
nition lock.
Radio ready state is switched on. Individual elec‐ Radio ready state
Navigation
trical consumers can operate.
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
The time and the external temperature are dis‐
Comfort Access*
played in the instrument cluster.
If the car is equipped with Comfort Access, only
Radio ready state is switched off automatically:
insert the remote control into the ignition lock,
▷ When the remote control is removed from
refer to page 37, under special circumstances.
the ignition lock.
Removing the remote control from the ▷ With Comfort Access*, refer to page 37, by
ignition lock touching the area above the door lock.
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out
of the ignition lock Ignition on
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the All electrical consumers can operate. The od‐
ignition lock as this may cause damage.◀ ometer and trip odometer are displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Before removing the remote control, push it all To save battery power when the engine is off,
the way in to release the locking mechanism. switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
The ignition is switched off if it was on. electronic systems/power consumers.
Radio ready state and ignition off

All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis‐
Mobility
plays in the instrument cluster go out.

Transmission position P with the ignition
off
When the ignition is switched off, position P is
engaged automatically. When in an automatic
Reference
61
Starting the engine
Driving car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is
not switched off accidentally.◀
For example, the ignition is not switched off in

the following situations:
▷ The brake is applied.
▷ The low beams are switched on
Starting the engine

Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Com‐
General information
fort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 37.
Enclosed areas
1. Depress the brake pedal.
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes 2. Press the Start/Stop button.
may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The starter operates automatically for a certain
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an time, and stops automatically as soon as the en‐
odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀ gine has started.
Unattended vehicle Diesel engine

Do not leave the car unattended with the If the engine is cold and temperatures are below
engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten‐ approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃, the start process may be de‐
tial source of danger. layed somewhat due to automatic preheating.
Before leaving the car with the engine running, A message is displayed.
set the parking brake and place the transmission
in position P or neutral to prevent the car from
moving.◀
Engine stop
Frequent starting in quick succession
General information
Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting
the car and avoid starting the car frequently in Take the remote control with you
quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not Take the remote control with you when
burned or is inadequately burned, and there is leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
the danger of overheating and damaging the cannot operate the windows and injure them‐
catalytic converter.◀ selves.◀
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the Set the parking brake and further secure
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right the vehicle as required
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
and downward inclines, further secure the vehi‐
cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in
the direction of the curb.◀
62
Switching off the engine Setting manually
At a glance
Procedure
1. Engage transmission position P with the ve‐
hicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Set the parking brake.
Controls
4. Remove the remote control from the ignition
lock, refer to page 61.
Before driving into a car wash Pull the button. The parking brake is set.
The vehicle is able to roll when the following The indicator lamp lights up in red. The
steps are adhered to: parking brake is set.
Driving tips
1. With Comfort Access*: insert the remote Indicator lamp in Canadian models.
control in the ignition lock.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Engage transmission position N. To set the parking brake, the remote control
does not need to be in the ignition lock.
4. Release the parking brake or deactivate Au‐
Navigation
tomatic Hold. Set the parking brake and further secure
5. Switch the engine off. the vehicle as required
Transmission position P will be engaged: Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
▷ Automatically after approx. 30 minutes. and downward inclines, further secure the vehi‐
▷ If you remove the remote control from the cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in
ignition lock. the direction of the curb.◀
While driving
Parking brake Use while driving:
The concept Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the button is being pulled.
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre‐
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it The indicator lamp lights up in red, a sig‐
brakes the rear wheels. nal sounds and the brake lamps light up.
The parking brake can be set manually or auto‐ Indicator lamp in Canadian models.
matically:
▷ Manual: by pulling and pushing the switch.
▷ Automatic: by activating Automatic Hold. If the vehicle is braked to a speed of approx.
2 mph/3 km/h, the parking brake remains set.
Mobility
Reference
63
Releasing manually
Driving Indicator lamp in Canadian models.
Before driving away:

▷ Release the parking brake manually.
▷ Reactivate Automatic Hold.
Leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
Press the button with the brake depressed.
mission and ensure that the parking brake is set.
The LED and indicator lamp go out. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
Activating
Indicator lamp in Canadian models.

Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot release the parking brake.◀
Automatic Hold
The concept Press the button. The LED in the button lights
up and the indication AUTO H appears in the in‐
This system assists the driver by automatically strument panel.
setting and releasing the brake, such as when
moving in stop-and-go traffic. Automatic Hold is activated.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when If the vehicle is being held by Automatic
it is stationary. Hold, the indicator light in the instrument
On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle panel also lights up in green.
from rolling backward when driving away. Indicator lamp in Canadian models.
For your safety

Automatic Hold is deactivated automatically and
the parking brake is set when:
Deactivating
Press the button again, the LED in the button
▷ The engine is switched off.
and the indication AUTO H in the instrument
▷ A door is opened and the driver's safety belt panel go out.
is unbuckled.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
▷ The vehicle is braked to a standstill with the
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
parking brake while driving.
then press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.
The indicator lamp switches from green
When the parking brake is set manually, refer to
to red and the letters AUTO H go out.
page 63, Automatic Hold is deactivated auto‐
matically.
64
Driving Releasing the parking brake manually
At a glance
Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is auto‐ In the event of an electrical power loss or elec‐
matically secured against rolling when it stops. trical malfunction, you can release the parking
The indicator lamp lights up in green. brake manually.
Secure the vehicle against rolling
Before releasing the parking brake man‐
Indicator lamp in Canadian models. ually, and whenever you park the vehicle with the
parking brake released, ensure that position P of
Controls
the automatic transmission is engaged. Note
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off.
the display in the instrument cluster.
The brake is released automatically.
In addition, secure the vehicle against rolling,
The indicator lamp goes out. e.g. with a wheel chock. Otherwise there is a
danger that the vehicle could roll if parked on a
Driving tips
Before driving into a car wash
steep slope.◀
Deactivate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the
parking brake will be set when the vehicle is sta‐ Jump-starting and towing, refer to page 282.
tionary and the vehicle will no longer be able to
roll.◀ Unlocking
1. Open the left-hand side panel in the cargo
Parking area.
Navigation
The parking brake is automatically set if the en‐ 2. Remove the first aid kit* and the warning tri‐
gine is switched off while the vehicle is being angle*. Close the bracket of the warning tri‐
held by Automatic Hold. angle.
The indicator lamp changes from green 3. Insert the releasing tool or screwdriver, con‐
to red. tained in the tool kit under the cargo floor
panel, refer to page 270, at the releasing
Indicator lamp in Canadian models. point.
The parking brake is not set if the engine is

switched off while the vehicle is coasting to a
halt. Automatic Hold is deactivated.
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot release the parking brake.◀
4. Firmly pull the releasing tool or screwdriver
Malfunction upward against the mechanical resistance,
refer to arrow, until a considerable increase
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
Mobility
in force is felt and the parking brake is then

parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling
clearly heard to release.
using a wheel chock, for example, when leaving
it. 5. Stow the releasing tool or screwdriver,
warning triangle*, and first aid kit* and close
the left side panel in the cargo area.
Reference
65
Turn signal, high beams,
Driving Have the malfunction corrected
Have the malfunction corrected at the headlamp flasher
nearest service center or at a workshop that
works according to BMW repair procedures with
correspondingly trained personnel. If the park‐
ing brake has been released manually in re‐
sponse to a malfunction, only technicians can
return it to operation.◀
Following manual release, the actual status of

the parking brake may deviate from that dis‐
played by the indicator lamp.
1 High beams
Putting into operation after a power
failure 2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signal
Putting the parking brake into operation
The parking brake should only be put into Signaling a turn
operation again if it was manually released due
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
to an interruption in the supply of electrical
power. Otherwise the operation of the parking To switch off manually, press the lever to the re‐
brake is not ensured and there is a danger of the sistance point.
vehicle rolling despite the parking brake being Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in‐
set.◀ dicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Procedure Signaling a turn briefly

1. Switch on the ignition. Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
2. Press the button with the brake depressed. it there for as long as you want the turn signal to
flash.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out as soon as the parking
brake is ready for operation.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point.
Indicator lamp in Canadian models.
The turn signal flashes three times.
This function can be activated or deactivated:
Any noises which occur are normal. Startup may
1. "Settings"
take several seconds.
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
66
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
At a glance
rently in use. sition when released.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
Washer/wiper system
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Do not switch on the wipers if they are fro‐ Rain sensor
zen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper
Controls
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time
blades and the windshield wiper motor may be between wipes is controlled automatically and
damaged.◀ depends on the intensity of the rainfall.
The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield,
directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.
Driving tips
Activating the rain sensor
Navigation
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
4 Cleaning the windshield and headlamps* Press the button, arrow 3.
5 Setting the sensitivity of the rain sensor The LED in the button lights up.
Switching on wipers
Rain sensor sensitivity
Press the wiper lever upward, arrow 1.
Turn thumbwheel 5 up or down.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released. Deactivating the rain sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3.
Normal wiper speed
The LED goes out.
Press up once.
The system switches to operation in the inter‐ Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary. Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise, dam‐
Fast wiper speed age could be caused by undesired wiper activa‐
Press up twice or press once beyond the resist‐ tion.◀
Mobility
ance point.
The system switches to normal speed when the Cleaning the windshield and
vehicle is stationary. headlamps*
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Switching off wipers or brief wipe The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
Press the wiper lever down, arrow 2. shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Reference
67
Washer fluid
Driving When the vehicle lighting system is switched on,
the headlamps are cleaned at regular and ap‐
propriate intervals. General information
Do not use the washer system at freezing Antifreeze for washer fluid
temperatures
Antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep
Do not use the washers if there is any danger it away from sources of ignition.
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
Only keep it in the closed original container and
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
inaccessible to children.
reason, use antifreeze.
Follow the instructions on the container.◀
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
empty; otherwise, you could damage the
pump.◀ Washer fluid reservoir
Adding washer fluid
Windshield washer nozzles Only add washer fluid when the engine is
The windshield washer nozzles are heated au‐ cool, and then close the cover completely to
tomatically while the engine is running or the ig‐ avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot
nition is switched on. engine parts.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk
BMW X5: rear window wiper to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀
1 Intermittent wipe
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
When reverse gear is engaged, the system voir.
switches to continuous operation.
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer
2 Cleaning the rear window antifreeze, according to the manufacturer's rec‐
Do not use the washing mechanisms ommendations.
when the washer fluid reservoir is empty Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
Do not use washing mechanisms when the the correct mixing ratio.
washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you
will damage the washer pump.◀ Capacity
Approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters.
68
Automatic transmission with Press on the brake pedal until you start
At a glance
driving
Steptronic
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
Transmission positions select a driving position, maintain pressure on
the brake pedal until you are ready to start.◀
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐ Shifting into D, R, N
ward gears are available.
Controls
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con‐
sumption is lowest when you are driving in po‐
sition D.
Kickdown
Driving tips
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the accelerator beyond
the resistance point at the full throttle position.
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
R is Reverse rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. When shifting out of P or into R, simultaneously
push the unlock button 1.
Navigation
N is Neutral The engaged transmission position is displayed
Use in automatic car washes, for example. The on the selector lever.
vehicle can roll. After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its
When the ignition is switched off, refer to center position.
page 61, position P is engaged automatically.
Engaging P
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically as soon as the en‐
gine is switched off unless N is engaged and, in
vehicles with Comfort Access, the remote con‐
trol is inserted in the ignition lock, refer to
page 61. Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that
the transmission position P is engaged; other‐
wise, the vehicle may begin to roll.
Press button P.
Engaging transmission position P is engaged if the driver's safety belt is unbuck‐

▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐ led and the driver's door is opened while the ve‐
Mobility
gaged if the engine is running and the brake hicle is stationary and transmission position R or
pedal is pressed. D is engaged. Before leaving the vehicle, ensure
that the transmission position P is engaged; oth‐
▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the
erwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be
executed: shift lock.
Reference
69
Sport program and manual mode M/S BMW X6: Gear change using the shift
Driving
paddles on the steering wheel
Activating the sport program The shifting paddles make it possible to quickly
change gears since both hands can remain on
the steering wheel.
▷ If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears while in automatic mode
D, the transmission temporarily switches to
manual mode.
▷ If the shift paddles are not used to accelerate
or shift gears for a certain amount of time,
the transmission switches back to auto‐
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐ matic mode D.
mission position D. With the transmission position M/S selected,
The Sport program is activated and DS is dis‐ the manual mode remains active.
played in the instrument cluster; in the BMW X6,
S4 is displayed, for example.
This position is recommended for a perform‐
ance-oriented driving style.
Activating the M/S manual mode

Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
Push the selector lever forward or backward.
▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed. ▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate
cluster, e.g., M1. engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift
down if the engine speed is too high.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐
ward.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The transmission only shifts up or down if the
rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate. If the
engine speed is too high, the transmission does
not shift down.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument panel, followed by the current gear.
Ending the sport program/manual

mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
The gear position is displayed and the engaged
D is displayed in the instrument cluster. gear, such as M4, is displayed in manual mode.
70
Displays
At a glance
Odometer, external Retrieving date
temperature display, clock
Controls
Driving tips
Press the button on turn signal lever upward; the
date appears.
1 Knob in the instrument cluster
2 Time, external temperature, and date Set the date, refer to page 79.
3 Odometer and trip odometer Pressing the button upward or downward sev‐
eral times changes the display between clock,
Knob in the instrument cluster external temperature, date, and Check Control
Navigation
messages, refer to page 76.
Press the knob.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip External temperature warning
odometer is reset.
If the display drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal
Press the knob for approx. 5 seconds: sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is
View service requirement display, refer to the increased danger of ice.
page 75
Ice on roads
▷ When the ignition is switched off, the time,
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃,
external temperature and odometer are dis‐
there can be a risk of ice on roads.
played.
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady
Units of measure roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan‐
ger of an accident.◀
To set the respective units of measure, miles or
km for the odometer and ℃ or ℉ for the external
temperature, refer to page 80. Odometer and trip odometer
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ Resetting trip odometer:
rently in use. With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
the instrument cluster.
Time, date, external temperature
From radio readiness the external temperature When the vehicle is parked
Mobility
and the time are displayed. If you still want to view the time, external tem‐
Set the time, refer to page 79. perature and odometer reading briefly after the
remote control has been taken out of the ignition
lock:
Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
Reference
71
Tachometer Current fuel consumption*
Displays
Displays the current fuel consumption. You can

check whether you are currently driving in an ef‐
ficient and environmentally-friendly manner.
Engine oil temperature*
Never force the engine speed up into the red

warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel
supply is interrupted to protect the engine.
Coolant temperature
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at the low tem‐
A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and perature end. Drive at moderate engine and
therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi‐ vehicle speeds.
tion, a message will appear on the Control Dis‐
▷ Normal operating temperature: the pointer
play.
is in the middle or in the right half of the tem‐
Check the coolant level, refer to page 267. perature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem‐
perature end. Switch off the engine imme‐
diately and allow it to cool down.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Check the oil level, refer to page 265.
72
Fuel gauge Computer
At a glance
Displaying information on the
instrument panel
Controls
The vehicle inclination may cause the display to
vary.
Driving tips
Notes on refueling, refer to page 246.
Press the computer button on the turn signal
lever.
Reserve
After the reserve range is reached: Information is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
▷ A message is briefly displayed on the Con‐
trol Display.
Overview of the information
▷ The remaining range is shown on the com‐
Navigation
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn sig‐
puter.
nal lever displays the information on the instru‐
▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such ment cluster in the following order:
as when corners are taken rapidly, engine
▷ Range.
functions are not ensured.
▷ Average speed*.
The message appears continuously below a
range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. ▷ Average fuel consumption.
To set the corresponding units of measure, refer
Refuel promptly
to page 80.
At the latest, refuel when the range drops
below 30 miles/50 km; otherwise, engine func‐ Information in detail
tions are not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 18 miles/30 km.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
Mobility
engine stopped do not enter into the calculation.

With the trip computer, refer to page 74, you
can have the average speed displayed for an ad‐
ditional distance.
To reset the average speed: press the button on
Reference
the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.
73
Average fuel consumption
Displays
This is calculated for the period during which the
engine is running.
You can have the average consumption for an‐
other trip displayed, refer to Displays on the
Control Display below.
To reset the average consumption: press the
button on the turn indicator lever for ap‐
prox. 2 seconds.
▷ Departure time.
Displays on the Control Display ▷ Trip duration.

Display the computer or trip computer on the ▷ Trip distance.
Control Display. Both displays show:
1. "Vehicle Info" ▷ Average fuel consumption and
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" ▷ Average speed.
Resetting the fuel consumption and

speed
Resetting the values for average speed and
average fuel consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press

the controller.
2. Press the controller again to confirm your
selection.
Displays on the "Onboard info":
Resetting the trip computer
Resetting all values:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset"
▷ Range.
▷ Distance to destination.
▷ Estimated time of arrival if a destination was
entered in the navigation system*, refer to
page 153.
Displays on the "Trip computer":
74
Service requirements Displays
At a glance
Symbol Function
Service requirements
Controls
Engine oil
The remaining driving distance and the date of

the next scheduled service are displayed briefly
immediately after you start the engine or switch
Driving tips
on the ignition.
Roadworthiness test*
The current service requirements can be read
out from the remote control by the service spe‐
cialist.
For certain maintenance operations, you can
view the distance remaining or the due date for Front brake pads
Navigation
that operation in the instrument cluster.
Rear brake pads
Brake fluid
1. With the ignition switched on, press the
knob in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 71, for approx. 5 seconds until the
service requirements are displayed.
2. Press the knob repeatedly to display the in‐
dividual service requirement items. The sequence of displayed service items may
vary. First the data for the next maintenance are
displayed.
Detailed information on service

Mobility
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Display.
1. "Vehicle Info"
Reference
75
Displays 2. "Vehicle status" 4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
3. "Service required" 5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.

Required maintenance procedures and legally 6. "Date:"
mandated inspections are displayed. 7. Create the settings.
Additional information can be displayed on each 8. Press the controller to apply the setting. The
entry: year is highlighted.
Select the entry and press the controller. 9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
To exit from the menu: 10. Press the controller to apply the setting. The
Move the controller to the left. date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Symbols
Move the controller to the left.
Symbols Description
Automatic Service Request*
No service is currently required. Data regarding the maintenance status or legally
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
matically transmitted to your service center be‐
The deadline for service or a le‐ fore a service due date.
gally mandated inspection is
You can check when your service center was
approaching. Please make a
notified.
service appointment.
1. "Vehicle Info"
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed. 2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Entering dates*
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Make sure the date on the Control Display is set Check Control
correctly, refer to page 79.
The concept
1. "Vehicle Info"
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
2. "Vehicle status"
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys‐
3. "Service required" tems monitored.
A Check Control message consists of indicator
and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and,
76
in some circumstances, an acoustic signal and Symbols
At a glance
text messages at the top of the Control Display. The following functions can be selected within
the supplementary text message, depending on
Indicator/warning lamps the Check Control message.
▷ "Service request"
Contact the service partner.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
Controls
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
Driving tips
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper

functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Navigation
Press the button in the turn signal lever up or
down.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐

played continuously and are not cleared un‐
til the malfunction is eliminated. If several
malfunctions occur at once, the messages
are displayed consecutively.
The symbol indicates that Check Control These messages can be hidden for approx.
messages have been stored. The Check Control 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
messages can be displayed later. played again automatically.
▷ Other Check Control messages are hidden
Text messages automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed again
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
later.
Display in combination with a symbol in the in‐
strument cluster explain a Check Control mes‐
Viewing stored Check Control
sage and the meaning of the indicator and warn‐
messages
ing lamps.
Supplementary text messages

Mobility
Addition information, such as on the cause of a

fault or the required action, can be called up via
Check Control.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Reference
77
Displays 1. Press the button on the turn signal lever 3. "Warning at:"
downward. "CHECK OK" or the stored
Check Control messages appear on the dis‐
play.
„CHECK OK“ is shown if no messages are
present.
Check Control messages are accompanied
by text messages on the Control Display.
2. Press the button to display additional mes‐
sages, the time and external temperature, or
the date. 4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
Displaying stored Check Control 5. Press the controller.
messages The speed limit is stored.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status" Applying your current speed as the
limit
3. "Check Control"
1. "Settings"
4. Select the text message.
2. "Speed"
Messages after trip completion 3. "Select current speed"
Malfunctions indicated during a trip are dis‐ The system adopts your current speed as the
played again after the ignition is switched off. limit.
Activating/deactivating the limit

Speed limit* 1. "Settings"
Entry of a speed limit which, when reached, 2. "Speed"
should cause a Check Control message to be 3. "Warning"
issued.
Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops be‐
low the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/ Settings on the Control
5 km/h. Display
Displaying, setting or changing the Time
limit
1. "Settings" currently in use.
2. "Speed"
78
Setting the time zone* 6. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
At a glance
1. "Settings" are displayed.
2. "Time/Date" 7. Press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format

1. "Settings"
Controls
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
3. "Time zone:"
Driving tips
Date
4. Select the desired time zone.
The time zone is stored. currently in use.
Setting the time Setting the date

1. "Settings" 1. "Settings"
Navigation
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:" Setting the date format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
Mobility
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours

are displayed.
The date format is stored.

Reference
79
Language
Displays 1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
3. Select the desired menu item.

4. Select the desired unit.
rently in use.
4. Select the desired language. Brightness

Setting the brightness
rently in use.
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
Setting the voice dialog 1. "Settings"
To switch between a standard dialog and a short 2. "Control display"
dialog.
3. "Brightness"
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode"
4. Select the desired dialog.
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐

ness is set.
rently in use.
Units of measure Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness control may not be clearly visible.
Setting the units of measure
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/dis‐
tance, temperature, and pressure:
80
Lamps
At a glance
At a glance Welcome lamps
When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in
position or : the parking and interior
lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Controls
Activating/deactivating the welcome
lamps
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
Driving tips
0 Lamps off and daytime running lights* 3. "Welcome light"
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lights*
2 Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control*, daytime run‐
ning lights*, welcome lamps, adaptive light
control* and High-beam Assistant*
Navigation
Parking lamps/low beams,
headlamp control*
Parking lamps rently in use.
Switch position : the vehicle lamps light

Headlamp courtesy delay feature
up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
The low beams stay lit for a short while after the
Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐
ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched
riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
off and the headlamp flasher is switched on.
charged and it would then be impossible to start
the engine.
Setting the duration
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
1. "Settings"
one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
page 83. 2. "Lighting"
When the driver's door is opened with the igni‐

tion switched off: the exterior lighting is auto‐
matically switched off when the light switch is in
position 0, 2 or 3.
Mobility
Switch on the parking lamps if necessary, switch

position 1.
Low beams
Switch position with the ignition switched
on: the low beams light up.
Reference
81
Lamps 3. "Pathway light.: s" 3. "Daytime running lamps"
4. Set the duration. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use.
rently in use.
Automatic headlamp control* Adaptive light control*

Switch position : the low beams are switched
on and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twi‐ The concept
light or if there is precipitation. The LED next to Adaptive light control is a variable headlamp
the symbol lights up. control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on. Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
The low beams remain switched on independ‐
the course of the road.
ent of the ambient lighting conditions when you
switch on the front fog lamps*. In sharp curves, e.g. serpentines, or during turn‐
ing, up to a certain speed one of the two front
Personal responsibility
fog lamps* is switched on as a turning lamp. This
The automatic headlamp control cannot provides improved illumination of the area inside
serve as a substitute for your personal judgment the curve.
in determining when the lamps should be
switched on in response to ambient lighting Controls
conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect Activating
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you Switch position with the ignition switched
should always switch on the lamps manually un‐ on.
der these conditions.◀
The turning lamps are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
Daytime running lights of turn signals.
The daytime running lights light up in posi‐ Standstill function*: to avoid blinding oncoming
tion 0, and . After the ignition is traffic, the Adaptive Light Control directs light
switched off, the parking lamps light up in posi‐ towards the front passenger side when the ve‐
tion . hicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, both turning lamps are
Activating/deactivating active.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
82
Malfunction the front of the interior rearview mirror. The as‐
At a glance
A message is displayed. sistant ensures that the high beams are
switched on whenever the traffic situation al‐
Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has
lows. The driver can intervene at any time and
failed. Have the system checked as soon as pos‐
switch the high beams on and off as usual.
sible.
Activating the High-beam Assistant
1. Turn the light switch to .
High beams/roadside parking
Controls
2. With the low beams switched on, briefly
lamps
push the turn indicator lever in the direction
of the high beam.
Driving tips
1 High beams
Navigation
2 Headlamp flasher The indicator lamp in the instrument
3 Roadside parking lamps* cluster lights up. The high beams are
switched on and off automatically.
Left and right roadside parking lamps* The system responds to light from oncoming
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ad‐
equate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or Switching the high beams on and off
down beyond the resistance point for ap‐ manually
prox. 2 seconds, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the battery.
Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly long
periods of time; otherwise, the battery might not
have enough power to start the engine.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction
to the pressure point, arrow 3.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
Mobility
▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.

High-beam Assistant* To reactivate the High-beam Assistant, briefly
push the turn indicator lever toward the high
The concept
beams.
When the lights are switched on, this system
automatically switches the high beams on and
Reference
off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on
83
Activating/deactivating via iDrive
Lamps The view field of the sensor is located on the
1. "Settings" front of the interior rearview mirror.
2. "Lighting" Do not cover this area with stickers, etc.
3. "High beam assistant" Clean the sensor view field with a cloth mois‐
tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
Front fog lamps*

The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on.
Press the button. The green indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
page 82, is activated, the low beams will come
rently in use.
on automatically when you switch on the fog
lamps.
System limits
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as Instrument lighting
a substitute for the driver's personal judgment
of when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐
ually switch off the high beams in situations
where this is required to avoid a safety risk.◀
The system is not fully functional in situations

such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
Adjust the brightness using the thumbwheel.
▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings. Interior lamps
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming General information
traffic on freeways. The interior lamps, footwell lamps*, exit lamps*,
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres‐ cargo area lamps and courtesy lamps* are con‐
ence of highly reflective signs. trolled automatically.
▷ At low speeds. The courtesy lamps* have LED lights in the door
handles to illuminate the exterior area in front of
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
the doors.
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc. To avoid draining the battery, all lamps inside
the car are switched off about 8 minutes after
▷ If the sensor view field is dirty.
the ignition is switched off, Start/Stop button,
refer to page 61.
84
Switching the interior lamps on and off
At a glance
Controls
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for

approx. 3 seconds.
Driving tips
To clear this setting: briefly press the button.
Reading lamps
Navigation
Press the button.
Reading lamps are located at the front and rear*

next to the interior lamps.
Mobility
Reference
85
Safety
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbags
2 Head airbags
3 Side airbags
Front airbags ▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐

Front airbags help protect the driver and front jects between an airbag and a person.
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐ the front passenger side as a storage area.
quate restraint. ▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover
Side airbags with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the attach holders such as for navigation instru‐
side of the body in the chest and lap area. ments and mobile phones.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
Head airbags correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can
head. occur if the front airbag is triggered.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
Protective action other objects on the front passenger seat
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ that are not approved specifically for seats
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end with integrated side airbags.
collisions. ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
Information on how to ensure the optimal ets, over the backrests.
protective effect of the airbags ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags. away from the side airbag and do not rest
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
can occur if the airbags are triggered.
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep ▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.
the danger of injury to your hands or arms as ▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.
low as possible if the airbag is triggered.
86
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐ Leave feet in the footwell
At a glance
bag cover panels, cover them or modify Make sure that the front passenger keeps
them in any way. his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐ passenger airbags may not function properly.◀
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel covers, the Child restraint fixing system in the front
dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the passenger seat
sides of the headliner.◀ Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
Controls
Even when all instructions are followed closely, ger seat, refer to the safety notes and instruc‐
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be tions under Children on the front passenger
ruled out in certain situations. seat, refer to page 56.◀
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to

short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐ Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
Driving tips
ing impairment in sensitive individuals.
When transporting older children and adults, the
In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
front passenger airbags may be deactivated in
and after triggering of the airbags
certain sitting positions. In this case, the indica‐
Do not touch the individual components imme‐ tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights
diately after the system has been triggered; oth‐ up.
erwise, there is the danger of burns.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
Navigation
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐ the front passenger airbags are activated and
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by the indicator lamp goes out.
your service center or a workshop that has the
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
necessary authorization for handling explosives.
the person sit in the rear.
Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
To make sure that occupation of the seat cush‐
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or un‐
ion can be detected correctly:
desired triggering of the airbag, either of which
could result in injury.◀ ▷ Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion pad‐
ding, ball mats or other items to the passen‐
Warnings and information on the airbags are ger seat unless they are specifically recom‐
also found on the sun visors. mended by BMW.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
Automatic deactivation of the front
could press against the seat from below.
passenger airbags
The occupation of the seat is detected by eval‐ Indicator lamp for the front passenger
uating the impression on the occupied seat sur‐ airbags
face of the front passenger seat.
The front and side airbags on the front passen‐
ger side are activated or deactivated accordingly
by the system.
Mobility
The indicator lamp above the interior rearview

mirror shows the current status of the front pas‐
senger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to
Front passenger airbag indicator lamp below.
Reference
87
Airbag system malfunction
Safety Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the ar‐
rangement of the switches and indicator lamps ▷ Warning lamp does not light up in the radio
may differ somewhat. ready state.
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐ ▷ Warning lamp remains permanently on.
bags indicates the operating state of the front
passenger airbags. Have the airbag system checked without
delay if there is a malfunction
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐
tivated or deactivated. In the event of a malfunction in the airbag sys‐
tem, have it checked without delay; otherwise,
▷ The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
there is the risk that the system will not function
a child restraint fixing system intended for
as intended even if a sufficiently severe accident
the purpose is properly detected on the
occurs.◀
seat. The airbags on the front passenger
side are not activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of FTM Flat Tire Monitor*
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐ The concept
tivated. The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when
the seat is empty. However, the airbags on It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing
the front passenger side are not activated. the rotational speeds of the individual wheels
while moving.
The system generally detects children seated in
a child seat, especially in the child seats that In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and
were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐
manufactured. After installing a child seat, make sponding wheel change. This is detected and
sure that the indicator lamp for the front pas‐ reported as a flat tire.
senger airbags lights up. This indicates that the
child seat has been detected and the front pas‐ Functional requirements
senger airbags are not activated. The system must have been initialized when the
tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise,
Operational readiness of airbag system reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. In‐
itialize the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
vance.◀
In the radio ready state and beyond, refer to
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires can‐
page 61, the warning lamp comes on briefly to
not be detected. Therefore, check the tire infla‐
indicate that the entire airbag system and the
tion pressure regularly.
belt tensioners are operational.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
88
▷ When the system has not been initialized. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
At a glance
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
surface. When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels, bility Control is switched on if necessary.
high lateral acceleration.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
▷ When driving with snow chains*.
When driving with a compact wheel*, the Flat Run-flat tires
Controls
Tire Monitor is unable to function.
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can Do not continue driving without run-flat
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., tires
whether or not the FTM is active. If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires
Driving tips
as provided at the factory, do not continue driv‐
1. "Vehicle Info" ing. Continuing to drive could cause severe ac‐
2. "Vehicle status" cidents.◀
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed. Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
Navigation
Initialization
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
The initialization process adopts the set inflation vers.
tire pressures as reference values for the detec‐
tion of a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐ 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
firming the inflation pressures. If the defective tire continues to lose pres‐
Do not initialize the system when driving with sure, its position will be indicated to you on
snow chains* or with a compact wheel*. the Control Display.
3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation
1. "Vehicle Info" pressure in all four tires.
2. "Vehicle status" If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
3. "Reset" correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
4. Start the engine - do not drive away. been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
5. Start the initialization with "Reset".
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
6. Drive away.
tire inflation pressure:
The initialization is completed while driving,
▷ With a light load:
which can be interrupted at any time.
1 to 2 people without luggage:
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes. Approx. 155 miles/200 km.
▷ With a medium load:
Mobility
Indication of a flat tire 2 persons, cargo area full, or 4 persons with‐

The warning lamp lights up red. A out luggage:
message appears on the Control Dis‐ Approx. 94 miles/150 km.
play. In addition, a signal sounds.
▷ With a full load:
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation 4 or more persons, cargo area full:
Reference
pressure.
89
Safety Approx. 30 miles/50 km. Always use wheels with TPM electronics to en‐
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire sure that the system will operate properly.
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load Reset the system after each correction of the
and the driving style and conditions. tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, wheel change.
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer System limits
braking distance, and altered self-steering Sudden tire damage
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.
vance.◀
Because the possible driving distance depends
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the The system does not operate correctly if it has
actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐ not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be
pending on the driving speed, road conditions, indicated despite correct tire inflation pres‐
external temperature, cargo load, etc. sures.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
Continued driving with a flat tire
tire:
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
▷ If a wheel without TPM electronics is
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
mounted, e.g., compact wheel*.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
▷ When the TPM is disturbed by other sys‐
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
tems or devices with the same radio fre‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
quency.
braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐
erties.◀
Status display
Final tire failure 1. "Vehicle Info"
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can 2. "Vehicle status"
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed 3. "TPM"
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐ The status is displayed.
tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀
Status indicator on the Control Display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM*
A change in the tire inflation pressure during
The concept driving is taken into account.
The tire inflation pressure is measured in the A correction is only necessary if this is indicated
four mounted tires. The system notifies you if by the TPM
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
more tires. Wheels, green
The tire inflation pressure is equal to the target
Functional requirements state.
The system must have been reset while the in‐
flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable One wheel is yellow
signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.
90
All wheels are yellow Low tire pressure message
At a glance
▷ A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure The small warning lamp lights up yel‐
in several tires. low and the large warning lamp lights
▷ The system was not reset after a wheel up red. A message appears on the
change and thus issues a warning based on Control Display. In addition, a signal
the inflation pressures initialized last. sounds.
▷ A flat tire in one or more tires while the sys‐ ▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in‐
tem is being reset. flation pressure.
Controls
▷ The system was not reset after a wheel
Wheels, gray change and thus issues warnings based on
The system cannot detect a flat tire. the inflation pressures initialized last.
Reasons for this may be: Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Driving tips
▷ TPM is being reset.
When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec‐
same radio frequency.
essary.
▷ Malfunction.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Resetting the system
Reset the system after each correction of the Run-flat tires
Navigation
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
wheel change. speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
1. "Vehicle Info" Do not continue driving without run-flat
2. "Vehicle status" tires
3. "Reset" If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires
as provided at the factory, do not continue driv‐
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
ing. Continuing to drive could cause severe ac‐
5. Reset the tire pressure using "Reset". cidents.◀
6. Drive away.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting Continued driving with a flat tire
TPM..." is displayed. If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
After driving for a few minutes, the set tire infla‐
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
tion pressures are applied as set values. The re‐
vers.
setting process is completed automatically as
you drive. The tires are shown in green and 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
"TPM active" is shown on the Control Display. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you next opportunity.
drive away again, the process resumes auto‐ If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
matically. Do not reset the system when driving correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
Mobility
with a compact wheel*. have been reset. Reset the system.

If a flat tire is detected while the system is re‐ Possible driving distance with complete loss of
setting, all tires on the Control Display are dis‐ tire inflation pressure:
played in yellow. The message "Low tire!" is ▷ With a light load:
shown.
1 to 2 people without luggage:
Reference
91
Safety Approx. 155 miles/200 km. The system detected a wheel change but was
▷ With a medium load: not reset.
2 persons, cargo area full, or 4 persons with‐ Warnings regarding the current tire inflation
out luggage: pressure are not reliable.
Approx. 94 miles/150 km. Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
system.
▷ With a full load:
4 or more persons, cargo area full: Malfunction
Approx. 30 miles/50 km. The small warning lamp flashes in yel‐
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire low and then lights up continuously;
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load the larger warning lamp comes on in
and the driving style and conditions. yellow. On the Control Display, the
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, tires are shown in gray and a message appears.
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐ No flat tire can be detected.
duced lane stability during braking, a longer Display in the following situations:
braking distance, and altered self-steering
▷ If a wheel without TPM electronics is fitted,
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
for instance a compact wheel*: have the
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
service center check it if necessary.
ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
Because the possible driving distance depends
your service center.
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐ ▷ TPM could not be fully reset. Reset the sys‐
pending on the driving speed, road conditions, tem again.
external temperature, cargo load, etc. ▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the
same radio frequency: after leaving the area
Continued driving with a flat tire
of the disturbance, the system automatically
Drive moderately and do not exceed a becomes active again.
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a Declaration according to NHTSA/
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
duced lane stability during braking, a longer Systems
braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐ Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
erties.◀ should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
Final tire failure
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed tires of a different size than the size indicated on
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la‐
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐ bel, you should determine the proper tire infla‐
tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀ tion pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
Message when the system was not been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
reset system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
message appears on the Control Dis‐ significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
play. the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
92
should stop and check your tires as soon as Switching on/off
At a glance
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi‐
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the ve‐
hicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
Controls
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's re‐
sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
Press button 1 on the steering wheel.
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres‐
sure telltale. ▷ On: lane markings 2 are lit.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
Driving tips
▷ Off: lane markings 2 go out.
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
The system can issue warnings at speeds above
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
approx. 40 mph/65 km/h.
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐ rently in use.
mately one minute and then remain continu‐
Display
Navigation
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi‐
cator is illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
1 The system is activated.
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to 2 Arrows: at least one lane marking was de‐
continue to function properly. tected and warnings can be issued.
Issuing a warning
Lane departure warning* If the vehicle begins leaving the lane and a lane
marking has been detected, the steering wheel
The concept begins vibrating.
This system issues a warning at speeds above If the turn signal is set before the lane is
approx. 40 mph/65 km/h if the vehicle is about changed, a warning is not issued.
Mobility
to leave the lane on roads with lane markings.

The steering wheel begins vibrating lightly. Canceling a warning
The system does not issue a warning if the turn The warning is canceled:
signal is set before leaving the lane. ▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ After the vehicle returns to its lane.
Reference
93
Camera
Safety ▷ During heavy brake application.
▷ When the turn signal flashes.
System limits
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the course
of the road and the traffic situation.
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering
wheel; otherwise, you may lose control over the
The camera is located on the front of the interior
vehicle.◀
rearview mirror.
The system may not be fully functional in the Keep the area in front of the interior rearview
following situations: mirror clear.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In the event of worn, poorly visible, merging,
diverging, or multiple lane markings such as Brake force display*
in construction areas.
▷ When the demarcation lines are covered by The concept
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. BMW X5
▷ When the demarcation lines are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield is fogged over, dirty or
covered by a sticker, etc., in front of the in‐
terior rearview mirror.
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
Malfunctions brake lamps light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
Steering wheel vibration
brake lamps light up in addition.
Frequent activation of the steering wheel vibra‐
tion causes the system to overheat.
This causes the lane departure warning to be‐
come deactivated.
Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressing
the button.
94
BMW X6
At a glance
Controls
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lamps light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
Driving tips
brake lamps light up in addition.
Navigation
Mobility
Reference
95
Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems
Antilock Brake System ABS DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐ to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle
ing. on a steady course by reducing engine speed
The vehicle remains steerable even during full and by applying brakes to the individual wheels.
brake applications, thus increasing active
Adjust your driving style to the situation
safety.
An appropriate driving style is always the
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
responsibility of the driver.
gine.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
with DSC.
CBC Cornering Brake Control Do not reduce the additional safety margin with
a risky driving style, as otherwise there is a risk
When braking during curves or when braking of an accident.◀
during a lane change, driving stability and steer‐
ing response are improved further.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
Electronic brake-force duced during acceleration and when driving in
bends.
distribution
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
The system controls the brake pressure in the as soon as possible.
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
Deactivating DSC
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost. It thus helps to achieve the shortest
possible braking distance during full braking.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking. Press and hold the button, but not longer than
approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator lamp for
DSC lights up in the instrument cluster and DSC
Dynamic Stability Control OFF is displayed. DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
DSC trol and DSC are deactivated together.
A message appears on the Control Display.

The concept Please note any supplementary information that
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels appears there.
when driving away and accelerating.
96
Activating DSC ▷ When rocking a vehicle free or starting off in
At a glance
Press the button. deep snow, sand, or on loose ground
DSC OFF and the indicator lamp in the instru‐ ▷ When driving with snow chains*.
ment cluster go out.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
For better control
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
provides maximum traction on loose ground.
Controls
trols the drive forces and brake forces.
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and and when driving in bends.
DTC has failed.
DSC deactivated: Activating DTC

The indicator lamp lights up and
Driving tips
DSC OFF appears in the instrument
cluster.
Navigation
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up.
DSC and DTC deactivated.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again.
Dynamic Traction Control TRACTION and the indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster go out.
DTC
The concept For better control
The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which The indicator lamp flashes: DTC con‐
forward momentum is optimized. trols the drive forces and brake forces.
The system ensures maximum forward momen‐ The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and
tum on special road conditions, e.g., unplowed DTC has failed.
snowy roads, but driving stability is limited. DTC activated:
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐ The indicator lamp lights up and TRAC‐
ate caution. TION appears in the instrument cluster.
Mobility
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un‐

der the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in
slush, or on unplowed, snow-covered road
surfaces
Reference
97
Driving stability control systems 2. "Torque distribution"
DTC is activated.
The current distribution of drive forces is indi‐

cated by arrows pointing to all four wheels.
xDrive
The highlighted arrows show the drive forces
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐ currently present. The longer an arrow is, the
hicle. The combined effects of xDrive and DSC greater the drive forces in the associated wheel.
further optimize the traction and dynamic driv‐
The transparent arrows indicate the maximum
ing characteristics. The 4-wheel drive system
value the drive forces over the last 10 seconds.
xDrive variably distributes the drive forces to the
front and rear axle depending on the driving sit‐
Malfunction
uation and prevailing road conditions.
Malfunctions are displayed via Check Control,
refer to page 76.
Dynamic Performance
Control* Hill Descent Control HDC
The concept
The concept
Dynamic Performance Control optimizes the
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐
handling characteristics of your vehicle when
matically controls vehicle speed on steep down‐
starting off, cornering, and during evasive ma‐
hill gradients. The vehicle moves at approxi‐
neuvers.
mately walking speed without braking
To achieve this, the system variably distributes intervention by the driver.
the drive torque of the rear axle to the two rear
You can activate the Hill Descent Control at
wheels. This further increases the steering pre‐
speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When
cision and tracking stability of your vehicle.
moving downhill at speeds below approx.
22 mph/35 km/h, the vehicle reduces its speed
Display to approximately walking speed, approx. 5 mph/
The Control Display shows how xDrive and Dy‐ 8 km/h and keeps it constant.
namic Performance Control are distributing the
Only use HDC in transmission positions D or R.
drive forces.
1. "Vehicle Info" Increasing or reducing speed

The speed can be changed in the range from
approx. 4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/25 km/
h by pressing the accelerator or brake pedal
lightly.
98
A target speed within the same range can be Displays* in the instrument cluster
At a glance
specified using the lever of the cruise control.
On inclines over 10 %, you can reduce the speed
to approx. 3 mph/4 km/h. Pull the lever of the
cruise control beyond the resistance point, ar‐
row 3.
Controls
1 Display for target speed
2 HDC display
Driving tips
Malfunction
HDC is temporarily unavailable in the following
1 Increasing speed situations due to a high brake temperature:
2 Pull to the resistance point: reduce the ▷ The LED in the button and the display HDC
speed to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h go out during HDC operation.
3 Pull beyond the resistance point: on inclines ▷ The LED in the button and the HDC display
Navigation
over 10 %, reduce the speed to ap‐ do not light up when the button is pressed.
prox. 3 mph/4 km/h
Activating HDC Malfunction of driving

stability control systems
Adapting your driving style
When driving on poor roads, avoid using
full throttle or pressing the accelerator beyond
the kickdown point and also avoid heavy brak‐
ing. Otherwise, the drive train may be damaged
or accidents can occur.◀
Press the button; the LED above the button

lights up. Adaptive Drive*
The LED flashes when the brakes are applied
The concept
automatically.
Adaptive Drive reduces the body roll which oc‐
Deactivating HDC curs when cornering quickly or during fast eva‐
sive maneuvers. In addition, Adaptive Drive re‐
Press the button again; the LED goes out. HDC
Mobility
duces the steering angle requirement, improves

is automatically deactivated above approx.
the running comfort, and enhances the dynamic
37 mph/60 km/h.
driving characteristics of your vehicle.
Reference
99
Chassis and suspension tuning
Driving stability control systems Driving off without delay
Two chassis and suspension tunings are avail‐ After releasing the foot brake, start driving
able for selection. without delay, since the drive-off assistant will
▷ Normal: not hold the vehicle in place for more than ap‐
prox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling
The comfortable basic setting offers opti‐
back.◀
mum comfort when traveling.
▷ Sport:
The sporty basic setting offers increased Self-leveling suspension*
driving agility.
The concept
Selecting chassis and suspension
The self-leveling suspension on the rear axle
tuning
assures a continuous ground clearance.
To do so, the height of the vehicle is measured
by sensors at both rear wheels.
If the actual height deviates from the defined
height, such as due to cargo in the vehicle, this
difference is compensated very quickly. In ad‐
dition, spring motions resulting from cornering
or irregularities in the road surface are reduced
to a minimum.
The system works automatically.
Press the button.
The system switches between the two chassis Malfunctions

and suspension tuning settings. Malfunctions are displayed via Check Control,
▷ Sport: refer to page 76.
The LED in the button lights up and SPORT
is displayed in the instrument panel.
▷ Normal: Active steering*
The LED in the button goes out. The concept
The selection of the chassis and suspension The active steering actively varies the steering
tuning setting is stored for the remote control angle of the front wheels in relation to the steer‐
currently in use. ing wheel movements. In addition, it also varies
the steering force required for steering depend‐
ing on the vehicle's speed.
Drive-off assistant When you are driving in the low speed range, for
This system supports driving away on gradients. instance in a town or when parking, the steering
The parking brake is not required. angle increases, i.e., steering becomes very di‐
rect. In the higher speed range, on the other
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
hand, the steering angle is reduced more and
2. Release the foot brake and drive away with‐ more. This improves the handling of your vehicle
out delay. over the entire speed range.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may In critical situations, the system can make tar‐
roll back slightly. geted corrections to the steering angle provided
100
by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle before
At a glance
the driver intervenes.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up yellow and
a message is shown on the Control
Display. The active steering is defec‐
tive or has been temporarily deacti‐
Controls
vated. At low speeds, greater steering wheel
movements are required, whereas at higher
speeds, the vehicle reacts more sensitively to
steering wheel movements. The stability-pro‐
moting intervention can also be deactivated.
Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
Driving tips
Deactivation
Active steering deactivates in order to carry out
an initialization. This deactivation is displayed by
means of a message. The initialization can take
several minutes.
Navigation
If the message does not disappear during the
current trip, have the system checked.
Defect
In the event of a defect, a corresponding text
message is displayed. Have the system
checked.
Mobility
Reference
101
Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Active cruise control* can drop below the set speed when driving uphill
if the engine output is not sufficient.
With active cruise control you can select a de‐
sired speed which is then automatically main‐ Personal responsibility
tained when driving on open roadways and is Active cruise control cannot detect stop
varied to maintain a selected distance setting to signs, red lights, or any object that is stopped or
slower moving vehicles ahead. is blocking the road. Active cruise control is not
Active cruise control represents a technological and must not be used as a collision avoidance/
advance over the familiar cruise control and is a warning system. Since this active cruise control
welcome relief from the constant adjustment of system is a new technology and operates dif‐
speed that can accompany driving in traffic on ferently from conventional cruise control sys‐
highways or other high-speed thoroughfares. tems to which you may be accustomed, it is
Especially on longer trips and in traffic conges‐ necessary that you read all of the pages relating
tion, the system can reduce fatigue and tension, to this system before use. Carefully read and
while increasing your enjoyment of driving. observe the information on the system limita‐
Please use it safely and responsibly. tions, refer to page 106, to obtain a good com‐
mand of the system and its range of applica‐
In addition to holding a steady cruising speed, if
tions.◀
you encounter slower vehicles ahead, active
cruise control will, within limits, adjust your ve‐
hicle's speed automatically so that you can flow Brake pedal feel
with the traffic without having to make constant When the system brakes and you also depress
adjustments. If, for example, while cruising at the the brake pedal, a somewhat different braking
selected speed, you begin to approach a slower feel results.
vehicle ahead of you in the same lane, the sys‐
tem will reduce your vehicle's speed to the same Professional navigation system*
as that of the vehicle ahead to maintain your se‐ If the vehicle is equipped with a Professional
lected distance setting. You can vary the follow‐ navigation system, the system adapts the ac‐
ing distance, which will vary with speed. Based celeration and deceleration behavior of the ve‐
on your selected distance setting, the system hicle to the road on which you are currently driv‐
automatically decreases the throttle setting and ing.
lightly applies the brakes if necessary. In addi‐
To ensure that the system has the latest infor‐
tion, if the vehicle ahead of you slows to a com‐
mation on the course of the road, use the most
plete stop, the system can follow this action
recent version of the navigation data.
within the given scope and can also accelerate
from a complete stop if the vehicle ahead of you If the vehicle position is unknown, e.g., if you
drives off again shortly thereafter. During brak‐ have left the region covered by the map, the
ing, your vehicle brake lamps will automatically navigation system ceases to influence vehicle
illuminate to alert a following driver to take ac‐ behavior.
tion. In addition, it may be necessary for your
vehicle to downshift the automatic transmission Applications
to maintain the distance setting selected. As Please try the system first during sparse traffic
soon as the road in front of you has no moving and clear road conditions so that you can get
vehicles, the system will accelerate to your de‐ used to the system. After you have experience
sired speed. This set speed is also maintained and understand the system, only then use it dur‐
on downhill grades, however the vehicle speed ing normal traffic.
102
As with conventional cruise control systems, ac‐ 3 Interrupting 104 or deactivating 105 the
At a glance
tive cruise control in no way reduces or substi‐ system
tutes for the driver's own personal experience,
4 Retrieving the stored desired speed and dis‐
responsibility, alertness and awareness in ad‐
tance 104 or driving away 105
justing speed, braking or otherwise controlling
the vehicle. The driver should decide when to 5 Selecting the distance to the vehicle
use the system on the basis of road, traffic, vis‐ ahead 104
ibility, and weather conditions. Active cruise
control is intended for use on highway-type Storing the current speed
Controls
roadways where traffic is moving relatively Push the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly, arrow 2.
smoothly as well as in slow-moving traffic con‐
gestion. Do not use the system in city driving; in
complex driving situations; heavy traffic such as
during rush hour; on curvy, winding roads, slip‐
Driving tips
pery roads or roads with sharp curves such as
highway off-ramps; during inclement weather
such as snow, strong rain or fog; or when enter‐
ing interchanges, service/parking areas or toll
booths. It is also important to regulate your ve‐
hicle's speed and distance setting within appli‐
cable legal limits. Always be ready to take action The system stores the current vehicle speed. It
Navigation
or apply the brakes if necessary, especially when is indicated on the speedometer and briefly in
the system is actively following a vehicle in front the instrument panel.
of you. Otherwise, driving conditions can result
which lead to a violation of the law or elevated Increasing desired speed
risk of an accident.
Press or briefly push the lever up to or beyond
The minimum initial activation speed is the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired
20 mph/ 30 km/h, and the maximum speed is speed is displayed.
110 mph/ 180 km/h. The system can also be ac‐
The displayed speed is stored and the vehicle
tivated while the vehicle is stationary, refer to
reaches the stored speed if the road is clear.
page 105.
▷ With each activation to the resistance point,
One lever for all functions the desired speed increases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ With each activation beyond the resistance
point, the desired speed increases by a max‐
imum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Reducing the desired speed

Pull the lever, arrow 2, until the desired speed is
displayed.
Mobility
The functions are the same as those when in‐

1 Storing and increasing the desired creasing the desired speed.
speed 103
2 Storing and reducing the desired
speed 103
Reference
103
Selecting the distance Interrupting the system
Driving comfort
▷ Press the rocker down briefly: Press the lever up or down and additionally de‐
Increase the distance. press the brake if the vehicle is stationary. The
mark in the speedometer changes color and the
▷ Press the rocker up briefly:
distance indicator goes out.
Decrease the distance.
In addition, the system is interrupted:
The selected distance is displayed in the instru‐
▷ When the brakes are applied.
ment panel.
▷ When the transmission position D is disen‐
Distance display gaged.
Distance 1, closest ▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated.
▷ When DSC is activated
▷ When the safety belt and the driver's door
Distance 2 are opened while the vehicle is stationary.
▷ When the system has not detected objects
for an extended period, e.g., on a road with
very little traffic without road edge line mark‐
ings.
Distance 3
▷ The radar sensor is dirty.
Active intervention if the system is inter‐
rupted
If the system is interrupted, actively intervene by
Distance 4, furthest
braking and, if necessary, with evasive maneu‐
This distance is set when you ac‐ vers; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐
tivate the system. dent occurring.◀
Calling up the stored desired speed and

Selecting an appropriate distance
distance
Use good judgement to select the appro‐
priate following distance given road conditions, While driving
traffic, applicable laws and State driving recom‐ Press button 4, refer to page 103. All of the dis‐
mendations for safe following distance. Other‐ plays in the instrument panel lights up.
wise, a violation of the law or risk of an accident
could result.◀
104
While standing Displays in instrument cluster
At a glance
Before leaving the vehicle
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine
running, engage position P of the automatic
transmission and apply the parking brake. Oth‐
erwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
If a vehicle detected ahead of you slows to a halt
Controls
and your vehicle is also brought to a halt by the
system:
▷ If the vehicle ahead of you drives away, your 1 Stored desired speed
vehicle accelerates automatically as long as
▷ Green: the system is active.
mark 1 for the desired speed in the speed‐
ometer is green. ▷ Orange: the system is interrupted.
Driving tips
▷ If the vehicle ahead of you drives away when 2 Lights up yellow: vehicle detected ahead
mark 1 is orange, depress the accelerator Display also used for warnings, please read
briefly or press button 4.Rolling bars in the all information on warnings.
distance indicator 3 mean that the vehicle 3 Selected distance to vehicle ahead The in‐
ahead of you has driven away. dicator lights up as soon as the system is
If you are standing behind a vehicle with your activated.
Navigation
brake pedal depressed and the system is deac‐ The indicator lights up as soon as the sys‐
tivated or interrupted: tem is activated.
1. Select the desired speed using the lever, ar‐ The bars roll: the vehicle in front of you has
row 1 or arrow 2, or press button 4 to retrieve driven off
a stored speed.
4 Brief display of stored desired speed
2. Release the brake pedal. If the display --- mph/---km/h appears briefly,
3. When the vehicle ahead of you drives away, the conditions necessary for operation may cur‐
press on the accelerator briefly or press but‐ rently not be met.
ton 4.
Warning lamps
Deactivating the system Display 2 flashes red and a signal
▷ When driving, press the lever up or down sounds.
twice. The system requests that the you
▷ When stationary, do the same while de‐ intervene by braking and carrying
pressing the brake pedal. out evasive maneuvers, if neces‐
▷ Switch off the ignition. sary. The system cannot independently restore
the distance to the vehicle ahead.
The displays go out, and the stored desired
speed and distance are deleted. This display does not relieve the driver of the
responsibility to adapt his or her desired driving
Mobility
speed and style to the traffic conditions.
Display 2 flashes yellow.

The conditions necessary for oper‐
ation of the system are no longer
met, e.g., due to ABS or DSC inter‐
Reference
105
Driving comfort vention. The system applies the brakes until you ▷ This device must accept any interference
actively assume control. received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Radar sensor Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
Position operate this equipment.
System limits
Speed range
Best results are achieved when using the sys‐
tem on well-developed roads and highways.
The desired speed can be selected between
20 mph/30 km/h and 110 mph/180 km/h.
The system can also be activated when station‐
The radar sensor is integrated in the bumper. ary.
Comply with the legal speed limit in every situa‐
Dirty or covered sensor tion when using the system.
A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the detec‐

Detection range
tion of vehicles.
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐
move layers of snow and ice carefully.
▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar sen‐
sor.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar sen‐
sor is not aligned correctly. Misalignment may
be caused by damage incurred during parking,
The detection capacity of the system and the
for example.
automatic braking capacity are limited. Two-
wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you for in‐
For US owners only stance might not be detected.
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Limited detection capacity
Commission regulations. Operation is governed Because of the limits to the detection ca‐
by the following: pacity, you should be alert at all times so that you
FCC ID: can intervene actively, if necessary; otherwise,
▷ OAYARS3-A there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Compliance statement:
Deceleration
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two The system does not decelerate when a sta‐
conditions: tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, e.g.,
a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end of traffic
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐ congestion.
ence, and
The system also does not respond to:
106
▷ Pedestrians or similarly slow road users. Unexpected lane change
At a glance
▷ Red traffic lights.
▷ Stationary objects.
▷ Cross traffic.
▷ Approaching traffic.
No warnings
A warning may not be issued when ap‐
Controls
proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐
stacle. Take action yourself, otherwise there is
a risk of an accident.◀ If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves
into another lane from behind a stopped vehicle,
Swerving vehicles you yourself must react, as the system does not
Driving tips
react to stopped vehicles.
Cornering
Navigation
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as your
vehicle.
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
Swerving vehicles speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly curves cannot be anticipated in advance. There‐
swerves into your lane, the system may not be fore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐ In tight curves, situations may result due to the
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐ restricted detection range of the system in
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g., which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not be
when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehi‐ detected at all, or not until after a considerable
cle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the delay.
system requests that the driver intervene by
braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if
necessary. Take action yourself, otherwise
there is a risk of an accident.◀
Mobility
When approaching a curve, the system may re‐

Reference
act briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to
107
Driving comfort the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of the when you approach a vehicle traveling at a much
vehicle by the system can be compensated for lower speed than your own speed such as ap‐
by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator proaching a toll booth or when a much slower
pedal is released, the system becomes active vehicle cuts in front of you at close range.◀
again and independently controls the speed.
Driving away Cruise control*

In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive
away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines, with The concept
a heavy trailer or behind bumps in the road. The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Driver interventions and your The speed specified using the lever on the
responsibility steering column is maintained.
Your actions have priority at all times. When you
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
press on the accelerator pedal while driving, au‐
gine braking action is insufficient.
tomatic braking is not performed and the bars in
the distance display go out until you lift your foot Do not use cruise control
from the accelerator pedal. Once you release the Do not use the system if unfavorable con‐
accelerator pedal, the desired speed is achieved ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant
again on clear roads or the selected distance to speed, for instance:
the vehicle ahead is maintained.
▷ On curvy roads.
Making braking possible ▷ In heavy traffic.
Anytime the driver presses down on the ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on
accelerator pedal, any braking action by the sys‐ a loose road surface.
tem is interrupted and the distance indicator
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle
goes out until the pedal is fully released. As soon
and cause an accident.◀
as you fully release the accelerator, the system
will again control your cruising speed and dis‐
tance setting. While driving with the system ac‐ One lever for all functions
tivated, resting your foot on the acelerator pedal
will cause the system not to brake even if nec‐
essary. Be certain that floormats or other ob‐
jects on the vehicle floor do not interfere with
movement of the acccelerator pedal.◀
Limits of automatic braking

While active cruise control is capable of
braking your vehicle automatically when you ap‐
proach a slower vehicle ahead, it is important to
1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerat‐
be aware that the ability of the system to apply
ing
the brakes is also limited, e.g. when you reduce
your desired speed sharply. lt uses only a portion 2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler‐
of braking system capacity and does not utilize ating
the full capacity of the vehicle braking system. 3 Interrupting and deactivating the system
Therefore, the system cannot decrease your
4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand
speed for large differences in speed between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Examples:
108
Maintaining current speed by up to 5 mph/10 km/h until the minimum
At a glance
Push, arrow 1, or pull, arrow 2, the lever to the speed of 20 mph/30 km/h is achieved.
resistance point. The system stores and maintains the speed.
The car's current speed is stored and main‐
tained. It is displayed on the speedometer and Interrupting the system
briefly in the instrument cluster. Press the lever up or down, arrow 3: display 1 in
On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to the speedometer changes color, refer to
maintain the set speed if current engine power page 109.
Controls
output is insufficient. If the engine braking effect In addition, the system is interrupted:
is insufficient on downhill slopes, the system will ▷ When the brakes are applied.
brake the vehicle slightly.
▷ When the transmission position D is disen‐
gaged.
Increasing desired speed
Driving tips
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance
vated.
point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed
is reached. ▷ When DSC or ABS is intervening.
▷ Each time the lever is pressed to the point of
resistance, the desired speed increases by
Warning lamp
approx. 1 mph/1 km/h. The warning lamp lights up if cruise
control has been deactivated auto‐
Navigation
▷ Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
matically, e.g., by a control interven‐
resistance point, the desired speed is in‐
tion of the DSC. A message appears on the Con‐
creased by up to 5 mph/10 km/h.
trol Display.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Resuming cruising speed
Accelerating using the lever
Press button 4:
Accelerating slightly:
The stored speed is resumed and maintained.
Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1,
until the desired speed is reached.
Deactivating the system
Accelerating significantly:
▷ Press the lever upward or downward twice,
Press the lever beyond the resistance point, ar‐ arrow 3.
row 1, until the desired speed is reached.
▷ Switch off the ignition.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the
The stored speed is cleared.
accelerator pedal. The system stores and main‐
tains the speed.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Decreasing speed
Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point
or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is
Mobility
displayed.
▷ Each time the lever is pulled to the resist‐
ance point, the desired speed is decreased
by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the lever is pulled beyond the re‐
sistance point, the desired speed is reduced
Reference
1 Stored desired speed
109
Driving comfort ▷ Green: the system is active. cle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
▷ Orange: the system is interrupted.
outside of the PDC detection range.
2 Selected desired speed appears briefly
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle
If the display --- mph or --- km/h appears briefly, may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal
conditions may not be adequate to operate the tone.◀
system.
Call up Check Control messages, refer to Avoid driving quickly with PDC
page 77. Avoid approaching an object quickly.
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet
Malfunction active.
The warning lamp comes on when the For technical reasons, the system may other‐
system has failed. wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀
A message appears on the Control
Display. More information, refer to page 76. Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physical
limits of ultrasonic measurement, for instance:
Park Distance Control PDC* ▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
The concept
▷ With low objects.
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the
backup camera*, refer to page 112, can be ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
switched on. Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
PDC supports you when parking. A slow ap‐ move into the blind area of the sensors before or
proach to an object in front of or behind your ve‐ after a continuous tone sounds.
hicle is announced by: High, protruding objects such as ledges may not
▷ Signal tones. be detected.
▷ Visual display.
False warnings
Measurement PDC may issue a warning under the following
conditions even though there is no obstacle
Measurements are made by ultrasound sensors
within the detection range:
in the bumpers.
▷ In heavy rain.
The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in
An acoustic warning is first given:
ice.
▷ By the front* sensors and two rear corner
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/
1.50 m. ▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages.
System limits ▷ In heavy exhaust.
Check the traffic situation as well ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the sweeping machines, high pressure steam
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐ cleaners or neon lights.
tion. Check the traffic situation around the vehi‐
110
Switching on automatically ▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that
At a glance
With the engine running or the ignition switched is detected by only one of the corner sen‐
on, shift the selector lever into position R. sors.
▷ If moving parallel to a wall.
Switching off automatically The signal tone is switched off:
The system switches off and the LED goes out: ▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐
▷ After approx. 165 ft/50 m when driving for‐ ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
ward.
Controls
▷ When transmission position P is engaged.
▷ After approx. 22 mph/35 km/h when driving
forward. Volume
Switch on the system again if necessary. You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone,
refer to page 173.
Switching on/off manually
Driving tips
rently in use.
Visual warning
The approach to an object can be shown on the
Control Display. Objects that are farther away
are displayed on the Control Display before a
Navigation
signal tone sounds.
Press the button.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
tone is sounded that indicates the position of the
The display appears as soon as PDC is acti‐
object. For example, if an object is detected to
vated.
the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds
from the left rear speaker. If the last image selected was the rear view cam‐
The shorter the distance to the object becomes, era, this is displayed again. To switch to PDC:
the shorter the intervals. "Switch off rear view camera"
If the distance to a detected object is less than The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is rently in use.
sounded.
If objects are located both in front of and behind Image on the Control Display
Mobility
the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is

sounded. Switching on the rear view camera
using iDrive
The intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds: With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
Reference
111
Driving comfort The image of the rear view camera is displayed. the region behind your vehicle is shown on the
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ Control Display.
rently in use.
System limits
Malfunction Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
outside the picture area of the backup camera.◀
Detection of objects
High, protruding objects such as ledges
may not be detected by the backup camera.◀
A Check Control message, refer to page 76, is Switching on automatically

displayed in the instrument cluster.
With the engine running or the ignition switched
The areas in front of and behind the vehicle ap‐ on, shift the selector lever into position R.
pear in shaded form on the Control Display. PDC The image of the rear view camera is displayed
has failed. Have the system checked. when the system has been switched on using
To ensure full operability: iDrive.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
Switching off automatically
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and main‐ The system switches off and the LED goes out:
tain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. ▷ After approx. 33 ft/10 m when driving for‐
ward.
Surround View* forward.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
The concept
Surround View encompasses the following sys‐ Switching on/off manually
tems:
▷ Backup camera*, refer to page 112.
▷ Top View*, refer to page 114.
▷ Side View*, refer to page 116.
It provides assistance when parking and ma‐
neuvering and at blind driveways and intersec‐
tions.
Press the button.

Backup camera*
The concept ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rear view camera assists you when parking
If PDC is displayed, switch on the backup cam‐
and maneuvering in reverse. To accomplish this,
era via the iDrive, refer to page 111.
112
Assistance functions Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive, refer to
At a glance
page 114.
Functional requirement
▷ Rear view camera is switched on. Parking using pathway and turning
lines
▷ Tailgate is completely closed.
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning lines
Pathway lines lead into the margins of the parking space.
Controls
Driving tips
▷ Can be displayed in the image of the rear 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
view camera when the transmission is in re‐ the pathway line covers the corresponding
verse. turning circle line.
Navigation
▷ Help estimate the required amount of space
when parking and maneuvering on a flat road
surface.
▷ Depend on the current steering angle and
are continuously adapted to movements of
the steering wheel.
Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive, refer to
page 114.
Turning lines
Obstacle marking
▷ Can be displayed in the image of the rear

Mobility
▷ Three-dimensionally shaped markings can

view camera.
be displayed in the image of the rear view
▷ Show the path of the smallest turning circle camera.
on a flat road surface.
Their color gradation corresponds to the mark‐
▷ When the steering wheel is turned, only one ings in PDC. This helps estimate the distance to
turning line is displayed. the object pictured.
Reference
113
Camera
Driving comfort Show the obstacle marking via the iDrive, refer
to page 114.
Activating assistance functions

Several assistance functions can be active at the
same time.
Showing the parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines"
Pathway and turning lines are displayed.
The lens of the rear view camera is under the
Showing the obstacle marking grasping lip of the tailgate.
"Obstacle marking" The presence of dirt can impair image quality.
Three-dimensionally-shaped markings are dis‐ Clean the lens with a moist, nonabrasive cloth.
played.
Image on the Control Display Top View*

Switching on the rear view camera The concept
using iDrive Top View assists you when parking and maneu‐
With PDC activated: vering. To accomplish this, the door region and
"Rear view camera" road surface region are shown on the Control
Display.
The image of the rear view camera is displayed.
rently in use. Detection
Detection is carried out by two cameras
Brightness integrated into the exterior mirror and the rear
view camera.
With the rear view camera switched on:
The range is:
1. Select the symbol.
▷ Approx. 7 ft/2 m to the side.
▷ Approx. 7 ft/2 m to the rear.
is reached and press the controller.
Obstacles up to the height of the exterior mirrors
Contrast are thus detected in a timely fashion.
With the rear view camera switched on:
System limits
1. Select the symbol. Top View cannot be used in the following situa‐
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting tions:
is reached and press the controller. ▷ With a door open.
▷ With the tailgate open.
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
▷ In poor light.
The arrows next to the vehicle are displayed in a
shaded form on the Control Display and a sym‐
114
bol appears at the corresponding location on the When the distance to an object is small, the PDC
At a glance
vehicle. display correspondingly shows a red bar in front
of the vehicle.
Check the traffic situation as well
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
outside the picture area of the cameras.◀
Controls
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The images from Top View and PDC are dis‐ The display appears as soon as Top View is ac‐
played when the system has been switched on
Driving tips
tivated.
using iDrive.
If the last image selected was the rear view cam‐
Switching off automatically era, this is displayed again. To switch to Top
View:
The system switches off and the LED goes out:
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol on
▷ After approx. 165 ft/50 m when driving for‐
the Control Display.
ward.
Navigation
rently in use.
forward.
Switch on the system again if necessary. Image on the Control Display
Switching on the rear view camera
using iDrive
With Top View activated:
"Rear view camera"
The image of the rear view camera is displayed.
rently in use.
Brightness
With Top View switched on:
Press the button.
1. "Brightness"
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
If Top View is displayed, switch on the backup
Mobility
camera via the iDrive, refer to page 114. Contrast

With Top View switched on:
Visual warning
The approach to an object can be shown on the 1. "Contrast"
Control Display. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
Reference
115
Displaying turning lines and pathway Display
Driving comfort
lines The images from both cameras are shown si‐
▷ The static, red turning line shows the lateral multaneously on the Control Display.
space required when the wheel is fully
Check the traffic situation as well
turned.
▷ The variable, green pathway lines assist you
hicle on blind driveways and intersections with
in estimating the amount of lateral space ac‐
your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could re‐
tually required.
sult from road users or objects located outside
The pathway lines depend on the current the picture area of the Side View cameras.◀
steering angle and are continuously
adapted to movements of the steering
Switching off automatically
wheel.
System switches off: above approx. 9 mph/
"Parking aid lines"
15 km/h.
Turning lines and pathway lines are displayed.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Cameras
The lenses of the Top View cameras are on the

Press the button.
undersides of the exterior mirror housings.
The presence of dirt can impair image quality. Image on the Control Display
Clean the lens with a moist, nonabrasive cloth.
The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
on the Control Display.
Side View*
The concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road users
concealed by obstacles to the left and right of
the vehicle can only be detected from the driv‐
er's seat at the last minute. To improve visibility,
two cameras in the front of the vehicle record the
traffic situation on each side. Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the
position of the front of the vehicle.
System limits
The cameras capture a maximum range of Brightness
330 ft/100 m. With the Side View switched on:
116
1. "Brightness"
At a glance
Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
1. "Contrast"
Controls
Cameras
Driving tips
Switching on/off
Navigation
Press the button.
The two camera lenses are located on the sides
of the bumper.
The presence of dirt can impair image quality.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
Clean the lens, refer to page 287.
play is influenced by:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
Head-up Display* ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐

play.
The concept ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
This system projects important information into ▷ Wet roads.
the driver's field of vision, e.g., navigation in‐ ▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
structions.
If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐
In this way, the driver can get information with‐ tings.
out averting his or her eyes from the road.
Mobility
Reference
117
Display
Driving comfort 1. "Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
The brightness is adjusted.
With the low beams switched on, the brightness
can also be adjusted with the thumbwheel of the
instrument lighting.
1 Navigation instructions* rently in use.
2 Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go func‐
tion* Height adjustment
3 Lane departure warning* 1. "Settings"
4 Cruise control/desired speed* 2. "Head-up display"
5 Current speed 3. "Height"
The Check Control messages are displayed 4. Turn the controller.
briefly if needed. The height is adjusted.
Selecting displays in the Head-up rently in use.
Display
1. "Settings" Special windshield
2. "Head-up display" The windshield is part of the system.
3. "Displayed information" The shape of the windshield makes it possible
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up to display a precise image.
Display. A film in the windshield prevents double images
from being displayed.
Therefore, have the special windshield replaced
by a service center only.

currently in use.
Setting the brightness

The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient light.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
118
Climate
At a glance
At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
1 Air toward the windshield and side windows
2 Air for the upper body
3 Air to footwell
4 Automatic climate control with 2-zone con‐
trol 120
Automatic climate control with 4-zone con‐
Mobility
trol 124
Reference
119
Automatic climate control with 2-zone control
Climate
1 Seat heating and ventilation, driver's ▷ Accessing setting for ventilation tem‐
side 49 perature on the Control Display
2 Temperature, left side of passenger com‐ 8 Switching cooling function on/off manually
partment 9 Automatic recirculated air control/recircu‐
3 AUTO program lated air mode
4 Temperature, right side of passenger com‐ 10 Manual air volume, switching off automatic
partment climate control, residual heat
5 Maximum cooling 11 Rear window defroster
6 Seat heating and ventilation, front passen‐ 12 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
ger side 49 sation
7 Passenger side 13 Air grill for interior temperature sensor,
▷ Manual air distribution please keep clear and unobstructed
14 Driver's side
▷ Manual air distribution
▷ Accessing setting for ventilation tem‐
perature on the Control Display
The current setting for manual air distribution is AUTO program

displayed on the Control Display. Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution, and
Comfortable interior climate
temperature are controlled auto‐
The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis‐ matically.
tribution and air volume for virtually all condi‐
tions, refer to AUTO program below. Select a Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
comfortable interior temperature only. intensity, and outside influences, the air is di‐
rected to the windshield, side windows, upper
The following sections contain more detailed in‐
body, and into the footwell.
formation on the available setting options.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
Most of these settings are stored for the remote
cally with the AUTO program.
control currently in use, Personal Profile set‐
tings, refer to page 29. At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program in such a way that window
condensation is prevented as much as possible.
120
To switch off the program: press the button
At a glance
again or manually adjust the air distribution.
Intensity of the AUTO program

Pressing the AUTO button repeatedly adjusts
the intensity of the AUTO program. The se‐
lected intensity, SOFT, MEDIUM or INTENSIVE,
appears on the display of the automatic climate
Controls
control.
Temperature Defrosting and defogging windows

Turn the wheel to set the desired Press the button.
temperature. Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
Driving tips
The automatic climate control ach‐
ieves this temperature as quickly as windows.
possible, if necessary with the max‐ For this purpose, also switch on the cooling
imum cooling or heating capacity, and then function.
keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐ Rear window defroster

perature settings. The automatic climate control Press the button.
Navigation
will not have sufficient time to adjust the set The rear window defroster switches off
temperature. automatically after a certain period of time.
Maximum heating power can be obtained with Depending on the vehicle equipment, upper
the highest setting, regardless of the external wires are used as an antenna and are not part of
temperature.
the rear window defroster.
At the lowest setting, cooling is continuous, re‐
gardless of the external temperature. Air volume, manual
You can vary the air volume by pressing
Adjusting the ventilation temperature
on the corresponding side. You can re‐
This function can be used to adjust the air tem‐ activate the automatic mode for the air flow rate
perature for the upper body region. with the AUTO button.
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate" Manual air distribution
3. "Driver ventilation" or "Front passenger The air flow can be guided into the vehicle inte‐
ventilation" rior, separately for the driver's and front passen‐
ger side, using one of the following programs:
4. Turn the controller to adjust the tempera‐
ture. ▷ Upper body region.
▷ Blue: colder ▷ Upper body region and footwell.
Mobility
▷ Red: warmer ▷ Footwell.

▷ Driver's side: in addition, the windshield,
side windows, and footwell.
Reference
121
Selecting program
Climate Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re‐
Press the button repeatedly until the gion. Open them for this purpose.
desired program is shown on the Con‐ Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
trol Display. ▷ At an external temperature of approx. 32 ℉/
0 ℃.
▷ When the engine is running.
Automatic recirculated air mode/

recirculated air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently within
1 Air toward the windshield and side windows the vehicle.
2 Air for the upper body Press the button repeatedly to select
an operating mode:
3 Air to footwell
Pressing the AUTO button cancels the manual ▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
air distribution settings. ▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐
The automatic mode for the air volume remains trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out‐
effective with manual air distribution. side air and controls the shutoff automati‐
cally.
Cooling function ▷ Right LED on, recirculated air mode: the
The passenger compartment can only be supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
cooled with the engine running. manently blocked.
Press the button. If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO but‐
The air is cooled and dehumidified and
ton to utilize the condensation sensor. Make
– depending on the temperature setting –
sure that air can flow onto the windshield.
warmed again.
Continuous recirculated-air mode
The cooling function helps to prevent conden‐
sation on the windows or to remove it quickly. The recirculated air mode should not be
used for an extended period of time, as the air
Depending on the weather, the windshield may quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.◀
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐ Residual heat
cally with the AUTO program.
The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the
When using the automatic climate control, con‐ interior.
densation water, refer to page 144, develops
that exits underneath the vehicle. Functional requirement
▷ Up to 15 minutes after the engine has been
Maximum cooling
switched off.
Press the button.
▷ Warm engine.
The system is set to the lowest
temperature, maximum air volume ▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
and recirculated-air mode. ▷ External temperature below 77 ℉/25 ℃.
122
Switching on Avoiding injury
At a glance
1. Switch off the ignition. Do not drop any foreign objects into the air
2. Press the right-hand button. vents, otherwise these could be catapulted out‐
wards and lead to injuries.◀
Ventilation for cooling

REST appears on the display of the automatic
climate control when the residual heat utilization Adjust the vents to direct the flow of cool air in
your direction, for instance if the interior has be‐
Controls
is switched on.
come too warm.
From radio readiness the interior temperature,
the air volume and the air distribution can be set.
Draft-free ventilation
Switching off Set the air vents so that the air flows past you
and is not directed straight at you.
Driving tips
You can select the lowest blower speed by
pressing and holding the left side. Pressing
Ventilation in rear
again switches off the residual heat utilization.
REST disappears from the display of the auto‐
matic climate control.
Switching on/off the automatic climate
Navigation
control
Switching off
With the blower at its lowest setting,
press the left side of the button to
switch off the automatic climate control. 1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open and
close the air vents
Switching on 2 Use the lever to change the direction of the
Press any button to switch the automatic cli‐ air flow
mate control back on.
BMW X5: heating and ventilation, 3rd
Front ventilation row seats
The air in the area of the 3rd row seats can be
heated or recirculated. Air vents are located in
the storage compartment area between the
seats and in the footwell of the 3rd row seats.
Mobility
1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open and

close the air vents
2 Use the lever to change the direction of the
air flow
Reference
1 Thumbwheel
123
Climate ▷ Activating heating and distributing air in
footwell:
Turn toward front
▷ Distributing air in storage compartment
area between seats:
Turn toward rear
2 Button for switching on the blower: LED is lit
The heating is not ready for operation without
switching on the blower. After the heating is 1 Temperature, left rear seating area
switched off, the blower can be used to recircu‐ 2 AUTO program
late the air within the vehicle, for instance at high 3 Display
temperatures. To do this, turn thumbwheel 1 to‐
4 Temperature, right rear seating area
ward the rear and switch on the blower, button 2.
5 Seat heating, right rear seat
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter 6 Air volume, manual
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the in‐ 7 Seat heating, left rear seat
coming air. The current setting for the temperature and the
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous air flow rate is shown on display 3.
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle. Activation/deactivation
The service center replaces this combined filter 1. "Settings"
during routine maintenance. 2. "Climate"
More information can be found in the service re‐ 3. "Rear climate control"
quirements display, refer to page 75.
4. Select the desired settings.
Automatic climate control

with 4-zone control*
Front operation
Corresponds to the operation of automatic cli‐
mate control with 2-zone control, refer to
page 120.
Rear operation The rear automatic climate control cannot be

operated if the front automatic climate control is
The control unit is located in the center console
switched off. With the defrost windows and
in the rear.
eliminate condensation function activated, the
rear automatic climate control is also not ready
for operation.
124
AUTO program Ventilation in rear
At a glance
The AUTO program automatically
sets the air distribution toward the
upper body and in the footwell, as
well as the air flow rate. It also
adapts your instructions for the
temperature to outside influences throughout
the year.
Controls
Temperature
Set the desired temperature indi‐ 1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open and
vidually on the left and right side. close the air vents
2 Thumbwheels to adjust temperature in up‐
Driving tips
per body region; can be adjusted separately
The automatic climate control achieves this for left and right:
temperature as quickly as possible regardless of ▷ Blue: colder
the season, using maximum cooling or heating ▷ Red: warmer
power if necessary, and then maintains it.
When switching between different temperature air flow
Navigation
settings in rapid succession, the automatic cli‐
mate control does not have sufficient time to BMW X5
adjust the set temperature.
Air volume, manual
The air flow rate can be varied by press‐
ing on the corresponding side. The au‐
tomatic mode for the air flow rate can be
switched on again using the AUTO button.
Switching off rear automatic climate

control
With the blower at its lowest setting, air flow
press the left side of the button to
2 Thumbwheel to smoothly open and close air
switch off the automatic climate control.
vents
The automatic climate control can also be For ventilation of the 3rd row seats, refer to
switched off with iDrive. To switch on the auto‐ page 123.
matic climate control again, the system must
first be reactivated, refer to Activating/deacti‐
vating.
Parked-car ventilation*
Mobility
The system is switched on again by pressing

any button of the rear automatic climate control. The concept
The parked-car ventilation blows air into the
passenger compartment to lower interior tem‐
peratures.
Reference
125
Climate The system can be switched on and off at any The symbol on the automatic climate control
external temperature, either directly or by using flashes when the system has been switched on.
a preset switch-on time. It remains switched on The system will only be switched on within the
for 30 minutes. next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reactivated.
Since the system uses a substantial amount of
electrical current, refrain from activating it twice
in succession without allowing the battery to be
recharged in normal operation between use.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
They can be operated via iDrive.
Switching on/off directly

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
The symbol on the automatic climate control

flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting activation times

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
5. Set the desired time.

The symbol on the automatic climate control
lights up when the switch-on time is activated.
126
Interior equipment
At a glance
Integrated universal remote Programming
control*
The concept
This system can replace up to three different
Controls
hand-held transmitters for various types of re‐
mote-controlled equipment, such as garage
doors or lighting systems.
The hand-held transmitter signal can be pro‐
grammed on one of the three memory buttons.
Driving tips
1 Memory buttons
The corresponding device can then be operated
using the programmed memory button. 2 LED
The LED indicates that a signal is being trans‐
mitted.
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 61.
When selling the vehicle, delete the stored pro‐
grams for security reasons. 2. Initial setup:
Navigation
During programming Press both outer memory buttons 1 for ap‐
prox. 20 seconds until the LED flashes.
During programming and before activat‐
ing a device using the integrated universal re‐ All programs of the three memory buttons 1
mote control, ensure that there are no people, are cleared.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a distance
animals or objects in the range of movement of
the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from the
is a risk of injury or damage. memory buttons.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- The required distance depends on the par‐
held transmitter.◀ ticular hand-held transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press the transmit button of
Compatibility the hand-held transmitter and the memory
If this symbol is printed on the packaging button of the integrated universal remote
or in the instructions of the hand-held control.
transmitter, the remote-controlled de‐ The LED flashes slowly.
vice is generally compatible with the universal 5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes
remote control. rapidly.
If you have any questions, please contact: If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx.
▷ Your service center. 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat
the step.
Mobility
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.

Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly af‐
ter approx. 60 seconds, change the distance
and repeat the step. If programming was
aborted by the hand-held transmitter, hold
down the memory button and press and re‐
Reference
127
Interior equipment lease the button on the hand-held transmit‐ 4. Press the button on the receiver of the de‐
ter several times for 2 seconds. vice to be set. You have approx. 30 seconds
6. To program additional hand-held transmit‐ for the next step.
ters, repeat steps 3 to 5. 5. Press the programmed memory button of
The device can be operated using the memory the integrated universal remote control for
button with the engine running or the ignition approx. 3 seconds. Repeat this step up to
switched on. three times if necessary.
The device can be operated using the memory
Malfunction button with the engine running or the ignition
If the device cannot be used after repeated at‐ switched on.
tempts at programming, please check whether
the hand-held transmitter is equipped with an Reassigning individual programs
alternating code system. 1. Switch on the ignition.
To do so: 2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a distance
▷ Read the instructions of the hand-held of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from the
transmitter. memory buttons.
▷ Press the memory button of the universal The required distance depends on the par‐
remote control for an extended period. ticular hand-held transmitter.
If the LED of the integrated universal remote 3. Press the memory button of the integrated
control flashes quickly for a short period and universal remote control.
then lights up continuously, the hand-held 4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx.
transmitter is equipped with an alternating code 20 seconds, press the transmit button on
system. the hand-held transmitter.
In this case, program the memory buttons as 5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes
described under Alternating-code hand-held rapidly.
transmitters. If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx.
60 seconds, change the distance and repeat
Alternating-code hand-held the step.
transmitters
Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly af‐
Please obtain information on synchronizing the ter approx. 60 seconds, change the distance
device in the operating manual of the device be‐ and repeat the step. If programming was
ing set up. aborted by the hand-held transmitter, hold
Programming will be easier with the aid of a sec‐ down the memory button and press and re‐
ond person. lease the button on the hand-held transmit‐
ter several times for 2 seconds.
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled device.
Deleting all stored programs
2. Program the integrated universal remote
Press both outer memory buttons 1 for ap‐
control as described above under Fixed-
prox. 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly.
code hand-held transmitters.
All stored programs are deleted.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the de‐
vice to be set, e.g., on the drive. The programs cannot be deleted individually.
128
Digital compass* Operating concept
At a glance
Various functions can be called up by pressing
the adjustment button with a pointed object
such as a pen. The following adjustment options
are displayed one after the other, depending on
how long the adjustment button is pressed:
▷ Press briefly: switch the display on/off.
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone.
Controls
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass.
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right hand
1 Adjustment button steering.
2 Display ▷ 12 to 15 seconds: set the language.
Driving tips
The display shows you the main or secondary
compass direction in which you are driving.
Setting compass zones

Set the compass zone corresponding to the ve‐ can function correctly; refer to the world map
hicle's geographic location so that the compass with compass zones.
Navigation
Press the adjustment button for 3‑4 seconds. The compass is operational again after approx.
The number of the compass zone set is shown 10 seconds.
Mobility
in the display.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the Calibrating the digital compass
adjustment button repeatedly until the display The digital compass must be calibrated in the
shows the number of the compass zone corre‐ following situations:
sponding to the current location. ▷ An incorrect compass direction is shown.
Reference
129
Rear
Interior equipment ▷ The cardinal direction displayed does not
change even if the direction of travel
changes. BMW X6
▷ Not all compass directions are shown.
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metal ob‐
jects or overhead power lines in the vicinity
of the vehicle and that there is enough space
to drive in a circle.
2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
3. Press the adjustment button for 6‑7 sec‐
onds to call up C. Then drive at least one full Slide the cover back.
circle at a maximum speed of 4 mph/7 km/h.
When the system is calibrated, the C is re‐ Emptying
placed by the compass directions. Take out the insert.
Right-hand/left-hand steering Lighter

The digital compass is set for right-hand or left-
hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language

Press the adjustment button for 12‑13 seconds.
Briefly press the adjustment button again to
switch between English "E" and German "O".
The setting is automatically saved after approx.
10 seconds.
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, press in the cigarette lighter.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter*
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
Opening back out.
Danger of burns
Front Only hold the hot lighter by its head; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote con‐
trol with you when leaving the vehicle so that
children cannot use the lighter and burn them‐
selves.◀
To open the cover, slide it forward.
130
Connecting electrical devices In storage compartment under center
At a glance
armrest*
Sockets
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is running
or when the ignition is switched on. The total
load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watt at
12 volt.
Controls
Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to
insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.
Front center console To access the socket*: remove the cover.
Driving tips
In the cargo area*
Navigation
Slide the cover forward.
To access the socket: remove the cap or pull out

the cigarette lighter*. To access the socket: fold open the cover.
Rear center console* BMW X6: in the rear console
The arrangement of the sockets* may vary with Slide the cover back.
the equipment.
To access the socket: pull off the cover.
To access the sockets: remove the caps.
Mobility
Reference
131
Cargo area
Interior equipment
BMW X5: luggage compartment roller
cover
1. Lay the case on the left-hand side and push

it forward, arrow 1.
2. Swing the case toward the inside, see ar‐
row 2.
Pull out the luggage compartment roller cover 3. Push the case forward at the ends until it
and hook it into the brackets. engages in the two side brackets.
4. Check whether the case is properly locked
Do not deposit heavy objects in place by pulling it with a sudden move‐
Do not deposit heavy or hard objects on ment.
the luggage compartment roller cover. Other‐
wise, they may present a danger to occupants, BMW X6: cargo cover
for instance during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers.◀
Do not let the luggage area retractable

cover snap back
Do not let the luggage compartment retractable
cover snap back as this could damage the
cover.◀
Removing
Deploy cargo cover by pulling back.
1. Unlock the case with the button, arrow 1.
Do not deposit heavy objects
Do not deposit heavy or hard objects on
the cargo cover. Otherwise, they may present a
danger to occupants, for instance during braking
and evasive maneuvers.◀
2. Swing the case somewhat to the left, ar‐

row 2, and remove it.
Installing
When installing, proceed in the opposite order
of removal.
132
Removing
At a glance
Controls
Reach into the recess and pull toward the front.
1. Grasp retracted cargo cover underneath the Locking the backrest

upper fold on both sides.
Before letting passengers ride in the rear,
2. Pull the cover back out of the side brackets. engage the seat backrests, locking them in
Driving tips
3. Depending on your vehicle's equipment place. Otherwise, there is the danger of an ac‐
package, you can store the cover under the cident due to unexpected seat movement.◀
floor panel in the cargo area.
Ensure that the lock is securely engaged
When folding back the backrest, be sure
that it locks in place securely. The red warning
field in the control display disappears. If it is not
Navigation
properly engaged, transported cargo could en‐
ter the passenger compartment during braking
or evasive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle
occupants.◀
Observe the instructions concerning the
safety belt
Installing Observe the instructions concerning the safety
When installing, proceed in the opposite order belt, refer to page 50. Otherwise, personal pro‐
of removal. tection may be compromised.◀
1. Set the cargo cover into place on the left and
right sides.
2. Lift the back of the cover slightly and slide
forward until it snaps into the two side brack‐
ets.
Enlarging the cargo area

The rear seat backrest is divided. You can fold
down both sides separately in order to expand
the cargo area.
Mobility
BMW X6: before folding the rear seat

backrest forward
Before folding the rear seat backrest forward or
using the ski bag, remove beverage containers
from the cupholder and close the cupholder.◀
Reference
133
Storage compartments
Glove compartment ▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or

lamps to the USB interface.
Opening ▷ Do not connect a USB hard drive.
▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Center armrest front*

Storage compartment
A storage compartment is located under the
armrest between the front seats and, depending
Press the button. The covers open upward and on the vehicle's equipment, also a cover for the
downward and the lighting in the glove com‐ mobile phone cradle or the snap-in adapter.
partment switches on. Details on this mobile phone cradle, refer to
Close the glove compartment again im‐ page 225.
mediately
Opening
Close the glove compartment immediately after
use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur
during accidents.◀
Closing
Press one of the two covers closed.
USB interface for data transfer
Push cover down slightly and press the button.

The cover folds upward.
Connection for an external audio

device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over
the car's loudspeaker system:
Port for importing and exporting data, such as
music collections, refer to page 188, on USB ▷ AUX-IN port, refer to page 192.
devices. ▷ USB audio interface, refer to page 193.
Observe the following when connecting:

▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
134
Rear center armrest Clothes hooks
At a glance
BMW X6 and BMW X5 with 3rd row BMW X5
seats* The clothes hooks are located at the grab han‐
dles in the rear.
BMW X6
Controls
Driving tips
Pull on the loop and fold down the center arm‐
rest.
BMW X5 without 3rd row seats* To fold out, press against upper edge.
Do not obstruct view

When suspending clothing from the
Navigation
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision.◀
No heavy objects
Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks;
otherwise, they may present a danger to pas‐
sengers during braking and evasive maneu‐
Unlock the center armrest with the button in the vers.◀
lower section of the opening and fold down.
Cupholders*
Compartments are located in the doors, in the Notes
center console in the front and rear* as well as Shatter-proof containers and no hot
in the rear console in the BMW X6. drinks
Storage nets* are located on the backrests of Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
the front seats. not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the
Items in the storage nets increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
Do not stow hard or sharp-edged objects Unsuitable containers

Mobility
in the storage nets; otherwise there is an in‐ Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain‐
creased risk of injury in the event of an acci‐ ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam‐
dent.◀ age.◀
Reference
135
Front
Fold down the center armrest. Press the button;

the cupholders are opened.
Slide the cover back.
The cupholders of the 3rd row seats are located
Rear in the center console between the seats.
BMW X5 BMW X6
Unlock the center armrest with the button in the Slide the cover forward.
lower section of the opening and fold down.
Folding down the rear seat backrest and
using the ski bag
Remove the beverage container before folding
the rear seat backrest forward or using the ski
bag; otherwise it may cause damage.◀
Storage compartments in the

cargo area
Press the button; the cover folds forward. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol‐
lowing storage compartments can be found in
With 3rd row seats*: the cargo area:
▷ Storage compartments behind the remova‐
ble side panels on the right and left in the
cargo area* and under the cargo floor cover,
storage compartment* on the right in the
cargo area.
▷ Storage well* under the cargo floor cover.
136
▷ Retaining straps* on the left and right side
At a glance
trim for fastening small objects.
▷ Lashing rail with lashing eyes*. You can se‐
cure heavy-duty cargo straps on the lashing
eyes. They can be removed at the notches
in the rails. To move the lashing eyes, press
the button.
Read and comply with the information enclosed
Controls
with the heavy-duty cargo straps.
1 Brackets
Floor panel flap 2 Telescopic rail
3 Notch in the cargo area rail
Driving tips
Mounting brackets
The two brackets are connected with a tele‐
scopic rail.
1. Insert the brackets at the respective notch

in the rail on the cargo area floor.
2. Press down the brackets to push them into
Navigation
the desired position.
3. Check the firm seating of the brackets. They
must be clearly heard to engage.
No cargo on brackets
Do not lay cargo on the brackets, as oth‐
erwise they could be unlocked.◀
Dividing up cargo area

To access the onboard vehicle tool kit etc.
To open, swing up the flap by the handle, refer

to arrow.
The cargo floor cover is lockable*.
Adaptive fixing system*

The adaptive fixing system is used to divide up
the cargo area. It consists of two brackets with
a telescopic rail and retaining straps. These are The cargo can be positioned as follows:
guided into the two rails on the cargo area floor. ▷ Between the rear seat backrest and the tele‐
Mobility
Securing cargo scopic rail

Before using the adaptive fixing system, ▷ Between the telescopic rail and the retaining
fold up and lock the rear seat backrest; other‐ strap
wise, the cargo could be thrown into the vehicle Positioning cargo between telescopic rail and
interior in an accident.◀ retaining strap:
Reference
137
Loading
Storage compartments 1. Lay the cargo on the telescopic rail. Press
the button, arrow 1, and route the retaining 1. Fold down the center armrest, press the but‐
strap around the cargo, arrow 2. ton and open the cover.
2. Hook the retaining strap into the mount 3 on
the telescopic rail.
3. Press the button of the bracket, arrow 1. The
retaining strap is tensioned.
It is also possible to hook the two retaining
straps onto each other.
When the adaptive fixing system is no longer
needed, unhook the retaining strap and guide it
back into the bracket holding the hook to pre‐
vent damage and injury. 2. Press the button again; the cover in the
cargo area opens. If you press the button
Then slide the fastening system toward the front
firmly the first time, this cover also opens.
in order to permit the best possible use of the
cargo area. 3. Extend the ski bag between the front seats
and fill it. The zipper facilitates access to the
Removing brackets stowed items and drying of the ski bag.
Press down the brackets, slide them up to the 4. Attach the retaining strap:
notches of the rails and remove them. BMW X5: insert the latch plate of the ski bag re‐
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the taining strap into the center safety belt buckle
adaptive fixing system can be stored under the that is marked CENTER.
cargo floor panel in the cargo area.
Ski bag*
The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport
of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snow‐
boards.
Skis with a length of up to 6 ft/2.10 m can be
stowed using the ski bag. When stowing skis
with a length of 6 ft/2.10 m, the capacity of the BMW X6: attach the hook of the ski bag retaining
ski bag is reduced as the bag narrows. strap to the eyelet on the backrest.
Folding in display screen

Before loading the ski bag, fold in the dis‐
play screen of the DVD systems in the rear*;
otherwise, the display screen could be dam‐
aged.◀
Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp

edges to prevent damage.
138
Securing cargo
At a glance
Controls
After loading, secure the ski bag and its con‐
tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten‐
sioning buckle for this purpose.
Driving tips
Securing the ski bag
Secure the ski bag in this way. Failure to
do so may cause it to endanger occupants dur‐
ing braking or evasive maneuvers.◀
To store the ski bag, perform the above steps in

reverse order.
Navigation
Removing ski bag
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g., for
faster drying or to allow it to be put to other uses.
1. Pull the handle forward, arrow 1.
2. Take out the ski bag upward, arrow 2.
3. Close the cover in the cargo area.
More information on the various inserts available
can be obtained from the service center.
Mobility
Reference
139
Driving tips
This section provides you with information useful
in dealing with specific driving and operating
conditions.

Things to remember when driving
Breaking-in period Following part replacement

The same breaking in procedures should be ob‐
General information served if any of the components mentioned
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to above have to be renewed in the course of the
each other. vehicle's operating life.
The following instructions will help achieve a
long vehicle life and good economy.
General driving notes
Engine and differential
Closing tailgate
Always obey all official speed limits.
Drive with the tailgate closed
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road wise, passengers and other road users may be
speeds: endangered or the vehicle may be damaged if an
accident occurs or during braking or evasive
▷ For gasoline engine, 4,500 rpm and
maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐
100 mph/160 km/h.
ter the passenger compartment.◀
▷ For diesel engine, 3,500 rpm and 93 mph/
150 km/h. If the vehicle must be driven with the tailgate
open:
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode for the initial 1. Drive moderately.
miles. 2. Close all windows and the glass sunroof*/
panoramic glass sunroof*.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
3. Greatly increase the blower speed.
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Hot exhaust system
Tires Hot exhaust system
Due to technical factors associated with their High temperatures are generated in the
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐ exhaust system.
tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe‐ Do not remove the heat shields installed and
riod. never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/ that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, grass,
300 km. etc. do not come in contact with the hot exhaust
system during driving, while in idle position
Brake system mode, or when parked. Such contact could lead
to a fire, and with it the risk of serious personal
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
injury as well as property damage.
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there
and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in is the danger of getting burned.◀
period.
142
Diesel particulate filter* Driving through water
At a glance
Soot particles are collected in the diesel partic‐ Maximum water depth:
ulate filter and periodically burned away at high ▷ BMW X5: 20 inches/50 cm.
temperatures.
▷ BMW X6: 17 inches/45 cm.
During the cleaning period of several minutes:
Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐
▷ The engine may temporarily run less
tions
smoothly.
Only drive through water up to the above-men‐
Controls
▷ A somewhat higher engine speed may be
tioned depth at no greater than walking speed;
necessary to achieve the accustomed per‐
otherwise, the engine, electrical system, and
formance.
transmission can be damaged.◀
▷ Noises and a slight amount of smoke may
emerge from the exhaust, even for a short
Braking safely
period after the engine is switched off.
Driving tips
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
Mobile communication devices in the feature.
vehicle Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐
sary.
hicle
The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness.
It is not recommended to use mobile phones,
Navigation
You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum
such as mobile phones without a direct connec‐
of steering effort.
tion to an external aerial in the vehicle's passen‐
ger compartment. Otherwise, the vehicle elec‐ Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
tronics and mobile communication devices can the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
interfere with each other. In addition, there is no active mode.
assurance that the radiation generated during Do not let your foot rest on the brake pedal
transmission will be discharged from the vehicle
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
interior.◀
brake pedal. Even light but consistent pedal
pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake
Hydroplaning wear and possibly even brake failure.◀
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface. Objects in the area around the pedals
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
No objects in the area around the pedals
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
steer and brake the vehicle. otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Hydroplaning
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐ mats or other objects.
Mobility
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀

Only use floor mats that have been approved for
The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tire the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.
tread depth decreases. Minimum tread depth, Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened
refer to page 259. again when they are returned after being re‐
moved, such as for cleaning.◀
Reference
143
Driving in wet conditions
Things to remember when driving Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every fect that generally cannot be corrected.
few miles.
Condensation under the parked vehicle
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
road users. When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops that exits underneath
The heat generated in this process helps dry the
the vehicle.
brake discs and pads.
Therefore, traces of condensed water under the
In this way braking efficiency will be available
vehicle are normal.
when you need it.
Hills
Loading
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear
in which the least braking is required. Otherwise, Overloading the vehicle
the brake system may overheat, resulting in a To avoid exceeding the approved carrying
reduction in the brake system efficiency. capacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle.
The engine braking action can be further en‐ Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐
hanced by shifting down during manual opera‐ creases the rate at which damage develops in‐
tion of the automatic transmission, refer to side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss
page 69, if necessary all the way down to first of tire inflation pressure.◀
gear.
No fluids in the cargo area
Avoid load on the brakes
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the
Avoid placing excessive load on the brake cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐
system. Light but consistent brake pressure can aged.◀
lead to high temperatures, brake wear and pos‐
sibly even brake failure.◀
Determining the load limit
Do not drive in neutral
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In
addition, steering and brake assist is unavailable
with the engine stopped.◀
Brake disc corrosion

Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination
on the brake pads are furthered by:
1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
▷ Low mileage.
hicle’s placard*:
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
▷ The combined weight of occupants and
used at all.
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes. YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
applications to clean the discs is not reached.
144
hicle and unstable driving situations may
At a glance
result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
Controls
4. The resulting figure equals the available
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
the occupants and the cargo.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐
less cargo that can be transported.
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail‐
Driving tips
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs: 1,400 lbs minus 750 lbs = 650 lbs. Stowing cargo
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
BMW X5
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
Navigation
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transfered to your
vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting
a trailer to determine how this may reduce
the available cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity of your vehicle.
Load
BMW X5:
BMW X6:
Mobility
Reference
145
BMW X6 Securing cargo
BMW X5
BMW X6
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not

occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the BMW X5 in the opposite buckle.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low ▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
as possible, ideally directly behind the taining straps*, a cargo net* or draw straps*.
backrests.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners. straps*.
▷ Do not pile objects higher than the top edge Four lashing eyes* mounted in the cargo
of the backrest. area are used to secure these cargo straps,
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to refer to illustrations.
stow cargo. Adhere to the information included with the
▷ Place protective material around any sharp- cargo straps.
edged or pointed objects that could bump
Securing cargo
against the rear window while the vehicle is
in motion. Stow and secure the cargo as described
above; otherwise it may present a danger to the
occupants, for instance during braking and
avoidance maneuvers.
Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the
passenger compartment without securing
them; otherwise, they may present a danger to
occupants, for instance during braking and
avoidance maneuvers.
146
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle ▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration
At a glance
weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐
to page 292, as excessive loads can pose a tly.
safety hazard, and may also place you in viola‐
tion of traffic safety laws.
Use only the lashing eyes pictured to fasten the Driving on poor roads
heavy-duty cargo straps. Do not secure cargo
Your vehicle combines an all-wheel drive sys‐
using the upper top tether, refer to page 57,
tem with the advantages of a normal passenger
Controls
mounting points; otherwise, these may become
car.
damaged.◀
Do not drive on unpaved terrain
Do not drive on unpaved terrain, as other‐
Roof-mounted luggage rack* wise the vehicle may be damaged.◀
Driving tips
For your own safety and the safety of passen‐
Special rack system as optional gers and the vehicle, adhere to the following
accessory points:
A special rack system is available as an optional ▷ Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before
accessory. driving; never take risks.
Follow the directions given in the installation in‐ ▷ Adjust speeds according to road conditions.
structions.
Navigation
The steeper and rougher the road surface is,
the lower the speed should be.
Mounting
▷ When driving on steep uphill and downhill
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained grades: the engine oil and coolant should be
for raising and opening the glass sunroof*/pan‐ filled nearly to the MAX mark.
oramic glass sunroof*.
BMW X5: the vehicle can be driven on uphill
and downhill grades up to 50%.
Loading
▷ Use Hill Descent Control HDC, refer to
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
page 98, on steep downhill grades.
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
vehicle handling and steering response. BMW X5: the vehicle can be driven away on
uphill grades of up to 33%. The permissible
Therefore, note the following when loading and
body roll is 50%.
driving:
▷ Watch for stones, holes, and other obstacles
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads
and drive around these where possible.
and the approved gross vehicle weight, refer
to page 292. ▷ On bumps and rough roads, avoid contact
between the vehicle body and the ground.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
The maximum ground clearance is 8 inches/
▷ The roof load should not be too large in area. 20 cm and may vary with the loaded cargo.
▷ Always load the heaviest pieces on the bot‐ ▷ When driving through water, do not exceed
tom.
Mobility
the maximum water height.

▷ Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and ▷ BMW X5: 20 inches/50 cm
securely.
▷ BMW X6: 17 inches/45 cm
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
Drive at walking speed only and do not stop
path of the tailgate.
the vehicle.
Reference
147
Remove attached parts following use
Things to remember when driving ▷ After driving through water, press on the
brake pedal several times at low speeds to Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear
dry the brakes. luggage racks after use.
▷ Depending on the prevailing terrain, activate Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
page 97, briefly.
▷ When the wheels spin, accelerate to enable Closing the windows and glass
the driving stability control systems to dis‐ sunroof*/panoramic glass sunroof*
tribute the drive force to the individual Driving with the glass sunroof/panoramic glass
wheels. sunroof and windows open results in increased
▷ BMW X5 with M Sport Package*: if the ve‐ air resistance and raises fuel consumption.
hicle is primarily used on poor roads or un‐
paved surfaces, it may be advantageous, Check the tire inflation pressure
depending on the driving style, to use the regularly
stone chip guard offered by the service cen‐ Check and, if necessary, correct the tire inflation
ter. This reduces the risk of damage to pressure, refer to page 252, at least twice a
painted vehicle components, such as in the month and before starting on a long trip.
area of the side skirts and wheel arches.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
Your service center will be glad to advise
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
you.
tire wear.
After driving on poor roads
Drive away without delay
Adhere to the following points to ensure vehicle
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
safety:
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
▷ Remove excessive accumulations of dirt away, but at moderate engine speeds.
and mud from the vehicle body.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
▷ Clear mud, snow, ice, etc., from the wheels reach its operating temperature.
and tires and check for damage.
Look well ahead when driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
Saving fuel
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
General information driving ahead of you.
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐ fuel consumption.
sions.
Avoid high engine speeds
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors. Driving at a low engine speed reduces fuel con‐
sumption and minimizes wear.
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
ing style and regular maintenance, refer to
Use coasting conditions
page 268, can have an influence on fuel con‐
sumption and on the environmental impact. When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.
Remove unnecessary cargo On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the ac‐
Additional weight increases fuel consumption. celerator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
148
Switch off the engine during longer
At a glance
stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Fuel savings are achieved after the vehicle is
switched off for only approx. 4 seconds.
Controls
Switch off any functions that are not
currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐
dow defroster require a lot of energy and con‐
sume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-
Driving tips
and-go traffic.
Therefore, switch off these functions if they are
not actually needed.
Have maintenance carried out

Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
Navigation
Have the maintenance carried out by your serv‐
ice center.
Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem, refer to page 268.
Mobility
Reference
149
Navigation
This chapter contains various examples of how
the navigation system can guide you reliably to
your destination.

Navigation system*
Navigation system
General information Performing an update

1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
The navigation system can determine the pre‐
player with the labeled side facing up.
cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat‐
ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
guide you to every entered destination. play.
3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga‐
Entries in stationary vehicle
tion DVD and change the DVD if needed.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐
If the trip is interrupted, follow the instructions
tionary, and always give priority to the applicable
on the Control Display and restart the update if
traffic regulations in the event of any contradic‐
necessary.
tion between traffic and road conditions and the
instructions issued by the navigation system.
Failure to take to this precaution can place you Viewing the status
in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants 1. Open "Options".
and other road users in danger.◀ 2. "Navigation update"
Removing navigation DVD

Navigation data
1. Press button 1.
Information on navigation data The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version"
Information is displayed on the data version.
Updating the navigation data
General information
Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can
2. Remove the DVD.
be updated.
Navigation data and authorization codes are
available from your service center.
▷ Depending on the data volume, a data up‐
date may take several hours.
▷ Update during the trip to preserve battery.
▷ During the update, only the basic functions
of the navigation system are available.
▷ The status of the update can be viewed.
▷ The system restarts after the update.
▷ The data carrier with the navigation data can
be removed after the update is complete.
152
Destination entry
At a glance
At a glance ▷ Destination guidance is started to the town/
city center if no street is entered.
In entering your destination you can select from
the following options: Entering a state/province
▷ Enter the destination manually, see below.
Controls
▷ Select the destination from the address 1. Press the button.
book, refer to page 154. 2. "Navigation"
▷ Last destinations, refer to page 156. 3. "Enter address"
▷ Special destinations, refer to page 156.
▷ Destination entry via map, refer to
Driving tips
page 157.
▷ Using the home address as the destination,
refer to page 155.
▷ Destination entry by voice*, refer to
page 158.
▷ Enter the destination via BMW Assist*, refer
Navigation
to page 157.
4. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
Entries in stationary vehicle state/province.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary, and always give priority to the applicable Entering a town/city
traffic regulations in the event of any contradic‐ 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
tion between traffic and road conditions and the played town/city.
instructions issued by the navigation system.
Failure to take to this precaution can place you
in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants
and other road users in danger.◀
Manual destination entry

General information
The system supports you in entering street 2. Select letters, if necessary.
names and house numbers by automatically
The list is narrowed down further with each
completing the entry and providing entry com‐
entry.
parisons, refer to page 23.
Mobility
3. Move the controller to the right.

Stored town/city and street names can be called
up quickly. 4. Select the name of the town/city from the
list.
▷ If the existing entries should not be changed,
the entries for the state/province and town/ If there are several towns/cities with the same
city can be skipped. name:
Reference
1. Change to the list of town/city names.
153
Destination entry 2. Highlight the town/city. 5. Select "In" with the state/province currently
3. Select the town/city. displayed.
All streets of the selected state/province are
Entering the postal code* offered. The associated town/city is dis‐
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐ played after the street name.
played town/city.
3. Select the numbers.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/
cities.
5. Highlight the entry.
6. Selecting an entry.
Entering a street and intersection 6. Select the letters.

1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 7. Change to the list of street names.
2. Enter a street and intersection in the same 8. Highlight the street.
way as you would enter a town/city.
9. Select the street.
If there are several streets with the same name:
1. Change to the list of street names. Starting destination guidance after

entering the destination
2. Highlight the street.
1. "Accept destination"
3. Select the street.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
Alternative: enter the street address destination"
and house number Add, refer to page 159, a destination as a
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. further destination.
2. Enter the street as you would the town/city.

3. "House number" Address book
4. Select the numbers.
Create contacts, refer to page 235.
5. Change to the list of house numbers.
6. Select a house number or range of house Selecting a destination from the
numbers. address book
1. "Navigation"
Street does not exist in the destination
2. "Address book"
city/town
Contacts with addresses are displayed if
The desired street does not exist in the specified
these have been checked as destinations.
city/town because it belongs to another part of
the city/town. If the contacts with addresses from the mo‐
bile phone* are not displayed, they first need
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
154
to be checked as destinations, refer to 3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
At a glance
page 236. to contact"
Controls
3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with 4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex‐
"A-Z search". isting contact from the list. Select the type
Driving tips
4. "Business address" or "Home address" of address and enter the first and last name.
5. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the destination in the address
book Editing or deleting an address
After entering the destination, store the desti‐ 1. "Navigation"
nation in the address book. 2. "Address book"
Navigation
1. Open "Options". 3. Highlight the entry.
2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing 4. Open "Options".
contact" 5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"
Using the home address as the
destination
The home address must be stored. Specify the
home address, refer to page 229.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home"
3. Select an existing contact, if available.
4. "Business address" or "Home address"
5. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
name".
6. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position

Mobility
The current position can be stored in the ad‐

dress book.
4. "Start guidance"
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
Reference
155
Last destinations Special destinations
Destination entry
At a glance Opening the search for special
The destinations previously entered are stored destinations
automatically. Selection of special destinations, such as hotels
These destinations can be called up and used or tourist attractions.
as a destination for destination guidance. 1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
Calling up the last destination
3. Select the search function.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations" Online Search*
1. "Google™ Search"
2. Select a special destination.
4. "Start guidance"
A-Z search
1. "A-Z search"
2. "Town/City"
3. Select or enter the town/city.
Starting destination guidance
4. "Category"
1. "Navigation"
5. Select the category.
2. "Last destinations"
6. "Category details"
3. Select the destination.
For some special destinations, multiple cat‐
4. "Start guidance"
egory details can be selected. Move the
controller to the left to leave the category
Editing the destination
details.
1. "Navigation"
7. "Keyword"
8. Enter the keyword.
3. Highlight the destination.
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Details are displayed.
Deleting the last destinations If multiple details are stored, you can leaf
through the pages.
1. "Navigation"
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established if necessary.
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destination"
destinations"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 159.
156
"Start search": if a search term is not entered, 1. "Navigation"
At a glance
the search is repeated with the previous search
2. "Enter address"
term.
3. Open "Options".
Category search 4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"
1. "Category search"
2. "Town/City"
Displaying special destinations in the
map
3. Select or enter the town/city.
Controls
To display symbols of the special destinations
4. "Category" in the map view:
5. Select the category.
1. "Navigation"
6. "Category details"
2. "Map"
For some special destinations, multiple cat‐
3. Open "Options".
Driving tips
egory details can be selected. Move the
controller to the left to leave the category 4. "Display Points of Interest"
details. 5. Select the setting.
7. "Start search"
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
Destination entry by map
Navigation
Details are displayed. Selecting the destination
If multiple details are stored, you can leaf 1. "Navigation"
through the pages.
2. "Map"
If a phone number is available, a connection
The current position of the vehicle is dis‐
can be established if necessary.
played on the map.
3. "Interactive map"
destination"
refer to page 159.
Display of special destinations

List of special destinations: special destinations
are arranged by distance and appear with a di‐
rectional arrow pointing to the special destina‐
tion.
4. Select the destination with crosshairs.
On the split screen, special destinations of the
▷ To change the scale: turn the controller.
selected category are displayed in the map view
as symbols. The display depends on the scale ▷ To shift the map: move the controller in
Mobility
of the map and the category. the required direction.

▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the
Destination entry via BMW Assist* controller in the required direction and
A connection is established to the Concierge turn it.
service, refer to page 238.
Reference
157
Specifying the street
Destination entry ▷ When making a destination entry by voice,
If the system does not recognize the street, one you can change between voice operation
of the following pieces of information is dis‐ and iDrive.
played: ▷ To have the available spoken instructions
▷ A street name in the vicinity. read out loud: ›Voice commands‹.
▷ The county.
Saying the entries
▷ The coordinates of the destination.
▷ The town/city, street, and house number
can be entered as a single command*.
Additional functions
▷ Spell the entry if the spoken language and
Additional functions are available on the inter‐
the language of the system differ.
active map after the controller is pressed.
▷ Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag‐
gerating the pronunciation and inserting
lengthy pauses between the letters.
▷ The methods of entry depend on the navi‐
gation data in use and the country and lan‐
guage settings.
Entering an address using a command*

▷ Select the symbol. wheel.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another 2. ›Enter address‹
destination"
3. Wait for a request from the system.
4. Say the address in the suggested order.
refer to page 159.
5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
▷ "Exit interactive map": return to the map
the system.
view.
If necessary, individually name the separate
▷ "View in northern direction" or "View in
components of the address, e.g., the town/
driving direction"
city.
▷ "Display destination": the map section
around the destination is displayed. Entering a town/city separately
▷ "Display current location": the map section The town/city can be said as a complete word*.
around your current location is displayed.
With the destination entry menu displayed:
▷ "Find points of interest": the search for spe‐
cial destinations is started.
wheel.
Destination entry by voice* 2. ›City‹ or ›Spell city‹

3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
General information town/city.
▷ Instructions for voice activation system, re‐ 4. Say the name of the town/city, or name at
fer to page 24. least the first three letters.
158
Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit‐ Planning a trip with
At a glance
ies may be suggested.
intermediate destinations
5. Select a location:
▷ Select a recommended town/city: ›Yes‹. New trip
▷ Select a different town/city: ›New entry‹. A trip can be planned with several intermediate
▷ Select an entry: ›Entry ...‹, for instance, destinations.
entry 2. 1. "Navigation"
Controls
▷ Spell an entry: ›Spell city‹. 2. "Map"
6. Continue making the entry as prompted by 3. Move the controller to the left if necessary.
the system.
4. "Guidance"
If there are several towns/cities with the same
5. "Enter new destination"
name:
Driving tips
6. Select the type of destination entry.
Towns/cities of the same name are grouped in a
list and displayed as one location followed by an
ellipsis.
1. Select an entry: ›Yes‹ or ›Entry ...‹, e. g., En‐

try 2.
2. Select the desired town/city.
Navigation
Entering a street or intersection
separately
Enter a street and intersection in the same way 7. Enter the intermediate destination.
as you would enter a town/city.
8. "Start guidance"
Entering a house number separately
Entering intermediate destinations
Depending on the data in the navigation system,
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can
house numbers up to number 2,000 can be en‐
be entered for a trip.
tered.
1. "Enter new destination"
1. ›House number‹
2. Select the type of destination entry.
2. Say the house number.
3. Enter the intermediate destination.
Say each digit separately.
4. "Add as another destination"
3. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system. The intermediate destination is entered in
the destination list and is highlighted.
Starting destination guidance 5. Turn the controller until the intermediate
›Start guidance‹ destination is located at the desired location
in the list.
Mobility
Starting the trip

1. After all intermediate destinations are en‐
tered, highlight the first destination.
Reference
159
Destination entry If the second destination, for example, is Some options are not available for certain trips.
highlighted when destination guidance is
started, the first destination is skipped. Deleting a stored trip
2. "Start guidance" 1. "Navigation"
This symbol marks the active leg of the 2. "Stored trips"
trip. 3. Highlight the desired trip.
4. Open "Options".
Storing a trip
5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip"
Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. If
necessary, delete existing trips to be able to
store new trips.
Opening the most recent trip
1. "Navigation"
1. Open "Options".
2. "Stored trips"
2. "Store trip"
3. "Last trip"
3. Enter a name for the trip.
4. "Start guidance"
4. "OK"
Selecting a stored trip

1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select a stored trip.
4. "Start guidance"
Changing the trip direction

Intermediate destinations are displayed in re‐
verse order in the list.
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reverse order of trip dest."
Intermediate destination options

1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip destinations"
4. Select an intermediate destination.
▷ "Edit destination"
▷ "Reposition dest. in the trip": move an
intermediate destination to another po‐
sition in the list.
▷ "Delete dest. in the trip"
▷ "Go to next dest. in the trip"
160
Destination guidance
At a glance
Starting destination ▷ Road types are part of the navigation data
and are taken into consideration when plan‐
guidance ning a route, e.g., avoid highways.
1. "Navigation" ▷ The recommended route may differ from the
2. Make a destination entry, refer to page 153. route you would take based on personal ex‐
Controls
perience.
3. "Accept destination"
▷ The settings are stored for the remote con‐
4. "Start guidance"
trol currently in use.
The route is shown on the Control Display.
▷ Destination guidance with traffic bulletins,
The distance to the destination/intermediate refer to page 167.
Driving tips
destination and the estimated time of arrival are
displayed in the map view. Changing the route criteria
The arrow view is displayed in the Head-up Dis‐ 1. "Navigation"
play* and in some cases on the Control Display.
2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
Terminating destination 4. Select the criterion:
Navigation
guidance ▷ "Fast route": time-optimized route,
being a combination of the shortest pos‐
1. "Navigation" sible route and the fastest roads.
2. "Map" ▷ "Efficient route": optimized combi‐
nation of the fastest and shortest route.
3. "Guidance"
4. "Stop guidance" ▷ "Short route": short distance, irre‐
spective of how fast or slow progress will
be.
Continuing destination ▷ "Alternative routes": if available, alter‐
guidance native routes are suggested during ac‐
tive destination guidance. The individual
If the destination was not reached during the last suggestions are highlighted in color.
trip, destination guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"
Route criteria
General information
Mobility
▷ The route calculated can be influenced by

selecting certain criteria.
▷ The route criteria can be changed when the 5. Specify additional criteria for the route, if
destination is entered and during destina‐ necessary:
tion guidance. ▷ "Avoid highways": highways are
Reference
avoided wherever possible.
161
Destination guidance ▷ "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoided 3. Highlight a route section.
wherever possible. The route section is displayed on the split
▷ "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided screen.
where possible.
Bypassing a section of the

Route route
Different views of the route are available during Calculate a new route for a route section.
destination guidance:
1. "Navigation"
▷ Arrow view.
2. "Route information"
▷ List of route sections.
3. "New route for"
▷ Map view, refer to page 163.
▷ Arrow view in the Head-up Display*, refer to
page 117.
Arrow view
The following information is displayed during
destination guidance:
▷ Large arrow: indicates the current direction
of travel.
▷ Small arrow: indicates the next change in di‐ 4. Turn the controller. Enter the number of kilo‐
rection. meters within which you would like to return
▷ Intersection view. to the original route.
▷ Lane information. 5. Press the controller.
▷ Traffic bulletins.
Resuming the original route
▷ Distance to the next change in direction.
If the route section should no longer be by‐
▷ Street name at the next change in direction.
passed:
Lane information 1. "Navigation"

On multi-lane roads, the recommended lanes 2. "Route information"
are marked in the arrow view by a triangle. 3. "New route for:"
▷ Solid triangle: best lane. 4. "Remove blocking"
▷ Empty triangle: possible lane. However, an‐
other lane change may be needed shortly.
Gas station recommendation
Displaying a list of route sections
The remaining range is calculated and gas sta‐
When destination guidance has been started, a tions along the route are displayed.
list of the route sections can be displayed. The
driving distance and traffic bulletins are dis‐ 1. "Navigation"
played for each route section. 2. "Route information"
1. "Navigation" 3. "Recommended refuel"
2. "Route information" A list of the gas stations is displayed.
162
4. Highlight a gas station. Map view
At a glance
The position of the gas station is shown on
the split screen. Selecting the map view
5. Select the gas station. 1. "Navigation"
6. Select the symbol. 2. "Map"
7. "Start guidance": destination guidance to
the selected gas station is started. At a glance
Controls
"Add as another destination": the gas sta‐
tion is added to the route.
through voice instructions
Driving tips
Switching spoken instructions on/off
1 Function bar
rently in use.
2 Route section with traffic obstruction
1. "Navigation"
3 Traffic sign for traffic obstruction
Navigation
2. "Map"
4 Planned route
3. "Voice instructions"
5 Current location
Repeating a spoken instruction 6 Upper status field
1. "Navigation" 7 Lower status field
2. "Map"
Lines in the map
3. Highlight the symbol.
Streets and routes are displayed in different col‐
4. Press the controller twice. ors and styles depending on their classification.
Dashed lines represent railways and ferry con‐
Volume of spoken instructions nections. Country borders are indicated by thin
Turn the volume button while giving an instruc‐ lines.
tion until the desired volume is set.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ Traffic obstructions
rently in use. Small triangles along the planned route indicate
route sections with traffic obstructions, depend‐
Saving the spoken instructions on the ing on the map scale. The direction of the trian‐
programmable memory buttons gles indicates the direction of the obstruction.
The function for switching the spoken instruc‐ The traffic signs indicate the significance of the
tions on/off can be stored on a programmable obstruction.
Mobility
memory button, refer to page 22, for quick ac‐ ▷ Red traffic sign: the obstruction affects the
cess. planned route or direction.
▷ Grey traffic sign: the obstruction does not
affect the planned route or direction.
Traffic bulletins, refer to page 165.
Reference
163
Planned route Automatically scaled map scale
After destination guidance is started, the plan‐ In the map view facing north, turn the controller
ned route is displayed on the map. in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis‐
played. The entire route between the current lo‐
Status fields cation and the destination is displayed on the
Show/hide: press the controller. map.
▷ Upper status field: time, telephone, and en‐
Settings for the map view
tertainment details.
▷ Lower status field: symbol for active desti‐
currently in use.
nation guidance, status of traffic bulletins,
time of arrival, and distance to destination. 1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
Function bar
3. Open "Options".
The following functions are available in the func‐
4. "Settings"
tion bar:
5. To set the map view:
Symbol Function
▷ "Day/night mode"
Start/end destination guidance. Select and create the necessary settings
Switch spoken instructions on/ depending on the light conditions.
off. "Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the
setting is disregarded.
Change the route criteria.
▷ "Satellite images"
Search for a special destination. Depending on availability and resolution,
Display traffic bulletins. satellite images* are displayed at scales of
approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to
Open the interactive map. 1,000 km.
Set the map view. ▷ "Perspective view in 3D"
Prominent areas that are contained in the
Change the scale.
navigation data are displayed on the map in
3D.
To change to the function bar, move the con‐ ▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map"
troller to the left.
The map is optimized for displaying traffic
Changing the map section bulletins, refer to page 166.
"Interactive map" Symbols for the special destinations are no

longer displayed.
▷ To shift the map: move the controller in the
required direction.
Split screen map view
▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the con‐ The map view can be selected for the split
troller in the required direction and turn it. screen independently from the main screen.
Changing the scale 1. Open "Options".

1. Select the symbol. 2. "Split screen"
2. To change the scale: turn the controller. 3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the split screen is selected.
164
4. Select "Split screen content" or the scale. of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic in‐
At a glance
5. Select the map view. cident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b)
your violation of this directive and/or (c) any
▷ "Arrow display"
unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in
▷ "Map facing north" connection herewith.
▷ "Map direction of travel" B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor‐
▷ "Map view with perspective" mational only. User assumes all risk of use.
▷ "Position" Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their
Controls
suppliers make no representations about
▷ "Exit ramp view": selected blind drive‐ content, traffic and road conditions, route
ways are displayed three dimensionally. usability, or speed.
▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map" C. The licensed material is provided to li‐
6. To change the scale: select the split screen censee “as is,” and “where is”. Total Traffic
and turn the controller. Network, including, but not limited to, any
Driving tips
and all third party providers of any of the li‐
censed material, expressly disclaims, to the
Traffic bulletins* fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties
or representations with respect to the li‐
At a glance censed material (including, without limita‐
▷ Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta‐ tion, that the licensed material will be error-
Navigation
tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa‐ free, will operate without interruption or that
tion of a traffic information service. Informa‐ the traffic data will be accurate), express, im‐
tion on traffic obstructions and hazards is plied or statutory, including, without limita‐
updated continuously. tion, the implied warranties of merchanta‐
bility, non-infringement fitness for a
Certain BMW models equipped with navi‐
particular purpose, or those arising from a
gation have the capability to display real-
course of dealing or usage of trade.
time traffic information. If your system has
this capability the following additional terms D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or
and conditions apply: BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
special, consequential, exemplary, or inci‐
An End-User shall no longer have the right
dental damages (including, without limita‐
to use the Traffic Data in the event that the
tion, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, or
End-User is in material breach of the terms
profits relating to the same) arising from any
and conditions contained herein.
claim relating directly or indirectly to use of
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Net‐
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. (“Total Traffic work, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the
Network”) holds the rights to the traffic in‐ possibility of such damages. These limita‐
cident data and RDS-TMC network through tions apply to all claims, including, without
which it is delivered. You may not modify, limitation, claims in contract and tort (such
copy, scan or use any other method to re‐ as negligence, product liability and strict li‐
produce, duplicate, republish, transmit or ability). Some states do not allow the exclu‐
Mobility
distribute in any way any portion of traffic in‐ sion or limitation of incidental or consequen‐
cident data. You agree to indemnify, defend tial damages, so those particular limitations
and hold harmless BMW of North America, may not apply to you.
LLC. (“BMW NA”) and Total Traffic Net‐
▷ The traffic bulletins are indicated on the map
work, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against
by symbols.
any and all claims, damages, costs or other
Reference
expenses that arise directly or indirectly out
165
Destination guidance ▷ The traffic bulletins for the surrounding area the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis‐
are stored in a list. played.
The symbol in the function bar of the map
view turns red if there are traffic bulletins Additional information in the map view
that affect the calculated route. Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc‐
tion's length, direction, and impact are displayed
Switching the reception on/off in the map using triangles or gray bars along the
1. "Navigation" calculated route.
2. Open "Options". ▷ Red: traffic congestion
3. "Receive Traffic Info" ▷ Orange: stop-and-go traffic

▷ Yellow: heavy traffic
Opening the list of traffic bulletins ▷ Green: clear roads
1. "Navigation" ▷ Gray: general traffic bulletins such as road
2. "Map" construction
3. "Traffic Info" The displayed information depends on the par‐
First, traffic bulletins for the calculated route ticular traffic information service.
are displayed.
Filtering traffic bulletins
The traffic bulletins are sorted by their dis‐
tance from the current position of the vehi‐ You can set which traffic bulletins appear on the
cle. map.
4. Select a traffic bulletin. 1. "Navigation"

"More information": display additional 2. "Map"
information. 3. Open "Options".
5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin 4. "Traffic Info categories"
if required.
5. Select the desired category.
Traffic bulletins on the map
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
The Control Display changes to a black and
white display. This enables a better view of the
traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is disre‐
garded in this setting. Symbols and special des‐
tinations are not displayed.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map" Traffic bulletins of the selected category are dis‐
3. Open "Options". played on the map.
4. "Settings" ▷ Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the route
are always shown.
5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"
▷ For your own safety, traffic bulletins that no‐
Symbols in the map view tify you of potentially dangerous situations,
such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hid‐
Depending on the scale of the map and the lo‐
den.
cation of the traffic obstruction along the route,
166
Destination guidance with traffic 2. Open "Options".
At a glance
bulletins 3. "Dynamic guidance"
Semi-dynamic destination guidance

When traffic bulletin reception is switched on,
semi-dynamic destination guidance is active.
The destination guidance system takes the
available traffic information into account. A mes‐
Controls
sage is displayed depending on the route, the
traffic bulletins, and the possible detour routes.
A detour is suggested in the event of a traffic
obstruction. In addition, distance and time dif‐
ferences between the original route and the de‐
tour are displayed.
Driving tips
To accept the detour:
"Detour"
In the event of special hazards, e. g., objects on
the road, a message is displayed without a de‐
tour suggestion.
Navigation
Detours can also be accepted if the traffic mes‐
sages are called up in the list.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
4. "Detour information"
5. "Detour"
Dynamic destination guidance

The route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions.
▷ The system does not point out traffic ob‐
structions along the original route.
▷ Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on
the map.
▷ Depending on road type and the kind and
extent of the traffic obstruction, the calcu‐
lated route may lead through the traffic ob‐
Mobility
struction.
▷ Dangerous situations are displayed regard‐
less of the setting.
To activate dynamic destination guidance:
1. "Navigation"
Reference
167
What to do if...
What to do if...
▷ The current transmission position cannot be

displayed?
The vehicle is located in an unrecognized
region, is in a poor reception area, or the
system is currently determining the posi‐
tion. Reception is usually best when you
have an unobstructed view of the sky.
▷ The destination without street information is
not used for route guidance?
When city has been input, no downtown can
be determined. Input any street in the se‐
lected city and start destination guidance.
▷ The destination is not used for route guid‐
ance?
The destination data are not contained in the
navigation data. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
▷ Letters for destination input cannot be se‐
lected?
The stored data do not contain the data of
the destination. Select a goal that is as close
as possible to the original.
▷ Is the map displayed in shades of gray?
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
The Control Display changes to a black and
white display. This enables a better view of
the traffic bulletins.
▷ Spoken instructions are no longer output
during route guidance in front of intersec‐
tions?
The area has not yet been fully recorded, or
you have left the recommended route and
the system requires a few seconds to cal‐
culate a new route suggestion.
168
169
Entertainment
This chapter helps assure your enjoyment when
receiving radio stations and playing CDs, DVDs,
and tracks from the music collection.

Tone
Tone
General information Adjusting the equalizer

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
The sound settings are stored for the remote
control currently in use. 2. "Tone"
3. "Equalizer"
4. Select the desired setting.
Treble, bass, balance, and
fader
▷ "Treble": treble adjustment.
▷ "Bass": depth adjustment.
▷ "Balance": left/right volume distribution.
▷ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.
Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 5. To adjust: turn the controller.
2. "Tone" 6. To store: press the controller.
Multi-channel playback,
surround*
Choose between stereo and multi-channel play‐
back, surround.
Setting multi-channel playback,

surround
3. Select the desired tone settings.
2. "Tone"
3. "Surround"
4. To adjust: turn the controller.

5. To store: press the controller.
When surround is activated, multi-channel play‐

back is simulated when a stereo audio track is
Equalizer*
played.
Setting for individual audio frequency ranges.
172
Volume
At a glance
▷ "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume
control.
▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC signal* com‐
pared to the entertainment sound output.
▷ "Gong": volume of the signal, such as the
safety belt reminder, compared to the en‐
Controls
tertainment sound output.
▷ "Microphone": volume of the microphone*
during a phone call.
▷ "Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers*
during a phone call.
Driving tips
The following volumes are only stored for the
respective paired telephone: "Microphone",
"Loudspeak.".
Adjusting the volume

Navigation
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
Resetting the tone settings

All tone settings can be reset to the default set‐
ting.
Mobility

2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"
Reference
173
Radio
Radio
Controls 3. Select the desired station.
1 Volume, on/off All saved stations are stored for the remote con‐
2 Change wave band
3 Change entertainment sources Changing the station
4 Change station/track Turn the controller and press it
5 Programmable memory buttons or
Press the button
Sound output
or
Switching on/off Press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF page 12.
button on the radio.
Storing a station
Muting 1. "Radio"
When the ignition is switched on or the engine 2. "FM" or "AM"
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the 3. Highlight the desired station.
radio.
AM/FM station
Selecting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
4. Press the controller for an extended period.

5. Select the desired memory location.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
The stations can also be stored on the program‐
mable memory buttons, refer to page 22.
174
Selecting a station manually HD Radio™ reception*
At a glance
Station selection via the frequency. Many stations broadcast both analog and digital
signals.
1. "Radio"
License conditions
2. "FM" or "AM"
HD Radio™ technology manufactured under li‐
3. "Manual"
cense from iBiquity Digital Corp. U. S. and For‐
4. To select the frequency: turn the controller. eign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq‐
Controls
uity Digital Corp.
Activating/deactivating digital radio

reception
1. "Radio"
Driving tips
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio Reception"
To store the station: press the controller for an
extended period. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
RDS* This symbol is displayed in the status line
Navigation
RDS broadcasts additional information, such as when the audio signal is digital.
the station name, in the FM wave band. When In areas in which the station is not continuously
playing a station with multiple frequencies, the received in digital mode, the playback switches
system automatically switches to the frequency between analog and digital reception. Due to
with the best reception, if needed. time delayed broadcasting, there may be repe‐
titions or interruptions. In this case, switch off
Switching the RDS on/off digital radio reception.
1. "Radio"
Displaying additional information
2. "FM"
Some stations broadcast additional information
3. Open "Options".
on the current track, such as the name of the ar‐
4. "RDS" tist.
1. Select the desired station.

2. Open "Options".
3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
This symbol indicates that a main station also
broadcasts additional substations. The station
Mobility
name of the main station ends in HD1. Station

The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc.
rently in use. 1. Select the desired station.
Reference
3. Select the substation.
175
Radio When reception is poor, the substation is muted 3. "Category"
for several seconds. If reception is interrupted
for an extended period, it switches back to the
main station.
Satellite radio*
General information
The channels are offered in predefined pack‐
ages. The packages must be enabled by tele‐
4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate‐
phone.
gory.
Navigation bar overview 5. Select the desired channel.

The phone number and an electronic serial
Symbol Function number, ESN, are displayed.
Change the list view. 6. Select the phone number to have the chan‐
nel enabled.
Select the category.
Direct channel entry
Timeshift
Open the My Favorites category/

open a favorite.
Manage the favorites.
Traffic Jump
You can unsubscribe from the channels again
via this phone number.
The functions of the navigation bar symbols can
also be stored on the programmable memory
buttons, refer to page 22.
Unsubscribing from channels
1. "Radio"
Managing a subscription 2. "Satellite radio"
To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the 3. Open "Options".
channels, you must have reception. It is usually 4. "Manage subscription"
at its best when you have an unobstructed view
of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the
status line.
Enabling channels
The Unsubscribed Channels category contains
all disabled channels.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
176
5. The phone number and an electronic serial 5. Press the controller again.
At a glance
number, ESN, are displayed. 6. Press the controller again to confirm the
6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan‐ highlighted channel.
nels.
Selecting channels
You can only listen to enabled channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
Controls
control currently in use.
Via the iDrive

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio" 7. Select the desired memory location.
Driving tips
3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate‐ The channels are stored for the remote control
gory. currently in use.
4. Select the desired channel. The channels can also be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 22.
Changing the list view
Navigation
The list view changes every time the first symbol
on the navigation bar is pressed.
Information on the channel is displayed.
Symbol Meaning
Channel name
Artist
Via the button on the radio
Press the button. Track
The next channel is selected.
Selecting a category
Via direct channel entry 1. "Radio"
1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio"
2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Category"
3. "Set channel" 4. Select the desired category.
4. Turn the controller until the desired channel
is reached and press the controller. Timeshift
Approx. one hour of the program being broad‐
Storing a channel cast on the channel currently being listened to
Mobility
is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal must

1. "Radio"
be available.
The stored audio track can be played with a de‐
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐ lay following the live broadcast. When the buffer
sired category. is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buf‐
Reference
4. Select the desired channel. fer is cleared when a new channel is selected.
177
Opening the timeshift function
Radio 1. "Radio"
1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio"
2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Replay - Time shift"
3. "Replay - Time shift" 4. "Automatic time shift"
To deactivate:
"Automatic time shift"
Storing favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
list. Available favorites are artist, track, game,
league, and team.
Storing the artist, track, or game

▷ The red arrow shows the current playback
It is only possible to store favorites that are cur‐
position.
rently being broadcast. The channel information
▷ The time difference to the live broadcast is must be available.
displayed next to the buffer bar.
1. "Radio"
▷ For live transmissions "live".
Timeshift menu 3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
sired category.
Symbol Function 4. Select the desired channel.
Go to the live broadcast 5. Press the controller again.
Playback/pause 6. Select the artist, track, or game.
Next track Storing the league or team

Previous track Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites
from a selection list.
Fast forward
1. "Radio"
Reverse
Automatic timeshift deactivated/ac‐ 3. "Manage favorites"
tivated 4. "Add sports information"
Automatic timeshift
When the function is activated, audio playback
is stopped automatically in the event of:
▷ Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system.
▷ Muting.
The audio playback then continues with a time
delay.
5. Select the league.
To activate:
6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.
178
Opening the favorites Selecting a region
At a glance
If an activated favorite is played back, the fol‐ 1. "Radio"
lowing message appears for approx. 20 seconds 2. "Satellite radio"
"Favorite alert!".
3. Open "Options".
"Favorites"
4. "Set jump"
Select the symbol while the message is shown.
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control cur‐
Controls
rently in use.
Activating/deactivating the jump

1. "Radio"
Driving tips
3. "Jump to:"
Information for the selected region is broadcast
The displayed favorite is played. as soon as it is available.
If there is no message, the system changes to A new panel opens.
the My Favorites category. All favorites currently Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
being broadcast can be selected from a list.
Navigation
Symbol Meaning
Managing the favorites Information will be broadcast shortly.
Activating/deactivating the favorites Information is currently being broad‐

Favorites can be activated and deactivated cast.
globally and individually.
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
Jump.
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor‐ Automatic update
ites. About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ the channel names and positions. The update
rently in use. takes place automatically and may take several
minutes.
Deleting favorites
1. "Satellite radio" Notes
2. "Manage favorites" ▷ Reception may not be available in some sit‐
uations, such as under certain environmen‐
3. Highlight the desired favorite.
tal or topographic conditions. The satellite
4. Open "Options". radio has no influence on this.
Mobility
5. "Delete entry" ▷ The signal may not be available in tunnels or

underground garages; next to tall buildings;
Traffic Jump or near trees, mountains or other powerful
Traffic and weather information for a selected sources of radio interference.
region is broadcast every few minutes.
Reference
179
Stored stations
Radio
General information
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Calling up a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
Storing a station
The station currently selected is stored.
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. "Store station"
4. Select the desired memory location.

The list of stored stations is stored for the re‐
mote control currently in use.
The stations can also be stored on the program‐
mable memory buttons, refer to page 22.
Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
180
CD/multimedia
At a glance
Controls Starting playback
A CD/DVD is located in the CD/DVD player or in
the CD/DVD changer*.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Controls
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
Driving tips
1 Volume, on/off
2 Eject CD/DVD
3 CD/DVD drive
4 Change the entertainment source
5 Change station/track
Navigation
6 Programmable memory buttons
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player
Sound output ... CD/DVD changer*
Switching on/off CD/DVD player, rear*
When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF
button on the radio. Playable formats
▷ DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
Muting
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
When the ignition is switched on or the engine audio (video part only), DVD video*.
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the
▷ CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA,
radio.
VCD*, SVCD*.
▷ Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC*,
CD/DVD M4A*.
Playback Audio playback
Loading the CD/DVD player Selecting the track using the button
Mobility
Insert the CD/DVD with the printed side up. Press the button for the appropriate di‐
rection as often as necessary until the
Playback begins automatically.
desired track is played back.
Reading can take a few minutes with com‐
pressed audio files.
Reference
181
Selecting the track using the iDrive Displaying* information on the track
CD/multimedia
Audio CDs
If information about a track has been stored, it is

displayed automatically:
Select the desired track to begin playback. ▷ Interpret.
▷ Album track.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files
▷ Number of tracks on the CD/DVD.
Depending on the data, some letters and num‐
bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor‐ ▷ File name of track.
rectly.
Random playback
1. Select the directory if necessary.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
To change to a higher level directory: move
2. "CD/DVD"
the controller to the left.
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Random"
2. Select the desired track to begin playback.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: all

tracks within the selected directory are played in
random order.
Random mode is switched off when the audio
source is changed and the ignition is switched
off.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
182
Automatic repeat* 4. "DVD menu"
At a glance
The selected CDs/DVDs are repeated automat‐
ically.
Video playback*
Country codes
Only DVDs with the code of the home region can
Controls
be played back; also refer to the information on
the DVD.
Code Region 5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.
1 USA, Canada VCD/SVCD
Driving tips
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af‐ 1. "CD/Multimedia"
rica 2. "CD/DVD"
3 Southeast Asia 3. Select a CD with video content.
4. "Select track"
4 Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand 5. Select the desired track.
Navigation
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa Video menu
6 China To open the video menu: turn the controller dur‐
ing playback.
0 All regions
Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.
Playback Symbol Function
The video image is displayed on the Control Dis‐ Open DVD menu
play up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h; in
Starting playback
some countries, it is only displayed while the
parking brake is set or the automatic transmis‐ Pause
sion is in position P.
Stop
DVD video Next chapter
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Previous chapter
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a DVD with video content. Fast forward
Reverse
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases ev‐

Mobility
ery time the controller is pressed. To stop, start

playback.
DVD menu
1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the
Reference
video menu.
183
CD/multimedia 2. "DVD menu" 3. "Subtitles"
The DVD menu is displayed. The display de‐ 4. Select the desired language or "Do not
pends on the contents of the DVD. display subtitles".
3. To select menu items: move the controller
and press it.
To change to the video menu: turn the controller
and press it.
DVD/VCD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on
the DVD.
Selecting the language* Setting the brightness, contrast and color

The languages that are available depend on the 1. Turn the controller during playback.
DVD. 2. Open "Options".
1. Turn the controller during playback. 3. "Display settings"
2. Open "Options". 4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"
3. "Audio/language"

4. Select the desired language.
Selecting the zoom
Selecting the subtitles*
Display the video image on the entire screen.
The subtitles that are available depend on the
DVD. 1. Turn the controller during playback.
1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options".
2. Open "Options".
184
3. "Additional options" CD/DVD changer*
At a glance
4. "Zoom mode"
In the glove compartment
Controls
Selecting a track The BMW CD/DVD changer for six CDs/DVDs is
Driving tips
DVD video: located in the glove compartment.
1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is

Controls and displays
displayed.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
Navigation
4. "Select title"
5. Select the desired track.
VCD/SVCD:
1. "Select track"
2. Select the desired track.
1 Empty CD/DVD compartments
Selecting the camera angle* 2 LEDs on the CD/DVD slot
The availability of a different camera angle de‐ 3 Buttons for CD/DVD compartments
pends on the DVD and the current DVD track.
4 CD/DVD slot
1. Turn the controller during playback. 5 Load CD/DVD compartments
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options" Loading the CD/DVD compartments
4. "Viewing angle"
individually
5. Select the desired camera angle. 1. Press the button.
The LED on the first empty compartment
Opening the main menu, back
flashes.
These functions are not contained on every
2. Select another compartment if necessary.
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
Mobility
use. 3. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flash.

4. Insert a single CD or DVD in the middle.
The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically and
placed into the selected compartment.
Reference
185
CD/multimedia Sliding in CDs/DVDs To eliminate the malfunction:
Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs 1. Press one of the buttons:
on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/
▷
DVD or the CD/DVD changer could be damaged.
Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this ▷
may cause it to jam and prevent it from being
able to eject again.◀
The CD/DVD last inserted is ejected.
2. Remove the CD/DVD.
Filling all vacant CD/DVD
compartments If the LEDs stop flashing rapidly, the CD/DVD
changer is functional again.
1. Press the button for a longer period.
Audio playback*
The LEDs on the empty CD compartments
flash. The audio track of a DVD can be played back
even if video playback is not possible in the ve‐
2. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to begin hicle.
flashing and then insert each CD or DVD into
the center of the slot. Only the main film without the previews or extras
can be played back.
The CDs/DVDs are drawn in automatically
and placed into the vacant compartments. Starting playback
Sliding in CDs/DVDs A DVD is located in the DVD changer.
Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs
1. "CD/Multimedia"
on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/
DVD or the CD/DVD changer could be damaged. 2. "CD/DVD"
Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this 3. Select the desired DVD.
may cause it to jam and prevent it from being
able to eject again.◀ Selecting a chapter using the button
Press the button repeatedly until the
After they are inserted, it may take several mi‐
desired chapter is played.
nutes for the CDs/DVDs to be read in.
Removing a single CD/DVD Selecting a chapter using iDrive

1. "CD/Multimedia"
1. Press the button. 2. "CD/DVD"
2. Select the CD/DVD compartment. 3. Select the desired DVD.
The CD/DVD is partially ejected. 4. Select the desired chapter.
3. Remove the CD/DVD.
Removing all CDs/DVDs Press and hold the button.
1. Press the button for a longer period.

2. Remove the CDs/DVDs. Selecting the language*
The languages that are available depend on the
Malfunctions DVD.
If all LEDs on the CD/DVD changer flash rapidly,
the system is malfunctioning.
186
1. "CD/Multimedia" Humidity
At a glance
2. "CD/DVD" High levels of humidity can lead to condensation
on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, and
3. Select the desired DVD.
temporarily prevent playback.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Audio/language" Malfunctions involving individual CDs/
6. Select the desired language. DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
Controls
Notes DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
causes:
CD/DVD player and changer
Home-recorded CDs/DVDs
Do not remove the cover
▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
Driving tips
home-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent
officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do
data creation or recording processes, or
not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise,
poor quality or old age of the blank CD/DVD.
severe eye damage can result.◀
▷ Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with
a pen intended for this purpose.
CDs and DVDs
Use of CDs/DVDs Damage
Navigation
▷ Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs ▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and
with labels applied, as these can be‐ moisture.
come detached during playback due ▷ Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
to heat buildup and can cause irrepar‐
▷ Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
able damage to the device.
over 122 ℉/50 ℃, high humidity or direct
▷ Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard sunlight.
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play
CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs; CDs/DVDs with copy protection
otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro‐
and no longer eject.
tection feature by the manufacturer. This can
▷ Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or
Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no can only be played to a limited extent.
longer eject.◀
MACROVISION
General malfunctions
This product contains copyrighted technology
▷ CD/DVD changers and players have been that is based on multiple registered US patents
optimized for performance in vehicles. In and the intellectual property of the Macrovision
some instances they may be more sensitive Corporation and other manufacturers. The use
to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices of this copy protection must be approved by
would be.
Mobility
Macrovision. Media protected by this product -

▷ If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - may
whether it has been inserted correctly. only be used for private purposes. Copying of
this technology is prohibited.
Reference
187
DTS Digital Surround™
CD/multimedia This product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
Manufactured under license under U.S. #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
Patent Numbers: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & and other #6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend‐
patents granted and registered in the USA and ing. Some services supplied under license from
worldwide. DTS and the logo are registered Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and the DTS
logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Storing from a CD/DVD
rights reserved. 1. Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD player.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
Music collection*
4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
Storing music 5. "Store in vehicle"
General information
Music tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devices
can be stored in the music collection on a hard
disc in the vehicle and played from there.
▷ Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com‐
pressed audio format. If available, informa‐
tion on the album, such as the artist, is
stored as well.
▷ CD/DVD or USB device with compressed The music collection is displayed and the first
audio files: the entire content of the CD/DVD track of the CD/DVD is played back. During the
or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as storage process, the tracks are played in se‐
an album. The WMA, MP3, M4A*, and quence.
AAC* formats are stored. Individual tracks
Observe the following during the storage proc‐
and directories can be deleted later, Delet‐
ess:
ing a track and directory, refer to page 191.
Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not
Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player as
stored but cannot be played back.
this will interrupt the storage process. You can
Backing up music data switch to the other audio sources without inter‐
Regularly back up the music data; other‐ rupting the storage process. Tracks from the
wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard current CD/DVD that have already been stored
disc.◀ can be called up.
Music recognition technology and re‐ Interrupting storage

lated data are provided by Gracenote®.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Gracenote is the industry standard in music rec‐
ognition technology and related content deliv‐ 2. "CD/DVD"
ery. For more information, please visit
www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright © 2000-2010 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2010 Gracenote.
188
3. "Storing..." 1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
At a glance
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 134.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
Controls
6. "Import music (USB)"
4. "Cancel storing"
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.
Driving tips
Continuing the storage process
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
4. "Continue storing" Playing music
Navigation
Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin‐
ning of the track at which storage was inter‐ Music search
rupted. All tracks for which additional information has
been stored can be accessed by the music
Album information search. Tracks without additional information
During storage, information such as the name of can be called up via the corresponding album,
the artist is stored with the track, if this informa‐ refer to page 190.
tion is available in the vehicle database or on the 1. "CD/Multimedia"
CD.
To update the database, contact your service
3. "Music search"
center.
Storing from a USB device

To store music, a suitable device must be con‐
nected to the USB interface in the glove com‐
partment.
▷ Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi‐
ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 players
with a USB interface.
Mobility
▷ Unsuitable devices: USB hard drives, USB

hubs, USB memory card readers with mul‐
tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from
the Apple iPod/iPhone can be played via the
USB audio interface* in the center armrest.
Reference
189
Current playback
CD/multimedia 4. Select the desired category.
The list of tracks that was generated last by the
music search, or the album that was selected
last.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Current playback"
5. Select the desired entry.

▷ Select "A-Z search", refer to page 23,
and input the desired entry.
▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select other categories if you wish.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order. 4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, to search for all tracks by a certain Top 50
artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks The 50 most frequently played tracks.
by that artist are then displayed.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
7. "Start play"
The list of tracks is repeated automatically.
3. "Top 50"
Restarting the music search 4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
"New search"
Albums
Music search by voice* All stored albums, listed in order of their storage
Instructions for voice activation system, refer to dates.
page 24. Symbol Format
Audio CD
wheel. Compressed audio files
2. ›Music search‹
3. Open the desired category, e. g., ›Select 1. "CD/Multimedia"
artist‹.
4. Say the desired entry in the list.
3. Select the desired album.
Depending on the album, the tracks or the
To select a track directly: ›Title ...‹ subdirectories of the album are displayed.
Say the voice command and the name of the
desired track in a single command.
190
The first track is played automatically, if pos‐ 3. Highlight the desired album.
At a glance
sible. 4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename album"
Controls
4. Change directories if needed to select
tracks.
6. Select the letters individually.
Driving tips
To go up a level in the directory: move the
controller to the left. Deleting an album
An album cannot be deleted while a track from
Random playback
that album is being played.
All tracks of the selection are played back in ran‐
dom order. 1. "CD/Multimedia"
Navigation
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
3. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"
4. "Random"
Deleting a track and directory
A track cannot be deleted while it is being
played.
A directory cannot be deleted while a track from
that directory is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Highlight the directory or track.
Managing music 4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"
Albums
Free memory capacity
Renaming an album*
Display the free memory capacity in the music
Mobility
The name of the album, if available, is automat‐ collection.

ically entered when the album is stored. If the
name is not available, it can be changed later if 1. "CD/Multimedia"
desired. 2. "Music collection"
1. "CD/Multimedia" 3. Open "Options".
4. "Free memory"
Reference
191
Music collection
CD/multimedia 3. Open "Options".
Backing up the music collection
5. "Restore music from USB"
The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB device. Make sure there is enough free Deleting the music collection
memory capacity on the USB device.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Depending on the number of tracks, backing up
the music collection may take several hours.
Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur‐ 3. Open "Options".
ing a long trip. 4. "Delete music collection"
1. Starting the engine.
2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
face in the glove compartment, refer to
External devices
page 134.
At a glance
3. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Music collection" Symbol Meaning
5. Open "Options". AUX-IN port
USB audio interface*
Mobile phone audio interface*
Bluetooth audio*
AUX-IN port
At a glance
▷ For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3
player. The sound is output on the vehicle
7. "Backup music on USB"
loudspeakers.
▷ Recommendation: use medium tone and
volume settings on the audio device. The
tone depends on the quality of the audio
files.
Storing the music collection in the vehicle

When storing from the USB device, the existing
music collection in the vehicle is replaced.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
192
Connecting USB audio interface*/mobile phone
At a glance
audio interface*
At a glance
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
They can be operated via iDrive. The sound is
output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Controls
Connectors for external devices
▷ Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
The AUX-IN port is in the center armrest. iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play‐
ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that
Connect the headphone connector or line-out are supported by the USB audio interface.
connector of the device to the AUX-IN port.
Driving tips
▷ Connection via snap-in adapter, refer to
page 225, when equipped with extended
Playback connectivity of the music player in the mo‐
1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and bile phone: Apple iPhone or mobile phones.
select a track on the audio device.
Playback is only possible if no audio device
2. "CD/Multimedia" is connected to the analog AUX-IN port.
3. If necessary,"External devices" Due to the large number of different audio devi‐
Navigation
4. "AUX front" ces available on the market, it cannot be ensured
Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers. that every audio device/mobile phone is opera‐
ble on the vehicle.
Volume Ask your service center about suitable audio de‐
vices/mobile phones.
The volume of the sound output is dependent
on the audio device. If this volume differs mark‐
edly from the volume of the other audio sources, Audio files
it is advisable to adjust the volumes. Standard audio files can be played back:
▷ MP3.
Adjusting the volume
▷ WMA.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
▷ WAV (PCM).
2. If necessary,"External devices"
▷ AAC*, M4A*.
3. "AUX front"
▷ Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.
4. "Volume"
Mobility
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume

Reference
is set and press the controller.

193
Connecting
CD/multimedia Copy protection
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man‐
agement (DRM) cannot be played.
Playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
The USB audio interface is in the center armrest.
Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USB

audio interface
Connect using a flexible adapter cable.
Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the USB in‐
terface.
The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup‐ The playback starts with the first track.
ported by the USB audio interface. On the split screen*, the CD cover for the music
track might be displayed after a few seconds.
Connection of a USB device via the USB
audio interface Track search
Connect using a flexible adapter cable to protect Selection is possible via:
the USB audio interface and the USB device
▷ Playback lists.
against physical damage.
▷ Information: type of music, artist, and, if
Connect the USB device to the USB interface.
available, composer, album, track.
After connecting for the first time ▷ In addition, for USB devices: file directory
and, if available, composer.
Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or type
of music, as well as playback lists are transmit‐ Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in
ted into the vehicle. This may take some time, the Latin alphabet.
depending on the USB device and the number
of tracks. Starting the track search
During transmission, the tracks can be called up 1. "CD/Multimedia"
via the file directory. 2. "External devices"
Number of tracks
4. "Search"
Information from up to four USB devices or for
approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the ve‐ 5. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre" or
hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than "Artist".
36,000 tracks are stored, information on exist‐ All entries are displayed in a list.
ing music tracks may be deleted. ▷ Open "A-Z search" and input the de‐
sired entry. When a letter is entered, the
results are filtered using this letter as the
194
first letter. If multiple letters are entered, 1. "CD/Multimedia"
At a glance
all results that contain that sequence are
displayed.
3. Open "Options".
▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
4. "Random"
Press and hold the button.
Controls
Video playback*
At a glance
Driving tips
Video playback via snap-in adapter possible.
They can be operated via iDrive. The sound is
Not all categories need to be selected. For output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist
are to be displayed, call up that artist only. Playback
All of the tracks by that artist are then dis‐
The video image is displayed on the front Con‐
played.
trol Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/
Navigation
7. "Start play" h; in some countries, it is only displayed while
the parking brake is set or the automatic trans‐
Restarting a track search mission is in position P.
"New search"
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Playback lists
Calling up playback lists. 3. Select the symbol.
4. "Video"
1. "CD/Multimedia"
To go up a level in the directory: move the
controller to the left.
4. "Playlists"
6. Select the desired video file to begin play‐
back.
Current playback
List of tracks currently being played. Video menu
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Symbol Function
3. Select the or symbol. Next video file
4. "Current playback" Previous video file
Mobility
Double-click on an icon to play back

Random playback previous video file.
The current list of tracks is played back in ran‐
dom order.
Reference
195
Notes
CD/multimedia ▷ The device is ready for operation.
Do not expose the audio device to extreme en‐ ▷ The ignition is switched on.
vironmental conditions, such as very high tem‐ ▷ Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle, refer to
peratures; refer to the audio device operating page 217, and on the device.
instructions.
▷ Bluetooth presettings must be made on the
Depending on the configuration of the audio device, such as for a connection without
files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the confirmation or visibility; refer to the device
files may not play back correctly in each case. operating instructions.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum
Information on connection
of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth pass‐
▷ The connected audio device is supplied with key. It is only required once for pairing.
a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the
device. Therefore, do not additionally con‐ Pairing and connecting
nect the device to a socket in the vehicle;
otherwise, playback may be compromised. Pairing a device
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ To avoid becoming distracted and posing
nector into the USB interface. an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐
cle's occupants and to other road users, only
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
pair the device while the vehicle is stationary.◀
lamps to the USB audio interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives. 1. "CD/Multimedia"
▷ Do not use the USB audio interface to re‐ 2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"

charge external devices. 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
4. "Add new phone"
Bluetooth audio*
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played.
At a glance
▷ Music files on external devices such as audio
devices or mobile phones can be played
back via Bluetooth.
Use of a mobile phone as an audio source,
refer to page 217.
▷ Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
▷ The sound is output on the vehicle loud‐
speakers. 5. Perform additional steps on the device, refer
▷ The volume of the sound output is depend‐ to the device operating instructions: for in‐
ent on the device. If necessary, adjust the stance, search for or connect the Bluetooth
volume on the device. device or a new device.
▷ Up to four external devices can be paired The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
with the vehicle. on the device display.
6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
Requirements the device display.
▷ The device is suitable. Details can be found You are prompted by the iDrive or device to
at www.bmw.com/bluetooth. enter the same Bluetooth passkey.
196
7. Enter the passkey and confirm. 4. Select the desired device from the list of
At a glance
paired devices.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Configure phone"
7. Activate "Audio".
8. "OK"
Controls
Connecting the device
1. "CD/Multimedia"
8. Select the desired functions with which the 2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
device is to be connected, for instance 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
"Audio". 4. Select the desired device from the list of
Driving tips
9. "OK" paired devices.
Navigation
If pairing was successful, the device is displayed White symbol : the device is active as an audio
as connected. source.
White symbol : the device is active as an audio
source. Playback
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer
General information
to page 198.
▷ The display of music track information de‐
Connecting a specific device pends on the device.
A device that has already been paired can be ▷ Operation can takes place on the device or
connected as an active audio source. iDrive.
Connecting is not possible when data is ex‐ ▷ Playback is interrupted when data is ex‐
changed via a mobile phone connected via Blue‐ changed via a mobile phone connected via
tooth. Bluetooth.
Requirements Starting playback

If necessary, activate the audio connection of 1. Connect the device.
Mobility
the desired device from the list of paired devi‐ 2. "CD/Multimedia"

ces. 3. "External devices"
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
Reference
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
197
CD/multimedia 4. Select the symbol. 5. Open "Options".
6. "Remove phone from list"
5. Select the desired track from the list, if nec‐

essary.
What to do if...
Playback menu* Information on suitable devices can be found at
Depending on the particular device, some of the www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
functions may not be available. Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 216.
Symbol Function The device is not supported by the vehicle.
Next track ▷ Perform a software update*, refer to

page 199, if needed.
Fast forward: press and hold the
symbol. The device could not be paired or connected.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device
Previous music track and the vehicle match? Enter the same
Reverse: press and hold the symbol. passkey on the device and via iDrive.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
Disconnecting the audio connection the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
1. "CD/Multimedia" ▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)" to the device or vehicle? Delete connections
with other devices if necessary.
3. Highlight the desired device.
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
4. Open "Options".
does it have only a limited remaining battery
5. "Configure phone" life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-
6. "Audio" in adapter or via a charging cable.
7. "OK" ▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐
ble that only one device can be connected
Unpairing a device to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device
1. "CD/Multimedia" from the vehicle and pair and connect only
one device.
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
▷ The device no longer reacts? Switch the de‐
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio". vice off and on again.
4. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired. ▷ Repeat the pairing procedure.
Music cannot be played back.
▷ Start the program for playing back music
data on the device and select a track on the
device if necessary.
198
▷ Switch the radio on and off again. 1. Store the file for the software-update in the
At a glance
Music files can only be played back softly. main director of a USB flash drive.
▷ Adjust the volume settings on the device. 2. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB in‐
Playback is disturbed when buttons are pressed terface of the USB audio interface in the
or by other messages on the device. center armrest. An update via the USB in‐
terface in the glove compartment is not pos‐
▷ Switch off the button tones and other signal
sible.
tones on the device.
3. "Settings"
Controls
Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or
traffic bulletin and is not resumed automatically. 4. "Software update"
▷ Switch the radio on and off again. 5. "Update software"
Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is
connected both via Bluetooth Audio and via the
Driving tips
extended connectivity of the music player in the
mobile phone*.
▷ Disconnect one of the two connections; for
example, disconnect the audio connection,
refer to page 198, and restart playback.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, please
Navigation
contact the hotline or service center. 6. If necessary. "USB".
7. "Start update"
Software Update* 8. "OK"
The vehicle supports various external devices All listed software updates are installed.
depending on the current software version. With
a software update, the vehicle can support new Restoring the previous version
cell phones or new external device, for example.
If it should become necessary, the software ver‐
▷ USB. sion prior to the last software update can be re‐
Software updates and related current infor‐ stored.
mation is available at www.bmw.com/up‐ The previous version can only be restored when
date. the vehicle is stationary.
Displaying the current version 1. "Settings"

The currently installed software is displayed. 2. "Software update"
3. "Restore previous version"
1. "Settings"
4. "OK" Double-click.
2. "Software update"
All listed software updates are removed.
3. "Show current version"
Select desired version* to display additional in‐ Note
Mobility
formation*.
While the software is being updated or a previ‐
ous version is being restored, BMW Assist*, Of‐
Updating software via USB*
fice functions*, and the connected devices are
The software may only be updated when the ve‐ temporarily unavailable. Wait several minutes
hicle is stationary. for the functions to become available again.
Reference
199
DVD system in rear*
DVD system in rear
General information Controls

With the DVD system in the rear you can play
CDs and DVDs with audio, video and image data.
The DVD system can also play data from at‐
tached external audio and video devices. Audio
output is possible both via headphones and via
the vehicle speakers.
You can control the DVD system using the but‐
tons on the CD-/DVD player or using the remote
control.
Some functions are operated using the remote
control.
Enabling DVD system

The DVD system can be enabled via iDrive.
1. "Settings"
2. "Allow rear control"
3. "Rear DVD system active" 1 Display screen
2 Infrared interface for headphones
3 CD/DVD player
4 Headphone connection: jack plug
5 12 V sockets 131
Folding in display screen

When using the ski bag or when transporting
bulky pieces of luggage, the display screen
should be folded in, as otherwise it may be dam‐
aged.
Note when the display screen is folded
down
When the screen is folded down, do not open
the lid of the center armrest or rest your arm on
the screen; otherwise, you may damage the
screen.◀
200
Connecting headphones
At a glance
You can connect headphones with a jack plug or
operate them using the infrared interface.
To enable optimal use of the infrared interface,
use infrared headphones that comply with the
IEC 61603-2 standard.
Compatible infrared headphones and informa‐
Controls
tion about supported headphones are available
1. Turn the display screen, arrow 1 at your service center.
The display screen switches off. When using infrared headphones, it is important
2. Fold down the display screen, arrow 2. not to interrupt the infrared connection between
the headphones and the infrared interface. This
The display screen is folded out in the reverse
Driving tips
means that no obstacle should come between
order.
the two and that the cover of the infrared inter‐
face should not be covered or scratched. Un‐
favorable lighting conditions such as glare from
CD/DVD player outside can interfere with reception.
Controls
Remote control
Navigation
1 Press: switch the DVD system on/off
Turn: left headphone volume and vehicle 1 Menu navigation
volume
2 Volume for headphones with jack plug
2 Eject CD/DVD
3 Changing track or chapter during CD-, DVD-
3 Beginning of track or AUX playback, fast forward/rewind
Stop 4 Headphones right/left
Playback, pause, freeze frame 5 Open start menu for DVD system
Next track
Menu navigation
4 CD/DVD slot
You can use the thumbwheel and buttons 1 to
Mobility
5 Connectors for external device: cinch sock‐ navigate through the menus.
ets
▷ Turn the thumbwheel: select a menu item.
6 Press: switch the DVD system on/off
▷ Press the arrow buttons: change between
Turn: right headphone volume and vehicle fields.
volume
▷ Press the button: activate the menu item.
Reference
201
Changing batteries
DVD system in rear 4. "Volume"
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and press the controller.
Switching DVD system on/off

Press the button on the CD-/DVD player or un‐
der the desired screen.
The DVD system switches on automatically
when a CD or DVD is inserted.
1. Press the detent and remove the cover.
2. Change the batteries. The type and instal‐
lation position are marked on the bottom of Playing CD/DVD
the battery compartment.
Use the following menu items to access data
3. Close the cover.
from a CD/DVD:
Take the used battery to a recycling cen‐
▷ Video data via "DVD"
ter or to your service center.
▷ Audio data via "CD"
▷ Images "Photo"
Setting the language of the

DVD system
1. Select a CD/DVD track.
3. Select "Tone".
5. Switch to the top window.
6. Select "Language".
7. Press the button. Playing videos from CDs/
8. Select the desired language. DVDs
Country codes of DVDs
Your DVD player only plays DVDs with the cod‐
Sound output via speakers ing of your home region, e.g., Europe=2. The
country codes supported by your DVD are con‐
In addition to the headphones, you can also play tained in the information on your DVD.
the sound via the vehicle speakers.
An overview of the coding zones:
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Code Region
3. "AUX rear" 1 USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af‐

rica
202
Code Region stances. In this case, try to make the selection
At a glance
using the DVD-specific menu.
3 Southeast Asia
1. Press the button on the remote control
4 Australia, Central and South America, during playback.
New Zealand
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
6 China
Controls
DVDs with the code 0 can be played on all devi‐
ces.
Starting playback
Driving tips
1. Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the la‐ 2. Press the buttons on the remote control
beled side facing upward. The CD/DVD is or turn the thumbwheel to select the desired
automatically pulled in. function.
▷ Playback begins automatically after a
few seconds.
▷ Otherwise: select "DVD". Symbol Function
Navigation
2. If the DVD control or the DVD-specific menu
Exit DVD control
is displayed when a DVD is inserted, use the
remote control buttons for menu navigation "SET" Settings for playing DVDs.
to select the desired option.
Start playback.
Or:
Stop playback.
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
You can control the playback with the buttons Activate and deactivate freeze
on the CD/DVD player or the DVD control. frame.
Video CDs (VCDs) and Super Video CDs Skip a chapter.
(SVCDs) can only be played if they do not have
a DVD-specific menu. Fast forward/reverse.
"Menu" Open the DVD-specific menu.

Eject CD/DVD
Press the button on the CD/DVD player. The
The DVD control disappears again after a short
DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
time if you have not selected a function.
DVD control Or:
With the DVD control, you can select the title and Press the button on the remote control to
chapter, open the DVD-specific menu, and op‐ exit the DVD control.
Mobility
erate functions such as Language, Fast forward

and Reverse or Freeze frame.
A DVD can briefly deactivate functions of the
DVD control, under certain circumstances while
the entire DVD is being played. It is not possible
to operate the DVD control under these circum‐
Reference
203
Fast forward/reverse Freeze frame
DVD system in rear
Forward/reverse with DVD control during playback.
during playback.
4. Press the button several times to in‐
crease the fast forward/reverse speed.
The DVD playback will be distorted.
To cancel fast forward/reverse:
1. Select the symbol. 2. Select the symbol.

2. Press the button. 3. Press the button.
Or: To continue playback:
Press the button on the CD/DVD player. The 1. Select the or symbol.
DVD will start play at the point selected. 2. Press the button.
As an alternative, you can also stop and continue
Forward/reverse with remote control
playback with the button on the CD/DVD
Press and hold the button until you reach player.
the desired point.
Or: Making settings for DVD
1. During playback, turn the thumbwheel. Fast 1. Press the button during playback.
forward/reverse is interrupted.
2. Continue to turn the thumbwheel. The
speed is increased.
3. Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
Fast forward/reverse is interrupted. The
DVD will start play at the point selected.
Skipping chapter
You can change to the next or previous chapter
during playback. 2. Make the settings with the remote control:
▷ "Video settings":
during playback. ▷ "Brightness", "Color", and "Contrast"
on the screen.
▷ After switching to the top window, you
3. Press the button repeatedly, continuing
can change other settings.
until you reach the desired chapter.
"Language": the system language of the
Or:
DVD system
Press the button on the left or right on the "Display": background brightness of the
remote control repeatedly until you reach the screen.
desired chapter.
204
▷ "Tone": On some DVDs, you can use "Main menu"
At a glance
▷ "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": sepa‐ and "Title" to access additional menus in
rately adjustable for the left and right which you can select music scenes, for ex‐
headphones and the infrared head‐ ample.
phones. To make a selection:
▷ "Reset": the settings are reset to the de‐ 1. Select the symbol.
fault values.
2. Press the button until the desired func‐
▷ "DVD format":
Controls
tion is selected.
▷ "Standard"
3. Select the arrow.
▷ "Zoom": full-screen playback.
▷ "Language": language of the DVD playback.
To return to the start menu:
The language advances one setting each
Driving tips
time the menu item is selected. 1. Select the arrow.
▷ "Subtitles": language of the subtitles or turn 2. Press the button.
off the subtitles.
You can also select language, subtitles, camera
▷ "Title": select individual tracks on the DVD. angle, or title in the DVD-specific menu. Consult
▷ "Angle of view": camera angle. the information accompanying your DVD.
Information or symbols that appear during
Compressed video files
Navigation
the playback of a film generally point out dif‐
ferent camera angles. These are usually only
briefly available. Playback
▷ "Menu": open the DVD-specific menu.
▷ "Return": exit the menu, or:
Press the buttons on the remote con‐
trol.
Many DVDs offer dialogs and subtitles in various
languages or scene descriptions for the hearing
impaired. These functions are stored on the
DVD.
With some DVDs, it is only possible to select
language, subtitles, camera angle, or title by us‐ 2. Press the button.
ing the DVD-specific menu. Consult the infor‐
3. Select a track.
mation accompanying your DVD.
Opening the DVD-specific menu

Additional functions may be available on DVDs.
It is thus possible, for example, to select from
Mobility
among several possible actions or to access in‐

formation about the film.

during playback.
2. Select "Menu". 4. Press the button.
Reference
205
DVD system in rear 5. Select "Play". To play back audio tracks from a DVD, refer to
6. Press the button. Compressed audio files, refer to page 207.
To change the directory: To start playback if a CD is already in the drive:
1. Select the directory. 1. Open the start menu with the remote con‐
trol.
2. Select "CD".
Playback functions
1. Select a track. As an alternative, you can also control the play‐
2. Press the button. back with the buttons on the CD/DVD player.
3. Select a menu item: To eject CD/DVD:
▷ "Pause": stop and continue playback. Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
▷ "Repeat track": repeat the selected

Selecting a track
track.
▷ "Repeat directory": repeat the tracks in Buttons on CD/DVD player
the current directory.
Press the button for the corresponding
4. Press the button. direction repeatedly until you reach the desired
track.
Playback begins at the start of the track.
Playing audio tracks from CD/
DVD Using the remote control
Press the button for the corresponding
Starting playback direction repeatedly or turn the thumbwheel un‐
Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the labeled til you reach the desired track.
side facing upward. The CD/DVD is automati‐
Playback begins at the start of the track.
cally pulled in.
▷ Playback begins automatically after a few
seconds.
▷ Otherwise: select "CD".
Press the button.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files, refer to
page 207, can take approx. 1 minute to read,
depending on their directory structure.
206
Settings and playback functions for Compressed audio files
At a glance
audio CDs
1. Select "SET". Playback
2. Press the button. 1. Select the directory if necessary.
Controls
Driving tips
3. Make the settings with the remote control: 2. Press the button.
▷ "Tone": 3. Select a track.
▷ "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": sepa‐

rately adjustable for the left and right
headphones and the infrared head‐
phones.
Navigation
▷ "Reset": the settings are reset to the de‐
fault values.
▷ "Pause": stop and continue playback.
▷ "Random": the CD tracks are played back
once in random sequence.
▷ "Scan": brief samples of all CD tracks are
5. Select "Play".
automatically played one after another.
▷ "Repeat": repeat the current track. Select
again to end. To change the directory:
To exit from the menu: 1. Select the directory.
Press the buttons on the remote control.
Buttons on the CD/DVD player:
Press and hold the button for the cor‐
responding direction.
Mobility
Settings and playback functions for

compressed audio files
1. Select a track.
Reference
207
DVD system in rear 2. Press the button. 2. Select "Overview".
3. Make the settings with the remote control:
▷ "Tone":
▷ "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": sepa‐
rately adjustable for the left and right
phones.
▷ "Reset": the settings are reset to the de‐
fault values.
▷ "Pause": stop and continue playback.
▷ "Scan directory": briefly sample the tracks
It may take some time until the overview is com‐
in the current directory.
pletely displayed.
▷ "Scan all": briefly sample all tracks.
If a symbol appears instead of an image, the im‐
▷ "Random directory": play the tracks in the age cannot be displayed in the overview.
current directory in a random sequence.
▷ "Random all": play all tracks in a random se‐ Displaying images
quence. 1. Use the buttons or the thumbwheel of the
▷ "Repeat track": repeat the selected track. remote control to select an image.
▷ "Repeat directory": repeat the tracks in the 2. Press the button.
current directory.
▷ "Details": display any stored information on
the current track.
Press the buttons on the remote control.
Displaying images from CD/

DVD
3. Displaying images:
1. Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the la‐ ▷ Scroll using the menu navigation but‐
beled side facing upward. The CD/DVD is tons of the remote control.
automatically pulled in.
▷ Display the slide show: turn the thumb‐
2. Open the start menu with the remote con‐ wheel to set the display duration of the
trol. images.
3. Select "Photo". Stop the slide show: select "Stop".
Displaying overview
1. Select the subdirectory if necessary.
208
Adjusting Information on CD/DVD
At a glance
1. Press the button. player
Safety notes
Do not remove the cover
The BMW CD/DVD player is a Class 1 laser
product. Do not operate if the cover is damaged;
Controls
otherwise, severe eye damage can result.◀
Suitable media
2. Select a menu item: Use of CDs/DVDs

▷ Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Driving tips
Symbol Function with labels applied, as these can be‐
come detached during playback due
Return to the photo menu. to heat buildup and can cause irrepar‐
"SET" Adjust the "Display". able damage to the device.
"Language": after switching to ▷ Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
the top window, the system lan‐ diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play
CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs;
Navigation
guage can be changed.
otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam
Start the slide show. and no longer eject.
Display the first/last image of the ▷ Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD
current directory. Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no
longer eject.◀
Rotate the image by 90°.
The CD/DVD player can play the following me‐
"Overview" Change to the image overview. dia:
▷ Video DVD.
Ending display ▷ CD-DA (audio CD).
1. Press the button. ▷ CDs/DVDs with compressed image data.
2. Select the symbol. ▷ CDs/DVDs with compressed audio data.
3. Press the button. ▷ CDs/DVDs with compressed video data.
The DVD player does not support DVD audio.
Eject CD/DVD However, many audio DVDs available in stores
Press the button on the CD/DVD player. also contain a video track in the DVD Video for‐
mat in addition to the audio track. These DVDs
can be played back by the DVD player. Refer to
the information on your DVD to determine
Mobility
whether your audio DVD contains an additional

video track. Depending on the authoring used, it
is possible that not all functions are available
during playback.
Dual-sided DVDs available from retail suppliers
are coated on both sides and bear no markings.
Reference
This means both sides are information carriers.

209
Humidity
DVD system in rear To play the information on the other side, turn
over the DVD. High levels of humidity can lead to condensation
on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, and
Supported formats temporarily prevent playback.
Depending on the compression method used,
not all files of the specified formats can be Malfunctions involving individual CDs/
opened. DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
Images DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
▷ JPEG/JPG. causes.
With very large image files, it can take longer for
the images to be displayed. Copied or self-recorded CDs/DVDs
▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with
Compressed audio files home-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent
▷ MP3. data creation or recording processes, or
poor quality or old age of the blank CD/DVD.
▷ WMA.
▷ Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with
▷ OGG.
a pen intended for this purpose.
▷ AAC.
Damaged CDs/DVDs
Compressed video files ▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and
▷ SVCD. moisture.
▷ MPEG1. ▷ Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
▷ MPEG2. ▷ Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
▷ MPEG4/DivX. over 122 ℉/50 ℃, high humidity or direct
sunlight.
Digital Rights Management (DRM)
In some cases, it may not be possible to play CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs with integrated Digital Rights Man‐ CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro‐
agement (DRM). tection feature by the manufacturer. As a result,
some CDs/DVDs cannot be played, can only be
General malfunctions played to a limited degree, or cause the system
▷ CD/DVD changers and players have been to switch off. In this case, wait a short while and
optimized for performance in vehicles. In then switch the system back on again. Then re‐
some instances they may be more sensitive move the CD/DVD from the drive.
to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices
would be. CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files
▷ If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check If the language set for the CD/DVD player does
whether it has been inserted correctly. not match the language of the music track, the
music tracks may be displayed incorrectly.
Foreign bodies/liquids in the CD/DVD slot
Make sure that no foreign objects or liq‐
uids get into the CD/DVD slot; otherwise, the
CD/DVD player will be damaged.◀
210
External device Settings for external devices
At a glance
1. Press the button during playback.
Connecting
Controls
2. Make the settings with the remote control:
1 Connections for audio/video cables. Watch
▷ "Video settings":
Driving tips
the colors of the sockets when connecting.
▷ "Brightness", "Color", and "Contrast" of
Yellow socket: video
the video playback.
White socket: audio on left
▷ "NTSC color": the color can be adjusted
Red socket: audio on right on an external device with the NTSC
2 Power supply for external device: socket standard.
with removable cap. ▷ "Standard": the DVD system can be
Navigation
adapted to external devices with differ‐
Playback ent TV standards; to do so, consult the
1. Switch on the external device and start the operating manual of the external device.
playback. ▷ "Reset": The settings are reset to the
2. Open the start menu with the remote con‐ default values.
trol. ▷ "Tone":
3. Select "AUX". ▷ "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": sepa‐
4. Press the button. rately adjustable for the left and right
phones.
▷ "Reset": your settings are reset.
▷ After switching to the top window, you
can change other settings.
"Audio": adjust the volume of the exter‐
nal device to the volume of the CD/DVD
player.
"Language": the system language of the
For devices without a video signal, for instance DVD system.
MP3 players, "No video signal" appears on the
Mobility
"Display": background brightness of the

display. The sound is nevertheless played. screen.
▷ "Video Format":
▷ "Standard"
▷ "Zoom": full-screen playback.
Reference
211
DVD system in rear Press the buttons on the remote control.
212
213
Communication
All of the options available to you for mobile
communication with family, friends, business
partners, and service providers are described in
this chapter.

Telephone*
Telephone
At a glance ported by the mobile phone preparation pack‐

age can be obtained at www.bmwusa.com/blue‐
The concept tooth.
Mobile phones or other external devices such as
Displaying the vehicle identification
audio players can be connected to the vehicle
number and software part number
via Bluetooth.
The vehicle identification number and software
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐
part number are needed to determine which mo‐
tooth® SIG, Inc.
bile phones are supported by the mobile phone
After these devices are paired once, they are preparation package. The software version of
recognized automatically when the ignition is the mobile phone may also be required.
switched on as soon as they are in the vehicle
and can then be operated via iDrive, the buttons 1. "Telephone"
on the steering wheel, and via voice activation*. 2. Open "Options".
Depending on their functionality, external devi‐ 3. "Bluetooth® info"
ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone 4. "Display system information"
or as an audio source. The telephone functions
These approved mobile phones with a certain
are described in the following. Operating the au‐
software version, support the vehicle functions
dio functions, refer to page 196.
described below.
Up to four external devices can be paired.
Malfunctions may occur with other mobile
Certain functions may need to be enabled by the phones or software versions.
mobile phone provider or service provider.
Do not operate a mobile phone that is connected
Using the mobile phone while driving to the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad, as
Make entries only when traffic and road this may lead to a malfunction.
conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone A software update, refer to page 199, can be
in your hand while you are driving; use the performed if necessary.
hands-free system instead. If you do not ob‐
serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve‐
hicle occupants and other road users.◀ Pairing/unpairing the mobile
phone
Snap-in adapter*
The snap-in adapter is used to: General information
▷ Hold the mobile phone. The following functions are available:
▷ Recharge the battery. ▷ Use of a mobile phone as a telephone.
▷ Connect the mobile phone to an outside an‐ ▷ Use of a mobile phone as an additional tele‐
tenna of the vehicle. phone.
This provides for better network reception ▷ Use of a mobile phone as an audio source.
and consistent sound quality. ▷ Use of an audio device as an audio source,
refer to page 196.
Approved mobile phones
Details on which mobile phones and external
devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup‐
216
Requirements 3. Open "Options".
At a glance
▷ The mobile phone is suitable, refer to 4. Select the desired additional function.
page 216. ▷ "Additional telephone"
▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation. ▷ "Office"
▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on ▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
the mobile phone.
An additional function cannot be assigned to a
▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be made telephone while it is deactivated.
Controls
on the mobile phone, e.g., for a connection
without confirmation or visibility, refer to the Additional telephone*
mobile phone operating instructions.
A mobile phone can be used as an additional
▷ Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary. telephone.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum The additional telephone can be used to accept
Driving tips
of 16 digits was defined as the Bluetooth incoming calls, refer to page 220. While a call is
passkey. It is only required once for pairing. active on the additional telephone, received
▷ The ignition is switched on. calls are displayed on the Control Display.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth Audio source

Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply A mobile phone can be used as an audio source.
with all safety guidelines and regulations.
Navigation
Pairing and connecting a device
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options". Pairing a device
3. "Bluetooth®" To avoid becoming distracted and posing

an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐
cle's occupants and to other road users, only
pair the device while the vehicle is stationary.◀
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played.
Additional functions
Activating/deactivating the additional

functions
Activate the functions before pairing to be able
to use them in the vehicle. Information on suit‐
Mobility
able mobile phones, refer to page 216, that sup‐

port this function.
4. To perform additional steps on the mobile
1. "Telephone"
phone, refer to the mobile phone operating
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" instructions: for instance, search for or con‐
nect the Bluetooth device or a new device.
Reference
217
Telephone The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears ▷ The phone book entries of the telephone
on the mobile phone display. stored on the SIM card* or mobile phone are
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on transmitted to the vehicle after detection,
the mobile phone display. depending on the mobile phone.
You are prompted by the iDrive or mobile ▷ Four devices can be paired.
phone to enter the same Bluetooth passkey. ▷ Specific settings may be necessary in some
6. Enter the passkey and confirm. mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se‐
cure connection; refer to the mobile phone
operating instructions.
Connecting a specific device

If more than one device is detected by the vehi‐
cle, the device at the top of the list is connected.
A different device can be connected by select‐
ing it.
1. "Telephone"
7. Select the functions for which the mobile 2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
phone is to be used. 3. Select the device that is to be connected.
8. "OK"
If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
The functions supported by the mobile phone
and audio device are displayed as symbols when
paired.
White symbol: the function is active.
Gray symbol: the function is inactive.
Symbol Function The functions that were assigned to the device

before unpairing are assigned to the device
Telephone.
when it is reconnected. If the device is already
Additional telephone. connected, these functions are deactivated.
Audio source.
Configuring the devices
Additional functions can be activated or deacti‐
Four devices can be paired with the vehicle at vated for paired and connected devices.
once. Three devices can be connected with the
vehicle at once. 1. "Telephone"
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer 2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
to page 219. 3. Highlight the device to be configured.
4. Open "Options".
Following the initial pairing
5. "Configure phone"
▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short period of time 6. At least one function must be selected.
when the engine is running or the ignition is ▷ "Telephone"
switched on. ▷ "Additional telephone"
218
▷ "Audio" ▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
At a glance
7. "OK" the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
If a function has already been assigned to an‐ ▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
other connected device, the function is deacti‐ to the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con‐
vated in that device and the device is unpaired nections with other devices if necessary.
when the function is assigned to a new device. ▷ Is the audio connection activated? Deacti‐
vate the audio connection.
Swapping the telephone and additional ▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
Controls
telephone does it have only a limited remaining battery
The function of the telephone and additional tel‐ life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-
ephone can be swapped automatically. in adapter* or via the charging cable.
1. "Telephone" ▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐

ble that only one device can be connected
Driving tips
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device
3. "Swap phone/addit. phone" from the vehicle and pair and connect only
one device.
Unpairing a device ▷ The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch
1. "Telephone" the mobile phone off and on again. Repeat
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" the pairing procedure.
Navigation
3. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired. The telephone functions are not available.
4. Open "Options". ▷ Is the mobile phone paired as an additional
5. "Remove phone from list" telephone and is the additional telephone
function deactivated? Activate the function.
▷ Is an outgoing call not possible? Connect
the mobile phone as a telephone.
No phone book entries or only some phone book
entries are displayed, or they are incomplete.
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card*
are transmitted.
What to do if... ▷ It may not be possible to display phone book
Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to entries with special characters.
page 216.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
The mobile phone could not be paired or con‐ stored is too high.
nected.
▷ Is the data volume of the contact too large,
▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on e. g., due to stored information such as
Mobility
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth on notes? Reduce the data volume of the con‐
the vehicle and on the mobile phone. tact.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile ▷ Is the mobile phone connected as an audio
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the source or additional telephone? The mobile
same passkey on the mobile phone and via phone must be connected as a telephone.
iDrive.
Reference
The phone connection quality is poor.
219
Incoming call
Telephone ▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
on the mobile phone. Receiving calls
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in If the number of the caller is stored in the phone
adapter* or place it in the area of the center book and is transmitted by the network, the
console. name of the contact is displayed. Otherwise,
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and only the phone number is displayed.
loudspeakers separately. If more than one phone number is assigned to a
If all points in this list have been checked and the contact, only the name of the contact is dis‐
required function is still not available, please played.
contact the hotline or service center. For calls on the additional telephone, the num‐
ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the
network.
Controls An incoming call to the additional telephone is
automatically rejected if there is an active call on
Adjusting the volume the other telephone.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel.
or
"Accept"
Turn the knob until the desired volume is se‐

lected. The setting is stored for the remote con‐
The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of

the microphone on the telephone and the vol‐
ume of the called party. Depending on the mo‐
bile phone, the volumes may need to be ad‐
justed. The settings can only be created during Rejecting a call
a call and must be adjusted separately for each
"Reject"
telephone. The settings are deleted when the
telephone is unpaired.
Ending a call
1. "Settings" Press the button on the steering wheel.
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings" or
4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone" or 1. "Telephone"
"Loudspeak." 2. "Active calls"
220
3. "End call" The call is accepted and the existing call is put
At a glance
on hold.
Establishing a second call

Establish an additional call during an active call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
Controls
3. "Hold"
The existing call is put on hold.
Entering a phone number
Dialing a number
Driving tips
1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
Navigation
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list.
"Return"
The call on hold is resumed.
Switching between two calls, hold call
The active call is displayed in color.
The call on hold is displayed in gray.
The phone number can also be entered by voice. "Swap calls"
The call on hold is resumed.
Calls with multiple participants
General information Establishing a conference call

You can switch between calls or connect two Two calls can be connected to a single tele‐
calls to a single conference call. These functions phone conference call.
must be supported by the mobile phone and 1. Establish two calls.
service provider.
2. "Conference call"
Accepting a call while speaking to When terminating a conference call, both calls
another party are ended. If one call is terminated by another
Mobility
party, the other call can be continued.

This function might have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone must be
Switching the microphone to mute
adjusted accordingly.
When a call is active, the microphone can be
If a second call comes in during an ongoing call,
muted.
a call waiting signal is sounded.
1. "Telephone"
Reference
"Accept"
221
Calling a contact
Telephone 2. "Active calls"
3. "Microphone mute"
Symbol Meaning
A microphone that has been switched to mute
is automatically reactivated: Contact with one stored phone num‐
▷ When a new connection is established. ber.
▷ When switching between call parties. Contact with more than one stored
phone number.
DTMF suffix dialing
Call not possible; mobile phone with‐
DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac‐
out reception or network, or Service
cess to network services or for controlling devi‐
Request* is active.
ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an answer‐
ing machine. The DTMF code is needed for this
purpose. For contacts with one stored phone number: se‐
lect the required contact. The connection is be‐
1. "Telephone" ing established.
2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial For contacts with more than one stored phone
number". number: select the required contact and the
3. "Keypad dialing" phone number. The connection is being estab‐
4. Enter the DTMF code via iDrive. lished.
Phone book Editing a contact

Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a
Displays contact is changed, the changes are not stored
The phone book accesses the contacts and on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
shows all contacts for which a phone number stored in the vehicle.
has been stored. The entries can be selected to 1. Highlight the contact.
make a call.
2. Open "Options".
1. "Telephone" 3. "Edit entry"
2. "Phone book" The contact can be edited.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts. Redialing
General information
The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone
is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the
mobile phone. Possibly only those numbers are
displayed that were dialed from the vehicle.
The 20 phone numbers dialed last are displayed.
The sorting order of the phone numbers de‐
pends on the particular mobile phone.
Dialing the number via the iDrive

1. "Telephone"
222
2. "Redial" The connection is established.
At a glance
Saving an entry in the contacts
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
Controls
4. Select "New phone number" or contact.
5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile", or "Other"
3. Select the desired entry and the phone num‐
ber if necessary. 6. Complete the entries if necessary.
The connection is established. 7. If necessary, "Store contact in vehicle".
Driving tips
Saving an entry in the contacts Hands-free system
General information
2. Open "Options".
Calls that are being made on the hands-free
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing system can be continued on the mobile phone
contact" and vice versa.
Navigation
4. Select "New phone number" or contact.
5. Select the type of number: "Home", From the mobile phone to the hands-
"Business", "Mobile", or "Other" free system
6. Complete the entries if necessary. Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth
range of the vehicle can be continued on the
7. If necessary, "Store contact in vehicle".
hands-free system with the ignition switched
on.
Received calls
Depending on the mobile phone, the system au‐
Displaying calls tomatically switches to the hands-free system.
The 20 calls that were last received are dis‐ If the system does not switch over automatically,
played. follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐
play; refer also to the mobile phone operating
1. "Telephone" instructions.
2. "Received calls"
From the hands-free system to the
mobile phone
Calls that are made on the hands-free system
can in some cases be continued on the mobile
phone; this depends on the mobile phone.
Mobility
Follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐

play; refer also to the mobile phone operating
instructions.
Calling a number from the list

Reference
Selecting an entry.
223
Voice operation*
Telephone ›Dial name‹ or ›Name‹
Vehicles equipped with the voice activation sys‐ Example: dialing a phone number
tem: operation, refer to page 24.
Vehicles not equipped with the voice activation 1. Briefly press the button on the
system: depending on the equipment, the mo‐ steering wheel.
bile phone can be voice operated as described 2. ›Dial number‹
below.
The system says: »Please say the number«.
The list of short commands in the operating
3. For instance, ›123 456 790‹
manual does not apply to this type of voice op‐
eration. The system says: »123 456 790. Continue?
«.
The concept 4. ›Dial‹
▷ The mobile phone can be operated without The system says: »Dialing number«.
taking your hands from the steering wheel.
▷ In many cases, the entries are accompanied Calling
by announcements or questions.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions for voice operation.
Dialing a phone number
1. ›Dial number‹
Using voice activation 2. Say the phone number.
3. ›Dial‹
Activating the voice activation system
Correcting the phone number
1. Briefly press the button on the
The sequence of digits can be deleted after the
steering wheel.
system has repeated the digits.
2. Say the command.
›Correct number‹
Terminating the voice activation The command can be repeated as often as nec‐
system essary.
Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹. Deleting a phone number
›Delete‹
Possible commands All digits entered up to that point are deleted.
Having possible commands read aloud Redialing

Briefly press the button on the steering ›Redial‹
wheel. ›Help‹.
Voice phone book*
Possible commands are announced.
Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it
The digits from zero to nine are recognized. The may be necessary to create your own voice
digits can be spoken separately or combined in phone book.
a sequence to accelerate the entry.
The entries must be entered using voice activa‐
tion and are separate from the memory in the
Using alternative commands
mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.
The system often recognizes a number of dif‐
ferent commands to run a function; for instance:
224
Saving an entry ▷ The volume remains constant even if the
At a glance
1. ›Save name‹ volume of other audio sources is changed.
2. Say the name. Do not exceed the speaking ▷ The volume is stored for the remote control
duration of approx. 2 seconds. currently in use.
3. Say the phone number after being prompted
Notes
to do so by the system.
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
4. ›Save‹
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
Controls
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
Deleting an entry unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel‐
1. ›Delete name‹ ephone connection.
2. Say the name after being prompted to do so. Instead, use the SOS button*, refer to
3. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹. page 280, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Driving tips
Deleting all entries Environmental conditions
1. ›Delete phone book‹ ▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
The dialog for deleting the phone book is smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
opened. sis, and speed.
2. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹. ▷ Always say commands in the language of
the system. The language for the mobile
Navigation
3. Confirm the query again with ›Yes‹. phone voice operation is preset and cannot
be changed in the Control Display.
Reading and selecting entries
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
1. ›Read phone book‹ roof* closed to prevent noise interference.
The dialog for reading the phone book is
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
opened. while speaking.
2. Say ›Dial number‹ when the desired entry is
read.
Snap-in adapter*
Selecting an entry
1. ›Dial name‹ Installation position
2. Say the name after being prompted to do so. In the center armrest.
3. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹.
Inserting/removing the snap-in adapter
Adjusting the volume 1. Press button 1 and remove the cover.
Mobility
Reference
Turn the knob during an announcement.
225
Removing the mobile phone
Telephone 2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar‐
row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en‐
gages.
Press the button and remove the mobile phone.
To remove the snap-in adapter: press button 1.
Inserting the mobile phone
1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove

the protective cap from the antenna con‐
nector and from the USB connection of the
mobile phone.
2. With the buttons facing up, slide the mobile
phone up toward the electrical contacts and
press it down until it engages.
226
Office*
At a glance
At a glance 1. "Office"
2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",
General information "Notes" or "Reminders"
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes‐ 3. Open "Options".
sages, and e-mails* from the mobile phone can
Controls
4. "Update data"
be displayed on the Control Display if the mobile
phone provides compatible support of these Cell phone data are transmitted again to the
functions and the necessary Bluetooth stand‐ vehicle.
ards.
Information about which mobile phones support
Office information
Driving tips
the Office functions can be found at
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. A limited number The number of unread messages and active
of compatible mobile phones is available for Of‐ tasks as well as the upcoming appointments are
fice. displayed.
Contents are only displayed in full length when
1. "Office"
the vehicle is stationary.
2. "Current office"
Navigation
The mobile phone has read-access only.
3. Select the desired entry to display details.
Do not use Office while driving
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless traf‐
fic and road conditions allow this.◀
Requirements
▷ A suitable mobile phone is paired with the
vehicle and connected. In some mobile
phones, data access must be confirmed on
the mobile phone. Contacts
▷ The time, time zone, and date, refer to
page 78, are correctly set on the Control At a glance
Display and on the mobile phone, for in‐ Contacts can be created and edited. The con‐
stance to correctly display appointments. tacts from the mobile phone* are displayed as
▷ Office is activated, refer to page 217. well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone. The addresses can be adopted as des‐
Updating
Mobility
tinations for navigation and the phone numbers

Data are updated every time the mobile phone can be dialed.
is connected to the vehicle. Appointment en‐
tries, tasks, notes and reminders can be updated Displaying contacts
separately.
General information
Reference
1. "Office"
227
Office 2. "Contacts" When a contact is edited, the changes are not
stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry
is stored in the vehicle.
Selecting the contact as a navigation

destination*
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select the address.
When contacts from the mobile phone are
used, the address may need to be matched
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De‐ to the navigation data contained in the vehi‐
pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z cle. In this case:
search is offered, refer to page 23. Correct the address.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the 3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
contacts. destination"
Symbol Storage location
Checking the address as a destination*
No sym‐ In the vehicle; the address has not
An address that is to be used for destination
bol been checked as a destination.
guidance must match the navigation data con‐
In the vehicle; the address has tained in the vehicle. The address can be
been checked as a destination*. checked for this purpose.
Mobile phone*. 1. Select the desired contact and highlight the

address.
2. Open "Options".
Dialing phone numbers*
1. Select the desired contact. 3. "Check as destination"
2. Select the phone number. 4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
The connection is established. If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of

it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not
changed on the mobile phone.
Editing a contact
New contact
2. "Edit contact" A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers,
2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one Inter‐
net address.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
3. Change the entries.

4. "Store contact in vehicle"
228
4. "New contact" 3. "Home"
At a glance
4. Create a contact.
Selecting the sorting order of the

names*
Names can be displayed in a different order.
Controls
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
5. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐ 3. Open "Options".
ous entries: "Delete input fields" 4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
6. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next last name"
Driving tips
to the entry field. Depending on how the contacts were stored on
7. Enter the text and assign the contact type. the mobile phone, the sorting order of the names
8. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation may differ from the selected sorting order.
system: enter the address. Only addresses
contained in the navigation data in the vehi‐ Show contact pictures
cle can be entered. This ensures that desti‐ Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in
Navigation
nation guidance is possible for all ad‐ the vehicle when the mobile phone is connected
dresses. to the vehicle. The number of transmitted pic‐
If necessary, "Accept address". tures depends on the mobile phone. The mobile
phone must support this function.
1. "Office"
Contact types 2. "Contacts"
Various contact types can be assigned to phone 3. Open "Options".
numbers and addresses.
4. "Show images"
Symbol Meaning Display of all contact pictures is activated or de‐
Home phone number. activated.
Business phone number. Deleting contacts

Mobile phone number. Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone*
Other phone number. cannot be deleted.
Home address. 1. "Office"
Business address. 2. "Contacts"
3. Highlight the contact.
Mobility
Specifying the home address 4. Open "Options".

A home address can be stored. It appears at the 5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
top of the contact list. 6. If necessary. "Yes"
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
Reference
229
Messages
Office 1. "Filter:"
General information
Whether or not text messages and e-mails from
the mobile phone are displayed depends on
whether transmission from the mobile phone to
the vehicle is supported. Text messages and e-
mails may not be supported by the service pro‐
vider, or the function may need to be enabled
separately. After the mobile phone is first paired,
transmission may take several minutes. Mes‐
2. Select the type of message.
sages are only displayed in full length when the
vehicle is stationary. Messages from the addi‐ ▷ "All"
tional telephone are not transmitted. All messages are displayed.
Display of different messages: ▷ "E-mail"
▷ Text messages. Only e-mails from the mobile phone are
▷ Message from My Info*. displayed.
▷ Messages from the BMW Assist Concierge ▷ "Service message"
service*. Only messages from the BMW Assist
▷ E-mails from the mobile phone*. Concierge service and My Info are dis‐
played.
Displaying messages ▷ "Text message"
1. "Office" Only text messages from the mobile
2. "Messages" phone are displayed.
A symbol identifies the type of message.
Deleting messages
Symbol Message type Messages from the Concierge service and
Text messages. My Info can be deleted.
Delete a message:
My Info
1. "Office"
Message from the Concierge serv‐
ice. 2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message.
E-mail from mobile phone.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete message"
Filtering the message list
Delete all messages:
The message list can be filtered, when more
than one type of message exists. 1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete all messages" or "Delete service
messages"
230
Text messages 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
At a glance
destination"
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected*, refer to page 233.
Reading the text message out loud*
Controls
Read the text message out loud, refer to
page 234.
My Info 3. Start destination guidance, if necessary.
Starting destination guidance
Driving tips
Dialing the number in the message
1. Select the desired message. Up to 4 phone numbers can be transmitted with
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another a message.
destination"
Dialing the number in the message 2. "Call":
Up to 4 phone numbers can be transmitted with If the message contains a number, the con‐
Navigation
a message. nection is established.
"Select phone number":
If the message contains more than one num‐
2. "Call":
ber, select the desired number from the list.
If the message contains a number, the con‐ The connection is established.
nection is established.
"Select phone number": Storing an address
If the message contains more than one num‐ 1. Select the desired message.
ber, select the desired number from the list. 2. Open "Options".
The connection is established.
Message from the Concierge service*
Displaying additional information
Starting destination guidance 1. Select the desired message.
1. Select the desired message. 2. "Further information"
E-mail*
Displaying e-mails
Mobility
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired e-mail.
Reference
231
Displaying e-mail contacts Selecting the calendar day
Office
If the sender and recipient of an e-mail are trans‐ 1. Select the date.
mitted by the mobile phone, this information is
displayed in the e-mail.
"Sender/Recipient"
If the e-mail addresses are stored in the con‐
tacts, the contact is displayed. Select the con‐
tact to display details.
If the e-mail addresses are not stored in the con‐
tacts, only the e-mail address is displayed.
Using contact data 2. Select the desired day or date.

Contact data from appointments, tasks, text ▷ "Next day"
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or ▷ "Date:"
▷ "Previous day"
Deactivating the full display ▷ "Today"
When an e-mail is opened in the vehicle, the e-
mail is fully transmitted to the vehicle. This may
Display the appointment
result in charges. 1. Select the desired appointment.
2. Scroll through the appointment if neces‐
1. "Office"
sary:
2. "Messages"
▷ Turn the controller.
3. Open "Options".
▷ Select the symbol.
4. "Fully download e-mails"
Only a part of the email from the cell phone Using contact data
is loaded into the vehicle. Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
Reading the e-mail out loud* selected*, refer to page 233.
Read the e-mail out loud, refer to page 234.
Reading the appointment out loud*
Read the appointment out loud, refer to
Calendar page 234.
Display the calendar

Appointments during the last 20 days and the Tasks
next 50 days can be displayed.
Displaying the task list
1. "Office"
Display tasks that are due within the next
2. "Calendar"
90 days.
The appointments on the current day are
displayed. 1. "Office"
2. "Tasks"
232
Sorting the task list Displaying the note
At a glance
1. Select the header in the task list. 1. Select the desired note.
Controls
2. Select the sorting criterion: 2. Scroll in the note if necessary:
▷ "Priority (!)"* ▷ Turn the controller.
Driving tips
▷ "Subject" ▷ Select the symbol.
▷ "Due date"
Using contact data
Displaying the task Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
1. Select the desired task. messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
Navigation
2. Scroll in the task if necessary:
▷ Turn the controller. Reading the note out loud*
▷ Select the symbol. Read the note out loud, refer to page 234.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text Reminders
selected*, refer to page 233. Displaying reminders
Reminders of pending appointments and tasks
Reading the task out loud* are displayed. After an appointment or after a
Read the task out loud, refer to page 234. task is due, the reminder is no longer displayed.
1. "Office"
Notes 2. "Reminders"
3. Select the desired reminder.
Displaying notes The corresponding appointment or the task are
1. "Office" displayed.
2. "Notes"
All notes are displayed.
Using contact data
Mobility
At a glance
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, emails, and notes can be stored or
selected*.
Reference
233
Displaying contact or selecting phone What to do if...
Office
number
Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
1. "Use contact data"
page 216.
2. Display the contact or select the phone
Appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, or
number:
e-mails from the mobile phone are not dis‐
▷ Select the contact to display contact de‐ played.
tails.
▷ The mobile phone is not capable of the
▷ Select the phone number to establish a missing function or is not connected cor‐
connection directly. rectly.
▷ The Office function is deactivated.
Storing contact data
▷ The mobile phone is connected as an addi‐
1. "Use contact data"
tional phone.
2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad‐
▷ Appointments are older than 20 days or are
dress.
more than 50 days in the future.
3. Open "Options".
▷ The tasks have been marked as completed
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new or have a due date that lies more than
contact" 90 days in the future.
▷ Depending on the number of stored ap‐
pointments, task notes, and messages in
Reading out loud* the mobile phone, not all are displayed in the
Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries, vehicle.
tasks, and notes can be read out loud. Not all appointments and tasks from the mobile
phone are displayed at the right time?
1. Select the desired message, appointment,
task, or note. ▷ The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly set
on the Control Display and mobile phone.
The e-mail attachment is not displayed.
The following options are available during read‐
ing: ▷ E-mails are transmitted without an attach‐
ment.
▷ "Pause"
Entries are not displayed in full length.
Interrupt reading. Select again to restart
reading. ▷ Text were already transmitted from the mo‐
bile phone in a shortened form.
▷ "Back to beginning"
▷ Synchronization between the mobile phone
Start reading the message again from the
and vehicle may take several minutes.
beginning.
The contact pictures are not being displayed?
▷ Up to 200 contact pictures can be stored in
Go back one paragraph.
the vehicle.
The E-mail is displayed with a delay?
Skip a paragraph.
▷ Check the e-mail settings on the telephone
▷ To end reading, turn the controller to the left. and adjust if necessary.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, please
contact the hotline or service center.
234
Contacts*
At a glance
General information Specifying the home address
A home address can be stored. It appears at the
Contacts can be created and edited and the ad‐
top of the contact list.
dresses can be adopted as destinations for nav‐
igation. 1. "Home"
Controls
2. Create a contact.
New contact
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"
My contacts
Driving tips
General information
List of all contacts.
Displaying contacts
1. "Contacts"
Navigation
2. "My contacts"
3. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐

ous entries: "Delete input fields"
4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next
to the entry field.
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De‐

pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered, refer to page 23.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Symbol Storage location

5. Enter the text, refer to page 23.
No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not
In vehicles equipped with a navigation sys‐ been checked as a destination.
tem: it is only possible to enter addresses
Mobility
that are contained in the vehicle navigation In the vehicle; the address has
data. This ensures that destination guid‐ been checked as a destination.
ance is possible for all addresses.
6. If necessary, "Store". Editing a contact
7. "Store contact in vehicle" 1. "My contacts"
Reference
235
Deleting contacts
Contacts 3. "Edit contact"
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
4. Change the entries.

5. Move the controller to the left.
6. "Yes"
Selecting the contact as a navigation

destination*
2. Select the address.
destination"
Checking the address as a destination*

An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con‐
tained in the vehicle. The address can be
checked for this purpose.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the

address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
Selecting the sorting order of the

names
Names can be displayed in a different order.
1. "My contacts"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
236
ConnectedDrive*
At a glance
BMW Assist* sist Response Center then speaks with you
and takes further steps to help you.
General information ▷ Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW
BMW Assist provides you with certain services, Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if
e.g., transmission of the position data of your assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
Controls
vehicle to the BMW Assist Response Center if down. If possible, the vehicle and position
an Emergency Request* has been initiated. data are transmitted in the process.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi‐ ▷ Customer Relations: connection with Cus‐
vidually agreed upon contract. tomer Relations for information on all as‐
pects of your vehicle.
After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist
Driving tips
system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist ▷ TeleService: data on your vehicle's service
Response Center without your having to visit a status or required inspections are transmit‐
service center. After the BMW Assist system ted to your service center, either automati‐
has been deactivated, no BMW Assist services cally before a service due date or when you
will be available. The BMW Assist system can be request a BMW service appointment.
reactivated by a service center after you sign a ▷ Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist Re‐
new contract. sponse Center provides assistance if, for ex‐
Navigation
ample, the remote control is not available
Requirements and the vehicle needs to be opened.
▷ The installed BMW Assist system is logged ▷ Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report
in to a wireless communications network. that your vehicle was stolen to the police, the
This network must be capable of transmit‐ BMW Assist Response Center can deter‐
ting the services. mine its position.
▷ To transmit position data, the vehicle must ▷ In addition to these services, the optional
be able to determine the current position. Convenience Plan offers Concierge service
▷ The BMW Assist service contract was and information for route planning, traffic,
signed with your service center or with the and weather. A limited number of calls can
BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling be made via the BMW Assist Response
must have been completed. Center with Critical Calling if, for example,
the mobile phone is not available or dis‐
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
charged.
Services offered Press the SOS button to contact the BMW
Assist Response Center.
▷ Emergency Request: when you press the
SOS button, a connection to the BMW As‐
sist Response Center is established. The
BMW Assist Response Center then speaks TeleService*
Mobility
with you and takes further steps to help you.

General information
▷ Automatic Collision Notification: under cer‐
tain conditions, a connection is established TeleService supports communication with your
to the BMW Assist Response Center after a service center.
serious accident. If possible, the BMW As‐ ▷ Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the service center. In
Reference
this way, the service center can plan its work
237
ConnectedDrive in advance. This shortens the duration of the 2. "Concierge"
service appointment.
▷ In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve‐
hicle's condition can be sent directly to
Roadside Assistance*.
▷ The service varies by country.
▷ Connection costs may ensue.
▷ Services may be restricted abroad.
Requirements
3. "Start service"
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
A voice connection is established with the BMW
If BMW Assist is not activated, a mobile
Assist Concierge service. Phone numbers and
phone that has been recommended by
addresses can be transmitted to the vehicle.
BMW for TeleService and that is configured
for mobile data communication must be
connected with the vehicle.
Messages
▷ Wireless reception is available.
Information on messages, refer to page 230.
▷ The engine is running.
Using BMW TeleService*

BMW TeleService are typically activated in the
Roadside Assistance
vehicle.
At a glance
Even if the BMW TeleService are not active, a
BMW Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if
voice contact to Roadside Assistance* is still
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
possible.
down.
To continue using or to deactivate the services,
Roadside Assistance* can also be contacted via
please contact your service partner or the BMW
a Check Control message, refer to page 76.
customer hotline.
Starting Roadside Assistance without
BMW Assist or TeleService
Concierge service*
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
General information 2. "Roadside Assistance"
The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐ The Roadside Assistance number is dis‐
mation on events, gas stations, and hotels, and played. If the mobile phone* is paired, a con‐
provides phone numbers and addresses. Hotels
can be booked directly by the BMW Assist Con‐
cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
the optional Convenience Plan.
Starting the Concierge service

238
nection is established to Roadside Assis‐ TeleService Help can be started after a prompt
At a glance
tance. by Roadside Assistance and the termination of
the voice connection.
Starting TeleService Help

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. The ignition is switched on.
Controls
4. "TeleService Help"
After completion of TeleService Help, a voice
connection is established to Roadside Assis‐
Starting Roadside Assistance with tance.
BMW Assist or TeleService
Driving tips
General information BMW Online*
In vehicles equipped with TeleService, support
is first offered by TeleService Diagnosis and At a glance
then, if necessary, by TeleService Help. A business search can be opened via BMW On‐
line.
Navigation
License conditions
2. "Roadside Assistance"
This product contains NetFront Browser soft‐
3. "Start service"
ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark
of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other coun‐
tries.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
Requirements
▷ Subscription to the optional Convenience
Plan.
TeleService Diagnosis*
▷ The date setting on the Control Display is
TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless
current.
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are ▷ The vehicle is located within wireless net‐
transmitted automatically. work coverage.
After the data are transmitted, the voice con‐
nection to Roadside Assistance is re-estab‐ Starting BMW Online
Mobility
lished. 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
TeleService Help*
TeleService Help enables an in-depth diagnosis
of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via wire‐
Reference
less transmission.
239
Customer Relations
ConnectedDrive 2. "BMW Online"
At a glance
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.
Calling Customer Relations
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist

or TeleService
3. If necessary, "OK". 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
The BMW Online home page is displayed. 2. "Customer Relations"
The Customer Relations phone number is dis‐
Operating BMW Online played. If the mobile phone* is paired, a con‐
To start a search: nection is established to Customer Relations.
▷ Turn the controller to highlight an element.
▷ Press the controller to display an element.
Opening the start page

1. Open "Options".
2. "Display start page"
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or

TeleService
2. "Customer Relations"
3. "Start service"
Loading a new page

1. Open "Options".
Service Request*
2. "Reload" At a glance
Sends information to your service partner to re‐
Cancel
quest the arrangement of a service appoint‐
1. Open "Options". ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur‐
2. "Cancel loading" ing a Service Request. If possible, your service
partner will establish contact with you.
Starting a Service Request

2. "Service Request"
240
3. "Start service" 3. "Available services"
At a glance
Controls
A Service Request can be started via a Check
Control message, refer to page 76. Updating BMW Assist
Manual update of TeleService* and BMW As‐
Driving tips
sist*.
Automatic Service Request* 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
The TeleService data necessary for servicing 2. "Service Status"
the vehicle are automatically sent to your service
3. "Update BMW Assist"
partner prior to the service deadline. If possible,
the service partner will contact you and a service
Navigation
appointment can be arranged.
Data transfer*
To check when your service partner was noti‐
fied: During the updating of BMW services, display
the status of the data transfer.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Data transfer"
Apps*
At a glance
Certain software applications of a suitable cell
phone can be integrated in the vehicle. These
3. Open "Options". software applications are displayed on the Con‐
trol Display.
4. "Last Service Request"
They are operated via iDrive.
Requirements
Services status*
Mobility
▷ The mobile phone is suitable.

Displaying available services ▷ The mobile phone operating system sup‐
Display of all services available in the vehicle. ports the software applications of Apps.
▷ Software applications are installed on the
cell phone and ready to use.
2. "Service Status"
Reference
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
241
ConnectedDrive Any additionally incurred costs are not a part Press button to switch within the cell
of Apps. phone functions to a higher level or back.
▷ Use only BMW approved software applica‐ Press button twice to switch back to the
tions; otherwise, it may result in malfunc‐ main menu.
tions.
Information about suitable cell phones, available Notes
software applications and their installation can
▷ The ranges of Apps that can be displayed on
be found at www.bmw.com/connectivity or at
the Control Display depend on the range of
the service center.
installed software applications on the mo‐
Create the entries. bile phone.
Make entries only when traffic and road ▷ The data transmission of the software ap‐
conditions allow. Otherwise, the vehicle occu‐ plications from the cell phone to the vehicle
pants and other road users may be put in danger can last some time. Some software applica‐
because of the distraction from driving. tions depend on the speed of the available
For reasons of safety, some software applica‐ Internet connection of the cell phone.
tions are usable only while the vehicle is station‐ ▷ Some mobile phones cannot simultane‐
ary.◀ ously use Apps and the Bluetooth hands-
free system.
Operating Apps If necessary, restart the software application
1. Connect the cell phone via the snap-in on the cell phone after a phone conversa‐
adapter or via the USB audio interface. tion.
2. "ConnectedDrive"
3. Select the desired software application.
Displaying status
Information about the currently available soft‐
ware applications can be displayed.
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW apps"
PlugIn*
Selected functions of the cell phone are dis‐
played on the Control Display. They can be op‐
erated via iDrive.
1. Connect cell phone via the snap-in adapter.

2. "ConnectedDrive"
3. "PlugIn"
4. "Activate PlugIn"
5. Navigate to the displayed functions via the
controller and select, for example, a desired
category or track.
242
243
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.

Refueling
Refueling
Notes Do not pinch the retaining strap

Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
Switch off the engine before refueling
to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed
Always switch off the engine before refu‐ properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀
eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to the
tank and a message will be displayed.◀ A message* is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.
Observe when handling fuel
▷ Take all precautionary measures and Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
observe all applicable regulations In the event of a malfunction, the fuel filler flap
when handling fuel. can be released manually:
▷ Do not carry any spare fuel containers in 1. Open the right-hand side panel in the cargo
your vehicle. They can develop a leak and area.
cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
2. Pull the knob with the gas pump symbol.
event of an accident.◀
Fuel cap
Opening
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
Observe the following when

refueling
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com‐
pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel
pump nozzle during refueling causes:
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. ▷ Premature pump shutoff.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to ▷ Reduced efficiency in the fuel-vapor recov‐
the fuel filler flap. ery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
Closing off the first time.
1. Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until you
Handling fuels
clearly hear a click.
Follow the safety instructions provided at
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
gas stations; otherwise, there is a danger of per‐
sonal injury and property damage.◀
246
Fuel tank capacity
At a glance
Approx. 22.5 US gallons/85 liters, including the
reserve capacity of approx. 2.1 US gallons/8 li‐
ters.
X5 xDrive50i/X6 xDrive50i: reserve capacity of
approx. 3.2 gallons/12 liters.
Refuel promptly
Controls
At the latest, refuel when the range drops
below 30 miles/50 km; otherwise, engine func‐
tions are not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Driving tips
Navigation
Mobility
Reference
247
Fuel
Fuel
Fuel specifications lent amount of co-solvent, will not void the ap‐
plicable warranties with respect to defects in
Gasoline engine: required fuel materials or workmanship.
Do not use fuels that are labeled at the fuel pump Minimum fuel grade
as containing metals. The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
Only refuel with lead-free gasoline without driveability, starting and stalling problems es‐
metal additives pecially under certain environmental conditions
such as high ambient temperature and high al‐
Do not refuel with leaded gasoline or gasoline
titude.
with metal additives, e. g., manganese or iron;
otherwise, the catalytic converter and other Should you encounter driveability problems
components will be permanently damaged.◀ which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
Do not refuel with ethanol E85 by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this Detergent Gasoline.
would damage the engine and fuel supply sys‐ Failure to comply with these recommendations
tem.◀ may result in unscheduled maintenance.◀
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91 BMW X5 with BMW Advanced Diesel:

This gasoline is highly recommended. required fuel
However, you may also use gasoline with less
Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel
AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is:
The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel
▷ BMW X5: 87
with a low sulfur content:
▷ BMW X6: 89
Ultra-low sulfur diesel ASTM D 975-07a.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds Only refuel with ultra-low sulfur diesel.
when starting at high outside temperatures. The percentage of biodiesel in the fuel
This has no affect on the engine life. must not exceed 5%, referred to as B5. Do not
refuel with gasoline. If the vehicle has been re‐
Minimum fuel grade
fueled with incorrect fuel such as gasoline, do
Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐ not start the engine; otherwise, there is a danger
mum specified fuel grade; otherwise, engine of engine damage.◀
damage may occur.◀
If you added the wrong fuel, contact the service
center.
Use high-quality brands
The fuel filling neck is designed for refueling with
Field experience has indicated significant differ‐
diesel nozzles.
ences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, ad‐
ditives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in If the nozzle cannot be inserted into the fuel filler
the United States and Canada. Fuels containing pipe of your BMW, please check to make sure
up to and including 10% ethanol or other oxy‐ that you are refueling with a diesel fuel pump and
genates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight, that whether this is equipped with a diesel nozzle.
is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an equiva‐
248
In the event the Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuel can‐ tomatic transmission shifts into the next higher
At a glance
not be fully inserted into the fuel filler neck, gear at a later point.
please contact BMW Roadside Assistance for
instructions on how to add fuel. For more infor‐ Reserve display
mation on BMW Roadside Assistance, refer to A display in the instrument panel informs you
page 281. about the remaining distance can be covered
with the amount of fuel currently in the tank.
Winter diesel
Controls
To ensure that the diesel engine remains op‐
erational in the winter, use winter diesel.
It is available at gas stations during winter
months.
The standard fuel filter heating prevents the
Driving tips
supply of fuel from stalling during driving.
No diesel additives
Do not add additives, including gasoline;
The reserve display appears approx.
otherwise, engine damage may occur.◀
1,000 miles/1,600 km before the tank is empty.
As soon as the reserve display has appeared in
Navigation
the instrument panel, have the diesel exhaust
fluid refilled to prevent the engine from being
unable to restart.
Diesel exhaust fluid at minimum
BMW X5 with BMW Advanced
Diesel
The concept
BMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen oxides
in the diesel exhaust of your vehicle by injecting Even with a display of -- mls, the engine will con‐
the reducing agent diesel exhaust fluid into the tinue to run, provided that it is not switched off,
exhaust line. In the catalytic converter, a chem‐ and all other operating requirements are met,
ical reaction occurs that minimizes nitrogen ox‐ e.g. sufficient fuel.
ides.
In order to be able to start the engine in the usual No engine start
Mobility
way, there must be a sufficient supply of diesel Do not drive until the displayed remaining
exhaust fluid in the separate reservoir. distance runs out. Otherwise, it may not be pos‐
sible to restart the engine.◀
System heating
In order to bring the system to operating tem‐
perature after a cold start of the engine, the au‐
Reference
249
Incorrect fueling
Fuel ervoir, pungent smelling vapors can escape. Be‐
The warning lamp lights up: fore refilling, close the vehicle completely so
that the vapors do not get into the interior of the
The reservoir has been filled with an in‐
vehicle. When handling diesel exhaust fluid in
correct fluid.
enclosed spaces, make sure to have sufficient
Please contact your service center. ventilation. After handling diesel exhaust fluid,
wash hands thoroughly. Failure to do so may
Have diesel exhaust fluid refilled lead to irritation, for instance, due to inadvertent
This exhaust fluid is refilled by your service cen‐ contact with the eyes. If eye irritation occurs,
ter during regular maintenance. If you adhere to immediately rinse eyes with ample water and
this maintenance schedule, it is usually not nec‐ contact a doctor if necessary. If diesel exhaust
essary to refill any fluids between the mainte‐ fluid comes into contact with surfaces of your
nance dates. vehicle, rinse the affected surfaces with water or
else damage may occur. Keep diesel exhaust
Under certain circumstances, for example, due fluid out of reach of children.◀
to a particularly sporty driving style or operation
of the vehicle at high altitudes, it may be neces‐
sary to refill fluids between maintenance dates. Suitable diesel exhaust fluid
As soon as the reserve display has appeared in ▷ Preferred: BMW Diesel Exhaust Fluid. This
the instrument panel, have the diesel exhaust bottle and its special adapter permit con‐
fluid refilled to prevent the engine from being venient refilling with diesel exhaust fluid.
unable to restart. ▷ Alternative: NOx reduction agent AUS 32
You can have the fluid refilled by a service cen‐ Diesel exhaust fluid can be obtained from your
ter. service center.
Diesel exhaust fluid at low Refilling quantity

temperatures Refilling quantity at the start of the reserve dis‐
Due to its physical properties, it may be neces‐ play:
sary to replenish the level of diesel exhaust fluid Approx. 0.75 gallons/2.7 liters
at temperatures below +23 ℉/ -5 ℃, even be‐
tween the regular maintenance dates. Open reservoir for diesel exhaust fluid
If the fluid needs to be refilled, this will be indi‐ 1. Open the hood, refer to page 264.
cated with the reserve display in the instrument
2. Fit the releasing tool from the tool kit, refer
cluster, refer to page 249.
to page 270, into place and open the lock,
see arrow.
Only refill the diesel exhaust fluid
yourself in exceptional circumstances
To be able to reach the nearest service center
with your vehicle, you may refill the diesel ex‐
haust fluid yourself, making sure to heed the
warning notices specified below.
Handling diesel exhaust fluid
Do not allow diesel exhaust fluid to come
into contact with you. This can lead to skin and
eye irritation. Wear protective goggles and
gloves as needed. Follow the safety instructions
on the bottle. When opening the bottle or res‐
250
Refilling BMW diesel exhaust fluid After refilling diesel exhaust fluid
At a glance
1. Set bottle into place and rotate until it comes
into contact with the stop, refer to arrow. Incorrect fluid
Incorrect fluids
After refilling with the incorrect fluid, e.g.,
antifreeze for windshield wiper fluid, do not start
the engine because this could result in a fire
hazard.◀
Controls
Contact your service center.
Bottle disposal
Diesel exhaust fluid bottles can be dis‐
2. Press bottle down, refer to arrow.
posed of by your service center.
Driving tips
The reservoir of the vehicle is filled.
Only dispose of empty bottles in your household
garbage if the local legal regulations permit it.
Reserve display
Navigation
3. The reservoir is full when the fill level in the
bottle stops changing. It is not possible to
overfill.
Pull bottle back, refer to arrow, and unscrew
After refilling, the reserve continues to appear
it.
after the engine is restarted. After the vehicle
has been driven for a few more minutes, this
display will disappear.
Closing reservoir
Mobility
After the reservoir is filled, close it again with the

releasing tool.
Reference
251
Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure BMW; a list of these is available from your serv‐
ice center.
Safety information For correct identification of the right tire inflation
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also pressures, observe the following:
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
safety that depend on the condition of the tires ▷ Maximum allowable driving speed.
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres‐
sure. Tire inflation pressures for driving up to
100 mph or 160 km/h
Checking the pressure
For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h, ad‐
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the just pressures to the respective tire inflation
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of pressures listed on the following pages in the
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has column for traveling speeds up to 100 mph/
been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires 160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.
are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
These tire inflation pressures can also be found
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly door is open.
and correct it if necessary, even in the compact
wheel*: usually twice monthly or before embark‐
ing on a long trip. If you fail to observe this pre‐
caution, you may be driving on tires with incor‐
rect tire pressures, a condition that may not only
compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but
also lead to tire damage and the risk of an acci‐
dent.
Do not drive with depressurized or flat tires, ex‐
cept for run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously im‐
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
pair your vehicle's handling and braking re‐
speed
sponse. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead
to a loss of control over the vehicle.◀ The maximum permissible speed for these tire
pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h Do not exceed
After adjusting the tire inflation pressure, reset this speed; otherwise, tire damage and acci‐
the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 90, or dents could occur.◀
reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 88.
Tire inflation pressures for driving
Pressure specifications above 100 mph or 160 km/h
The tables below provide all the correct inflation Adjust the tire inflation pressures
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient To drive at maximum speeds in excess of
temperature. 100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the re‐
The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes spective tire inflation pressures listed on the fol‐
approved and tire brands recommended by lowing pages in the column for traveling speeds
including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/
252
h. Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could Observe all national and local maximum speed
At a glance
occur.◀ limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could oc‐
cur.
Tire inflation pressures X5 xDrive35i/X5 xDrive35d with two rows of seats
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds of up to Traveling speeds including
Controls
100 mph/160 km/h those exceeding 100 mph/
160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table

are indicated in psi/kilopascal with
cold tires.
Driving tips
Cold = ambient temperature
Compact wheel*: 60/420 60/420 60/420 60/420

T 155/90 D 18 113 M
T 155/80 R 19 114 M
Without Sport Package:
Navigation
255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 32/220 36/250 35/240 41/280
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 32/220 38/260 35/240 42/290
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL RSC 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL RSC - 35/240 - 38/260
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 33/230 - 35/240 -

Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC - 35/240 - 38/260
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC 33/230 - 36/250 -

Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC - 38/260 - 41/280
With Sport Package:
255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 32/220 36/250 35/240 41/280
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 32/220 38/260 35/240 42/290
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL RSC 32/220 - 39/270 -

Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL RSC - 35/240 - 42/290
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 33/230 - 38/260 -

Mobility
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC - 35/240 - 41/280

Reference
253
Wheels and tires Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC 33/230 - 38/260 -

Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC - 38/260 - 45/310
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 292.
Tire inflation pressures X5 xDrive50i with two rows of seats

160 km/h

cold tires.
Compact wheel*: 60/420 60/420 60/420 60/420

T 155/90 D 18 113 M
T 155/80 R 19 114 M
255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 32/220 36/250 35/240 41/280
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 32/220 39/270 36/250 44/300
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 W XL RSC 32/220 - 36/250 -

Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 W XL RSC - 35/240 - 38/260
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 33/230 - 35/240 -

Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC - 36/250 - 39/270
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 Y XL RSC 33/230 - 36/250 -

Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 Y XL RSC - 39/270 - 41/280
With Sport Package:
255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 32/220 36/250 35/240 41/280
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 32/220 39/270 36/250 44/300
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 W XL RSC 32/220 - 41/280 -

Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 W XL RSC - 35/240 - 45/310
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 33/230 - 42/290 -

Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC - 36/250 - 46/320
254
At a glance
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 Y XL RSC 33/230 - 38/260 -
Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 Y XL RSC - 39/270 - 45/310
Tire inflation pressures X5 xDrive35i/X5 xDrive35d with three rows of seats
Controls

160 km/h
Driving tips
cold tires.
Navigation
255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 33/230 41/280 38/260 45/310
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 36/250 44/300 41/280 48/330
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL RSC 32/220 - 35/240 -

Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL RSC - 38/260 - 42/290
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 33/230 - 35/240 -
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC - 39/270 - 42/290
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC 35/240 - 38/260 -

Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC - 42/290 - 45/310
With Sport Package:
255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 33/230 41/280 38/260 45/310
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 36/250 44/300 41/280 48/330
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL RSC 32/220 - 41/280 -

Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL RSC - 38/260 - 48/330
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 33/230 - 41/280 -

Mobility
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC - 39/270 - 48/330
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC 35/240 - 42/290 -

Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC - 42/290 - 49/340
Reference
255
Tire inflation pressures X5 xDrive50i with three rows of seats
Wheels and tires

160 km/h

cold tires.
255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 33/230 41/280 38/260 45/310
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 36/250 44/300 41/280 48/330
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 W XL RSC 32/220 - 35/240 -

Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 W XL RSC - 38/260 - 42/290
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 33/230 - 35/240 -

Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC - 39/270 - 42/290
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 Y XL RSC 35/240 - 38/260 -

Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 Y XL RSC - 42/290 - 45/310
With Sport Package:
255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 33/230 41/280 38/260 45/310
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 36/250 44/300 41/280 48/330
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 W XL RSC 32/220 - 41/280 -

Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 W XL RSC - 38/260 - 48/330
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 33/230 - 42/290 -

Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC - 39/270 - 49/340
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 Y XL RSC 35/240 - 41/280 -

Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 Y XL RSC - 42/290 - 46/320
256
Tire inflation pressure X6 xDrive35i
At a glance

160 km/h
Controls
cold tires.
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 32/220 35/240 36/250 44/300

255/50 R 19 107 V M+S XL RSC
Driving tips
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL RSC 32/220 - 36/250 -
Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL RSC - 32/220 - 38/260
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 32/220 - 36/250 -

Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC - 32/220 - 36/250
Navigation
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC 32/220 - 38/260 -
Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC - 33/230 - 39/270
Compact wheel* 60/420 60/420 60/420 60/420

T 155/90 D 18 113 M
T 155/80 R 19 114 M
Tire inflation pressures for X6 xDrive50i

160 km/h

cold tires.
Mobility
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 33/230 36/250 41/280 44/300

255/50 R 19 107 V M+S XL RSC
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 W XL RSC 36/250 - 42/290 -

Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 W XL RSC - 36/250 - 42/290
Reference
257
Wheels and tires Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 36/250 - 44/300 -

Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC - 36/250 - 44/300
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC 36/250 - 45/310 -

Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC - 36/250 - 45/310
Compact wheel* 60/420 60/420 60/420 60/420

T 155/90 D 18 113 M
T 155/80 R 19 114 M
Tire identification marks 3410: tire age
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire Tire age

makes it easier to identify and choose the right
The tire manufacturing date is contained in the
tires.
tire identification mark: DOT ... 3410 means that
the tire was manufactured in the week 34 of
Tire size
2010.
Example: 255/55 R 19 107 V
BMW recommends that you replace all tires af‐
255: nominal width in mm ter 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
55: aspect ratio in % for 10 years.
R: radial tire code
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
19: rim diameter in inches
Quality grades can be found where applicable
107: load rating, not for ZR tires
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Speed letter
Temperature A
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h DOT Quality Grades
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h Treadwear
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h Traction AA A B C
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h Temperature A B C
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h Conform to Federal Safety Requirements
All passenger car tires must conform to
Tire Identification Number
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the these grades.◀
U.S. Department of Transportation.
DOT code: Treadwear
DOT xxxx xxx 3410 The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
xxx: tire size and tire design under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
258
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded RSC – Run-flat tires
At a glance
150 would wear one and one-half (11/2) times The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
as well on the government course as a tire with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to
graded 100. The relative performance of tires page 261.
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the M+S
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
Winter and all-season tires.
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate. These have better winter properties than
Controls
summer tires.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
XL
AA, A, B, and C. Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
Driving tips
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfa‐ Tire tread
ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance. Summer tires
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and 0.12 in/3 mm.
Navigation
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐ There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
planing, or peak traction characteristics. the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
Temperature Winter tires

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the 0.16 in/4 mm.
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
heat when tested under controlled conditions less suitable for winter operation.
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐
tained high temperature can cause the material Minimum tread depth
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Temperature grade for this tire
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐ Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
Mobility
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and circumference and have the legally required
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐ minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and pos‐ They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI,
sible tire failure.◀ Tread Wear Indicator.
Reference
259
Wheel/tire damage
Wheels and tires Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the
function of a variety of systems such as ABS or
Due to low-profile tires, please note that wheels, DSC.
tires and suspension parts are more susceptible
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
to road hazard and consequential damages.
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐ figuration from a single manufacturer.
jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐ and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
fects: as soon as possible.
▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.
Approved wheels and tires
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
to pull to the left or right.
mends that you use only wheels and tires that
In case of tire damage have been approved for your particular vehicle
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐ model.
duce your speed immediately and have the For example, despite having the same official
wheels and tires checked right away; otherwise, size ratings, variations can lead to body contact
there is the increased risk of an accident. and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
Drive carefully to the next service center or tire The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu‐
shop. ate non-approved wheels and tires to determine
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀ if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot
ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they
Repair of tire damage are mounted.◀
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire
damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐ Pressure Monitor
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐ When mounting new tires or changing from
sult.◀ summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the
Tire Pressure Monitor will not be able to detect
Changing wheels and tires a flat tire, refer to page 90. Your service center
will be glad to advise you.
Mounting
Recommended tire brands
Information on mounting tires
Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center or tire specialist.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Wheel and tire combination

Information on the right wheel and tire combi‐
nation and rim version for your vehicle can be For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
obtained from the service center. hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
260
With proper use, these tires meet the highest Storage
At a glance
standards for safety and handling. Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Retreaded tires Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ grease and fuels.
ommend the use of retreaded tires. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
Retreaded tires sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Controls
Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
sign and age of the tire casing structures can
limit service life and have a negative impact on Run-flat tires
road safety.◀
Label
Winter tires
Driving tips
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
below +45 ℉/+7 ℃.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
Navigation
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires RSC label on the tire sidewall.
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher The wheels are composed of special rims and
than the permissible speed for the winter tires, tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐
then display a corresponding sign in the field of gree.
vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire spe‐ The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
cialist or from your service center. main drivable to a restricted degree in the event
of a pressure loss.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for the Driving with a damaged tire:
winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and acci‐ ▷ Flat Tire Monitor FTM*, refer to page 88
dents can occur.◀ ▷ Tire Pressure Monitor TPM*, refer to
page 90
Run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. Your
service center will be glad to advise you. Snow chains*
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
Rotating wheels between axles
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and
The manufacturer of your vehicle advises recommended. Consult your service center for
Mobility
against swapping wheels between the front and more information.

rear axles.
BMW X5: use only in pairs on the rear wheels,
This can impair the handling characteristics. equipped with tires of the following size:
Rotating the tires is not permissible when using ▷ 255/55 R 18
different types of tires*.
▷ 255/50 R 19
Reference
261
Wheels and tires BMW X6: use only in pairs on rear wheels of size
255/50 R 19.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow
chains are mounted; otherwise, the instrument
might issue an incorrect reading.
When driving with snow chains, it can be bene‐
ficial to temporarily activate DTC, refer to
page 97.
262
Engine compartment
At a glance
Important features in the engine compartment
BMW X5
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
1 Filler neck for washer fluid for the headlamp 3 Coolant expansion tank 267
and window washer system 67 4 Engine oil filler neck 266
2 Starting aid terminal 281
Mobility
Reference
263
BMW X6
Engine compartment
1 Filler neck for the washer fluid for the head‐ 3 Starting aid terminal 281
lamp and window washer system 68 4 Coolant expansion tank 267
2 Engine oil filler neck 266
Hood 1. Pull the lever.
Opening the hood

Working in the engine compartment
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
2. Press the release handle and open the hood.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
264
Closing the hood 2. "Vehicle status"
At a glance
Controls
Drop the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/ 3. "Engine oil level"
40 cm. It must be clearly heard to engage.
Hood open when driving
Possible messages
Driving tips
▷ "Engine oil level OK"
If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over imme‐ ▷ "Measurement not possible at this time."
diately and close it securely.◀ ▷ "Measuring engine oil level..."
Danger of pinching Duration with the engine running: ap‐

prox. 3 minutes.
Make sure that the closing path of the
Duration while driving: approx. 5 minutes.
Navigation
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
If engine oil was added, it may take up to
30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading.
Engine oil ▷ "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
quart!"
Checking the engine oil level Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter
Your car is equipped with an electronic engine of engine oil at the next opportunity, refer
oil level check. also to Adding engine oil below.
▷ "Engine oil level too high! Have this
Requirements checked."
▷ The engine must be running and warm after Too much engine oil
the vehicle has been driven for at least
Have the vehicle checked immedi‐
6.2 miles/10 km.
ately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to en‐
▷ The vehicle is stopped or being driven on a gine damage.◀
level roadway.
▷ "Measurement inactive. Have this
Displaying the oil level checked."Do not add engine oil. It is possi‐
ble to continue driving. Note the newly cal‐
1. "Vehicle Info"
culated remaining mileage until the next oil
service, refer to page 75. Have the system
Mobility
checked as soon as possible.

Reference
265
Adding engine oil
Engine compartment Viscosity classes of engine oils
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
Filler neck the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity
classes SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40,
BMW X5 or SAE 5W-30, or malfunctions or engine dam‐
age may occur.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the

engine.
Due to national regulations, some oil types are
not available in every country.
Approved oil types
Gasoline engine
BMW X6 BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30
BMW Longlife-01
BMW Longlife-01 FE
Diesel engine
BMW Longlife-04
Further information on approved oil types can be

Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter of obtained from the service center.
oil only after the corresponding message ap‐
pears on the Control Display. Alternative oil types
Add oil promptly If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;
specification can be used:
otherwise, engine damage could result.◀
Gasoline engine
Protect children
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐ API SM or higher
dren and heed the warnings on the containers
to prevent health risks.◀ Diesel engine
API ILSAC GF-5

Oil types for refilling
Notes Oil change

No oil additives An oil change should be carried out by the serv‐
ice center only.
Do not use oil additives as these may
cause engine damage.◀
266
Disposal
At a glance
Comply with the appropriate environmen‐
tal protection regulations when disposing
of coolant additives.
Controls
Coolant
General information
Driving tips
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while the
engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may
cause burns.◀
Suitable additives
Navigation
Only use suitable additives; otherwise, en‐
gine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.

Not all commercially available additives are suit‐
able for your vehicle. Ask your service center for
suitable additives.
Checking the coolant level

1. Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock‐
wise slightly to allow any accumulated pres‐
sure to escape; then continue turning to
open.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
the maximum and minimum marks in the
filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to
the filler neck.
Mobility
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to

the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Reference
267
Maintenance
Maintenance
BMW maintenance system Setting the correct date

Make sure the date is set correctly, refer
to page 79; otherwise, the effectiveness of CBS
Condition Based Service is not ensured.◀
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a service center update the
The maintenance system provides information time-dependent maintenance procedures,
on required maintenance measures and thus such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
provides support in maintaining road safety and changing the engine oil and the microfilter/acti‐
the operational reliability of the vehicle. vated-charcoal filter.
Condition Based Service CBS Service and Warranty

Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
Information Booklet for US
count the driving conditions of your vehicle. models and Warranty and
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐ Service Guide Booklet for
mines the maintenance requirements. Canadian models
The system makes it possible to adapt the
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
amount of maintenance you need to your user
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
profile.
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
Details on the service requirements, refer to additional information on service requirements.
page 75, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
Maintenance and repair should be performed by
play.
your service center. Make sure to have regular
On the Control Display, the remaining distances maintenance procedures recorded in the vehi‐
and times for selected maintenance require‐ cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
ments and any legally required deadlines can be for US models, and in the Warranty and Service
displayed individually, refer to page 75. Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These en‐
tries are proof of regular maintenance.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is con‐
tinuously stored in the remote control. Your
service center will read out this data and suggest
the right array of service procedures for your ve‐
hicle.
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐
mote control that you used most recently.
268
Socket for OBD Onboard stored in the remote control and can be read out
At a glance
with suitable devices, particularly when the ve‐
Diagnosis hicle is serviced. The data obtained in this way
provide valuable information for service proc‐
esses and repair or for optimizing and develop‐
ing vehicle functions further. In addition, if you
signed a service contract for Assist, certain ve‐
hicle data can be sent directly from the vehicle
to facilitate the desired services.
Controls
On the driver's side is an OBD socket for check‐
ing the primary components in the vehicle emis‐
Driving tips
sions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐
Navigation
sible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir‐
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri‐
ous engine misfiring within a brief period can
seriously damage emission control compo‐
nents, in particular the catalytic converter.
Display of the previously described mal‐
functions on Canadian models.
Fuel cap
The indicator lamp lights up.
If the fuel cap is not properly tightened,
the OBD system may conclude that
fuel vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tight‐
ened, the display should go out in a short time.
Mobility
Data memory
Your vehicle records data relating to vehicle op‐
Reference
eration, faults and user settings. These data are
269
Replacing components
Tool kit BMW X5: rear
The tool kit is stowed under the cargo floor panel 1. Lift off the wiper arm completely and pull off
in the cargo area. the wiper blade, refer to arrow.
2. Mount the new wiper blade and press on
until it is heard to engage.
Wiper blade replacement
Do not fold down the wipers without wiper Lamp and bulb replacement
blades
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have General information
not been installed; this may damage the wind‐ Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution
shield.◀ to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
Front that you entrust corresponding procedures to
your service center if you are unfamiliar with
them or they are not described here.
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at your service center.
Danger of burns
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
otherwise, there is the danger of getting
burned.◀
1. Fold up the wiper arm. Working on the lighting system

2. Fold the wiper blade upwards. When working on the lighting system, you
3. Remove the wiper blade toward the wind‐ should always switch off the lights affected to
shield, refer to arrow. prevent short circuits.
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀
270
Do not touch the bulbs Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
At a glance
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with xenon headlamps
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
and reduce its service life. service center.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or Due to the high voltage present in the system,
hold the bulb by its base.◀ there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is car‐
ried out improperly.◀
Controls
Light-emitting diodes LED
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu‐ Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps,
cent lenses serve as the light source for many of daytime running lights*
the controls, displays and other equipment in These lamps are made using LED technology.
your vehicle. Contact your service center in the event of a
Driving tips
These light-emitting diodes, which operate us‐ malfunction.
ing a concept similar to that applied in conven‐
tional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 Turn signals, front
light-emitting diodes. 24-watt bulb, PY24W
Do not remove the covers 1. Rotate bulb holder to the left and remove it
Do not remove the covers, and never stare along with the bulb.
Navigation
into the unfiltered light for several hours; other‐
wise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
Headlamp glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When the
light is switched on, the condensation evapo‐
rates after a short time. The headlamp glasses
do not need to be changed.
If there is a large amount of moisture, e.g., water 2. Rotate the bulb to the right along with the
droplets form in the lamp, have the lamp socket and replace.
checked by your service center. 3. Install in the reverse order.
Side marker lamps, rear

BMW X5: bulb replacement Contact the service center for bulb replacement.
Xenon headlamps Tail lamps

Because of the long life of these bulbs, the like‐ ▷ Turn signal, brake lamp: 21-watt bulb,
lihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps P21W.
on and off frequently shortens their life.
Mobility
▷ Brake force display: 21-watt bulb, P21W.

If a bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps* and
▷ Backup lamp: 16-watt bulb, W16W
continue the trip with great care. Comply with
local regulations. ▷ Tail lamp: LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Reference
271
Arrangement of tail lamps Brake Force Display
1. Carefully remove the cover in the tailgate
panel with a screwdriver.
1 Tail lamp
2 Brake force display
3 Brake lamp 2. Push the catch on the bulb holder to the left,
arrow, and remove it.
4 Tail lamp/side marker lamp
5 Backup lamp
6 Turn signal
Turn signals, brake lamps and backup

lamps
The bulbs are integrated in a single bulb holder.
1. Open the side panel in the cargo area.
2. Remove the first aid kit* and warning trian‐
gle* if necessary. Fold up the insulation. 3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turn‐
ing it to the left for removal and replacement.
4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
5. Before installing the cap, unclip the cargo
area lamp.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, down, press the

catches, arrows 2, outward slightly, and re‐
move the bulb holder.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the P21W bulb
while turning it to the left for removal and re‐
placement.
Remove the W16W bulb and replace.
5. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
6. Remount the side panel.
272
Then lay the cap on its upper side and close Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
At a glance
it, refer to arrow. xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐
cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
service center.
Due to the high voltage present in the system,
there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is car‐
ried out improperly.◀
Controls
Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps,
daytime running lights*
6. Position the cargo area lamp and clip it in, 35-watt bulb, H8
refer to arrow.
Wear protective goggles and gloves
Driving tips
Halogen bulbs are pressurized. Therefore,
wear protective goggles and gloves. Otherwise,
there is a danger of injuries if the bulb is acci‐
dentally damaged during replacement.◀
1. Turn the cover to the left and remove.
Navigation
License plate lamps
These lamps are made using LED technology.
malfunction.
Center brake lamp

2. Left side of vehicle: rotate the bulb holder to
This lamp uses LED technology for operation. the right, see arrow, and remove.
Right side of vehicle: rotate the bulb holder
malfunction.
to the left and remove.
BMW X6: bulb replacement

Xenon headlamps
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the like‐
lihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps
on and off frequently shortens their life.
Mobility
If a bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps* and

continue the trip with great care. Comply with
local regulations. 3. Disconnect plug and replace bulb.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Reference
273
Side marker lamps Arrangement of tail lamps
5-watt bulb, WY5W XLL
1. Rotate the bulb holder to the left and re‐

move.
1 Brake force display/rear lamps

2 Brake lamp/rear lamp
3 Backup lamp
2. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and re‐ 4 Turn signal
place.
3. Install in the reverse order. Brake lamps
Turn signals, front 2. Remove the first aid kit* and warning trian‐
24-watt bulb, PY24W gle* if necessary.
1. Rotate bulb holder to the left and remove it 3. Rotate the relevant bulb socket to the left
along with the bulb. and remove.
2. Rotate the bulb to the right along with the 4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turn‐
socket and replace. ing it to the left for removal and replacement.
3. Install in the reverse order. 5. Install in the reverse order.
Tail lamps Turn signal

▷ Turn signal, backup lamp: 21-watt bulb, 1. Open the side panel in the cargo area.
H21W. 2. Remove the first aid kit* and warning trian‐
▷ Brake lamp, brake force display: 21-watt gle* if necessary.
bulb, P21W
▷ Tail lamp: LED technology.
malfunction.
274
3. Remove bulb holder along with bulb and re‐ Brake force display
At a glance
place. 1. Carefully remove the cover in the tailgate
panel with a screwdriver.
Controls
2. Rotate the bulb socket to the left and re‐
Driving tips
Backup lamp move.
2. Remove the first aid kit* and warning trian‐
gle* if necessary.
3. Remove bulb holder along with bulb and re‐
place.
Navigation
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turn‐
ing it to the left for removal and replacement.
4. Insert the bulb socket in the tailgate and en‐
gage it.
5. Replace the cover.
License plate lamps
These lamps are made using LED technology.
malfunction.
Center brake lamp

This lamp uses LED technology for operation.
malfunction.
Mobility
Changing wheels
Notes
Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, refer
Reference
to page 261, as standard equipment.
275
Replacing components They do not need to be replaced immediately in Change the wheel only on a level, firm surface
the event of a puncture. which is not slippery. The vehicle or the jack
When mounting new tires or changing from could slip to the side if you attempt to raise the
summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flat vehicle on a soft or slippery surface such as
tires for your own safety. snow, ice, tiles, etc.
BMW X6: do not rotate the front wheels to the Position the jack on a firm support surface.
rear or vice versa, as otherwise the handling Do not use a wooden block or similar object as
characteristics will be negatively affected. a support base for the jack, as this would prevent
The tools for changing wheels are available as it from extending to its full support height and
accessories from your service center. reduce its load-carrying capacity.
To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie under
Jacking points for the vehicle jack the vehicle, and never start the engine while it is
supported by the jack.◀
What you will need

To avoid rattling noises later on, note the posi‐
tions of the tools before removing them, then
return them to their initial positions after com‐
pleting work.
The tools are located in the mount under the
floor panel flap.
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated in the positions shown.
Compact wheel*
Safety precautions in the event of a flat tire
or wheel change
Park the vehicle as far as possible from passing
traffic and on solid ground. Switch on the hazard
warning system.
1 Vehicle jack*
Set the parking brake and engage transmission
position P. 2 Vehicle jack crank*
Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle 3 Lug bolts wrench*
and ensure that they remain outside the imme‐
diate area in a safe place, such as behind a Removing compact wheel
guardrail. The compact wheel is located in the cargo area
If a warning triangle or portable hazard warning under the floor panel.
lamp* is required, set it up on the roadside at an
appropriate distance from the rear of the vehicle.
Comply with all safety guidelines and regula‐
tions.
276
2. Guide the jack head into the rectangular re‐
At a glance
cess of the jacking point when cranking up,
refer to illustration detail.
Controls
1. Remove the tool mount.
2. Release the wing nut 1.
3. Remove the washer 2 laterally.
4. Remove the compact wheel. 3. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are
Driving tips
changing is raised from the ground.
Preparing wheel change
Mounting a wheel
1. Observe the safety precautions above.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
2. Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
wheel.
Jacking up vehicle 2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from

the mounting surfaces of the wheel and hub.
Navigation
1. Position the vehicle jack at the jacking point
Also clean the lug bolts.
closest to the wheel so that the entire sur‐
face of the jack base rests on the ground 3. Position the new wheel or compact wheel.
perpendicularly beneath the jacking point. Secure the wheel by screwing at least two
lug bolts into opposite bolt holes.
The vehicle jack is designed for
When you mount wheels other than Genuine
changing wheels only.
BMW light-alloy wheels, different lug bolts
The vehicle jack is designed for changing may also be required.
wheels only. Do not attempt to raise another
4. Screw in the remaining lug bolts. Tighten all
vehicle model with it or to raise any load of
the bolts securely in a diagonal pattern.
any kind. To do so could cause accidents
and personal injury.◀ 5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack from
beneath the vehicle.
After mounting
1. Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern.
Checking that the lug bolts are tight
To ensure safety, always have the lug
bolts checked with a calibrated torque
wrench as soon as possible to ensure that
Mobility
they are tightened to the specified torque.

Otherwise, incorrectly tightened lug bolts
are a hidden safety risk. The tightening tor‐
que equals 101 lb ft/140 Nm.◀
2. Stow the defective wheel in the cargo area.

Reference
277
Replacing components The defective wheel cannot be stored under After a battery replacement, have the battery
the floor panel flap due to its size. registered on the vehicle by your service center
3. Check and correct the tire inflation pressure to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
at the earliest opportunity. available.
4. Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to

Charging the battery
page 88, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 90. In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
terminals in the engine compartment, refer to
5. Replace the damaged tire as soon as possi‐
page 281, with the engine switched off.
ble and have the new wheel/tire balanced.
Power failure
Driving with compact wheel
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/ needs to be reinitialized.
h.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
Drive conservatively and do not exceed a speed
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the positions
of 50 mph/80 km/h. Otherwise, changes in the
again, refer to page 53.
driving characteristics could result, for example
reduced track stability on braking, extended ▷ Time: update, refer to page 78.
braking distance, and altered self-steering char‐ ▷ Date: update, refer to page 79.
acteristics in the limit range. In conjunction with ▷ Radio station: save again, refer to page 174.
winter tires, these characteristics are more pro‐
nounced.◀ ▷ Navigation system: wait for the navigation
system to be operational.
Only mount one compact wheel ▷ Glass sunroof/panoramic glass sunroof: it
Only one compact wheel may be may only be possible to raise the roof. Have
mounted. Restore the wheels and tires to their the system initialized by the service center.
original size as quickly as possible. Failure to do ▷ Digital compass: recalibrate, refer to
so is a safety risk.◀ page 129.
▷ Active steering: the system automatically in‐
itializes for a short time as you drive. During
Vehicle battery this time, the system is deactivated, refer to
page 101.
Maintenance ▷ xDrive: the system automatically initializes
The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐ as you drive. During this time, indicator
trolyte will last for the life of the battery. lamps light up. If the lamps do not disappear
Your service center will be glad to advise you on during the current trip, have the system
questions regarding the battery. checked.
Battery replacement Disposing of old batteries

Have old batteries disposed of by your
Use approved vehicle batteries
service center or bring them to a recy‐
Only use vehicle batteries that have been cling center.
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
that it does not tip over during transport.
ble.◀
278
Fuses In cargo area
At a glance
Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating; this could
lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in
a fire in the vehicle.◀
Controls
In interior
The fuses are located in the front passenger Open the right-hand side panel in the cargo
footwell on the underside of the instrument clus‐ area.
ter.
Driving tips
1. Unscrew screws, refer to arrows, of footwell
trim panel.
Navigation
2. Lay the trim panel in the footwell.
3. Release the screw, arrow 1, and fold the fuse
carrier down, arrow 2.
4. Replace the fuse concerned.

5. Installation is carried out in the reverse order
Mobility
of removal. Ensure correct and secure at‐

tachment of the footwell trim panel in the
process.
Reference
279
Breakdown assistance
Hazard warning flashers After deactivation, an Emergency Request

is no longer possible.
▷ Under certain circumstances, the system
can be reactivated by a service center after
you sign a new contract.
Initiating an Emergency Request

1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
The button for the hazard warning system is lo‐

cated on the center console.
Emergency Request*
Requirements
▷ Equipment version with full preparation 2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
package mobile phone. button lights up.
An Emergency Request can be made, even ▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
if no mobile phones are paired with the ve‐ was initiated.
hicle. If the circumstances allow this, remain in the
▷ BMW Assist is activated. vehicle until the connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ Radio readiness is switched on.
▷ The LED flashes if the connection to the
▷ The BMW Assist system is logged in to a BMW Assist Response Center has been es‐
wireless communications network sup‐ tablished.
ported by BMW Assist.
Once the BMW Assist Response Center has
▷ The Assist system is operable. received your Emergency Request, the
Only press the SOS button in an emergency. BMW Assist Response Center contacts you
Emergency Request not guaranteed and takes further steps to help you.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Re‐ Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW
quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable Assist Response Center can take further
conditions.◀ steps to help you under certain circumstan‐
ces.
For this purpose, data that are used to de‐
Service contract
termine the necessary rescue measures,
▷ After your contract with BMW Assist has ex‐ such as the current position of the vehicle if
pired, the BMW Assist system can be deac‐ it can be established, are transmitted to the
tivated by the service center without you BMW Assist Response Center.
having to visit a workshop.
280
▷ If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist Jump-starting
At a glance
Response Center cannot be heard on the
hands-free system, the hands-free system Notes
may be malfunctioning. However, the BMW
If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
Assist Response Center may still be able to
started using the battery of another vehicle and
hear you.
two jumper cables*. Only use jumper cables
with fully insulated clamp handles.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically To prevent personal injury or damage to both
Controls
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
dure.
quest is automatically initiated immediately after
a severe accident. Automatic Collision Notifica‐ Do not touch live parts
tion is not affected by pressing the SOS button. To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical compo‐
Driving tips
nents while the engine is running.◀
Roadside Assistance*
Preparation
Service availability
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
Roadside Assistance can be reached around the hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi‐
clock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐ mately the same capacitance in Ah. This in‐
Navigation
tance there in the event of a vehicle breakdown. formation can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
Roadside Assistance
cle.
The Roadside Assistance, refer to page 238
phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a 3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
connection to Roadside Assistance* can be es‐
tablished directly. Bodywork contact between vehicles
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise there
Warning triangle* is a danger of shorting.◀
The warning triangle is located in the cargo area.
Starting aid terminals
Connecting order
First aid kit* Connect the jumper cables in the correct
The first aid kit is located in a storage compart‐ order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury
ment on the right side in the cargo area. from sparking.◀
Some of the articles contained in the first aid
pouch have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐
Mobility
ularly and replace any items promptly.

Reference
281
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and

let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
If the vehicle being started has a diesel en‐
gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle
run for approx. 10 minutes.
The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine 2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started
compartment acts as the battery's positive ter‐ in the usual way.
minal. Fold open the cover. To do so, pull the tab. If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another
attempt in order to allow the discharged bat‐
tery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the Tow-starting and towing
negative terminal.
Observe applicable laws and regulations
Connecting jumper cables Observe applicable laws and regulations

for tow-starting and towing.◀
1. Fold open the cover of the BMW starting-aid
terminal. To do so, pull the tab. No additional passengers
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive Do not transport any passengers other
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the than the driver in a vehicle that is being towed.◀
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
Transporting the vehicle
3. Attach the other end of the cable to the pos‐
itive terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐ Note
sponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
to be started.
Therefore, contact a service center in the event
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative of a breakdown.
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding engine or Do not have the vehicle towed
body ground of the vehicle providing assis‐ Have your vehicle transported on a loading
tance. platform only; otherwise, damage may occur.◀
5. Attach the other end of the cable to the neg‐
ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
sponding engine or body ground of the ve‐
hicle to be started.
282
Tow truck Towing methods when towing other
At a glance
vehicles
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
Controls
the following:
▷ Clearance and maneuvering capability will
Do not tow with only the front or rear axle be sharply limited during cornering.
raised ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
Do not tow the BMW with just the front or rear is attached offset.
Driving tips
axle raised; otherwise, the wheels could lock up
and the transfer case could be damaged.◀ Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that
Do not lift the vehicle the tow rope is taut.
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may the vehicle components when towing, always
result.◀
Navigation
use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attaching the tow rope correctly
Towing other vehicles
Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
General information ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is se‐
cured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
Light towing vehicle
Your vehicle must not be lighter than the Tow fitting
vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be
possible to control vehicle response.◀ The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly front or rear of the BMW.
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow It is stored with the tool kit under the cargo floor
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may cover in the cargo area, refer to page 270.
cause damage.◀ Tow fitting, information on use
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐ ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
pending on local regulations. the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
identify the vehicle being towed by placing only.
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐ ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
dow.
Mobility
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.

Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the ve‐
hicle can occur.◀
Reference
283
Screw thread
Left/right cover in the bumper: press on the ar‐
row symbol on the cover.
BMW X5: front
BMW X6: front
Rear
Tow-starting
Note
Do not tow-start your vehicle.
Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
cannot be started by tow-starting.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐
edied.
284
Care
At a glance
Car washes ▷ Deactivate rain sensor, refer to page 67, to
prevent unintentional wiper action.
Notes ▷ BMW X5: deactivate the rear window wiper
and protect it from damage. Ask the car
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
wash operator about any necessary protec‐
Controls
When using steam jets or high-pressure tive measures.
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away
▷ Remove additional attachments, for in‐
and use a maximum temperature of 140 ℉/
stance a spoiler or telephone antenna, if
60 ℃.
there is a risk that these may be damaged.
Holding them too close or using excessively
high pressures or temperatures can cause dam‐ Guide rails in car washes
Driving tips
age or preliminary damage that may then lead to Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
long-term damage. than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
Follow the operating instructions for the high- could be damaged.◀
pressure washer.◀
Before driving into a car wash
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-
The vehicle is able to roll if the following steps
Navigation
pressure washers
are taken.
When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the exterior sensors and cameras, for Park 1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
Distance Control* or the backup camera*, for lock, even with Comfort Access.
instance, for extended periods of time and only 2. Engage transmission position N.
from a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀
3. Release the parking brake.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐ 4. Deactivating Automatic Hold, refer to
ter. page 64.
Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ve‐ 5. Switch the engine off.
hicle.
6. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
Washing in automatic car washes
Your vehicle can be washed in automatic car Mixed tires*
washes right from the start.
Note the vehicle width
Give preference to cloth car washes or those
Before driving into a car wash, make sure
that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint
that the vehicle width is not too large for the car
damage.
wash, as otherwise the vehicle and the car wash
could be damaged.◀
Notes
Mobility
Note the following:

Headlamps
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
caustic cleansers.
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due to
may be damaged, depending on the width of
insects, with shampoo and wash off with
the vehicle.
Reference
water.
285
Care ▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
ice scraper. grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
After washing the vehicle Suitable care products are available from the
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes service center.
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can
be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can Upholstery material care
occur. Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a
soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable
Vehicle care interior cleaner.
Car care products Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
BMW recommends using cleaning and care
terial vigorously.
products from BMW, since these have been
tested and approved. Damage from Velcro® fasteners
Car care and cleaning products Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other
articles of clothing can damage the seat covers.
Follow the instructions on the container.
Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows.
Caring for special components
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
cles. Light-alloy wheels
Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐ Use wheel cleaner, particularly during the winter
gerous and harmful to your health.◀ months. Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly
alkaline or abrasive cleaners, or steam jets
Vehicle paint above 140 ℉/60 ℃; follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention.
Chrome surfaces*
Environmental influences can act on the vehicle
Carefully clean components such as the radiator
paint. Tailor the frequency and extent of your car
grille or door handles with an ample supply of
care to these influences.
water, possibly with shampoo added, particu‐
larly when they have been exposed to road salt.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a Aluminum running boards*
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
A rust film on the aluminum running boards can
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime be removed with a special cleaning agent.
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather Rubber components
surface.
Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleans‐
To guard against discoloration, such as from ers.
clothing, provide leather care roughly every two
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sil‐
months.
icon-containing car care products in order to
Clean light-colored leather more frequently as avoid damage or reduced noise damping.
dust and dirt are more noticeable.
286
Fine wood parts* Only use floor mats that have been approved for
At a glance
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened
cloth. again when they are returned after being re‐
moved, such as for cleaning.◀
Plastic components
Floor mats can be removed from the passenger
These include: compartment for cleaning.
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
Controls
When returning the floor mats, secure them
▷ Headliner. again to prevent slipping.
▷ Lamp lenses. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
▷ Instrument cluster cover. microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To
prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
▷ Matte black spray-coated components.
in the direction of travel only.
Driving tips
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Moisten the cloth lightly and use plastic Sensors/cameras
cleanser, if necessary. To clean sensors or cameras, use a cloth mois‐
Do not soak the headliner. tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
Displays/screens
or solvents
Navigation
Use a microfiber cloth to clean the Control Dis‐
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
play or instrument cluster, for example.
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to Cleaning displays
surface damage.◀ Do not use chemical or household cleans‐
ers.
Safety belts Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit.
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
thus have a negative impact on safety. ces or electrical components.
No chemical cleaning Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
the webbing.◀ can result.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety

Long-term vehicle storage
belts clipped into their buckles.
Your service center can advise you on what to
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts
consider when storing the vehicle for longer
until they are dry.
than three months.
Carpets and floor mats*

No objects in the area around the pedals
Mobility
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
Reference
mats or other objects.
287
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice activation system, and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.

Technical data
Technical data
Engine specifications
BMW X5 X5 xDrive35i X5 xDrive50i X5 xDrive35d
Displacement cu in/ 182/2,979 268/4,395 183/2,993

cm³
No. of cylinders 6 8 6
Maximum output hp 300 400 265
at engine speed rpm 5,800-6,250 5,500-6,400 4,200
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 300/407 450/610 425/580
at engine speed rpm 1,300-5,000 1,750-4,500 1,750-2,250
BMW X6 X6 xDrive35i X6 xDrive50i
Displacement cu in/ 182/2,979 268/4,395

cm³
No. of cylinders 6 8
Maximum output hp 300 400
at engine speed rpm 5,800-6,200 5,500-6,400
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 300/407 450/610
at engine speed rpm 1,300-5,000 1,750-4,500
290
Dimensions
At a glance
BMW X5
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
All dimensions given in inches/mm. With mixed tires* the vehicle width may exceed
Smallest turning circle dia.: 42.0 ft/12.8 m the specified dimension.
Mobility
Reference
291
BMW X6
Technical data
All dimensions given in inches/mm. With mixed tires* the vehicle width may exceed
Smallest turning circle dia.: 42.0 ft/12.8 m the specified dimension.
Height with roof rack*: 66.9 in/1,699 mm
Weights
Approved gross vehicle lbs/kg 6,371/2,890 6,669/3,025 6,581/2,985

weight
without 3rd row seats lbs/kg 6,052/2,745 6,327/2,870 6,261/2,840
Load lbs/kg 1,290/585 1,290/585 1,290/585
292
At a glance
without 3rd row seats lbs/kg 1,102/500 1,102/500 1,102/500
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,800/1,270 3,020/1,370 2,976/1,350
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,792/1,720 3,858/1,750 3,858/1,750
Controls
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100 220/100 220/100
Trunk capacity cu ft/li‐ 35.8-75.2/620-1, 35.8-75.2/620‐ 35.8-75.2/620-1,

ter 750 1,750 750
Driving tips
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
BMW X6 X6 xDrive35i X6 xDrive50i
Approved gross vehicle lbs/kg 6,008/2,725 6,250/2,835

weight
Navigation
Load lbs/kg 937/425 937/425
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,822/1,280 3,042/1,380
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,263/1,480 3,351/1,520
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100 220/100
Trunk capacity cu ft/li‐ 25.6-59.7/570‐ 25.6-59.7/570-1,

ter 1,450 450
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or

the gross vehicle weight.
Capacities
BMW X5 Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters Approx. 22.4/85 Fuel specifications, refer to

page 248
Mobility
Including reserve of
X5 xDrive35i, X5 xDrive35d US gal/liters approx. 2.1/8

Reference
293
Technical data BMW X5 Notes
X5 xDrive50i US gal/liters approx. 2.6/10
Window washer system US qt/liters approx. 6.9/6.5 Details, refer to page 68

With headlamp washer sys‐
tem
BMW X6 Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters Approx. 22.4/85 Fuel specifications, refer to

page 248
Including reserve of
Window washer system US qt/liters approx. 6.9/6.5 Details, refer to page 68

With headlamp washer sys‐
tem
294
Short commands for voice activation
At a glance
system*
General information The following short commands apply to vehicles
equipped with a voice activation system. They
Instructions for voice activation system, refer to have no function in vehicles in which only the
page 24. mobile phone is operated using the voice.
Controls
To have the available spoken instructions read
out loud: ›Voice commands‹
Adjusting
Driving tips
Vehicle
Function Command
Opens the main menu. ›Main menu‹
Open the options. ›Options‹
Navigation
Open the settings. ›Settings‹
Settings on the Control Display. ›Control display‹
Open the time and date. ›Time and date‹
Open the language and units. ›Language and units‹
Open the speed limit. ›Speed‹
Open the light. ›Lighting‹
Open the door lock. ›Door locks‹
Equipment*
Function Command
Open the air conditioning settings. ›Climate‹
Open the Head-up Display. ›head up display‹
Enable the rear. ›Allow rear control‹

Mobility
Reference
295
Vehicle information
Short commands for voice activation system
Computer
Function Command
Open the computer. ›Onboard info‹
Open the trip computer. ›Trip computer‹
Vehicle
Function Command
Open the vehicle information. ›Vehicle info‹
Open the vehicle status. ›Vehicle status‹
Navigation*
General information
Function Command
Navigation menu. ›Navigation‹
Open the destination entry. ›Enter address‹
Enter the address. ›Enter address‹
Open destination guidance. ›Guidance‹
Start destination guidance. ›Start guidance‹
Terminate destination guidance. ›Stop guidance‹
Open the home address. ›Home address‹
Open the route criteria. ›Route preference‹
Open the route. ›Route information‹
Switch on the spoken instruction. ›Switch on voice instructions‹
Repeat the spoken instruction. ›Repeat voice instructions‹
Switch off the spoken instruction. ›Switch off voice instructions‹
Display the address book. ›Address book‹
Display the most recent destinations. ›Last destinations‹
296
Function Command
At a glance
Open the traffic bulletins. ›Traffic Info‹
Special destinations. ›Points of interest‹
Map
Function Command
Controls
Display the map. ›Map‹
Map facing north. ›Map facing north‹
Map facing the direction of travel. ›Map in direction of travel‹
Driving tips
Perspective map. ›Map perspective view‹
Automatic scaling of the map. ›Map with automatic scaling‹
Scale...feet. ›Map scale ... feet‹
Scale...meters. ›Map scale ... meters‹ e.g., map scale

100 meters
Navigation
Scale...kilometers. ›Map scale ... kilometers‹ e.g., map
scale 5 kilometers
Scale...miles. ›Map scale ... miles‹ e.g., map scale

5 miles
Split screen settings
Function Command
Split screen. ›Switch on splitscreen‹
Switch off the split screen. ›Turn off split screen‹
Adjust the split screen. ›Split screen content‹
Split screen, map facing north. ›Split screen map facing north‹
Split screen, current position. ›Split screen current position‹
Split screen, facing the direction of travel. ›Split screen map in direction of
travel‹
Mobility
Split screen, perspective. ›Split screen perspective‹
Split screen, expanded intersection zoom. ›Splitscreen Exit ramp view‹
Split screen scale...feet. ›Split screen scale ... feet‹ e.g., split
screen scale 100 feet
Reference
297
Short commands for voice activation system Function Command
Split screen scale...meters. ›Split screen scale ... meters‹ e.g., split
screen scale 100 meters
Split screen scale...kilometers. ›Split screen scale ... kilometers‹ e.g.,

split screen scale 5 kilometers
Split screen scale...miles. ›Split screen scale ... miles‹ e.g., split
screen scale 5 miles
Split screen, highlight the traffic situation. ›Split screen, Traffic conditions‹
Split screen, computer. ›Split screen on board info‹
Split screen, trip computer. ›Splitscreen trip computer‹
Split screen, scale automatically. ›Split screen automatic scaling‹
Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
Function Command
Enter a new destination. ›Enter address‹
Trip list. ›Stored trips‹
Radio
FM
Function Command
Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... megahertz‹ e.g.,

93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5
Open the radio. ›Radio‹
Open the FM stations. ›F M‹
Open the manual search. ›Manual‹
Select a frequency range. ›Select frequency‹
Open a station. ›Select station‹
298
AM
At a glance
Function Command
Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... Kilohertz‹ e.g., fre‐

quency 753 or 753 kilohertz
Open the AM stations. ›A M‹
Open the manual search. ›Manual‹
Controls
Satellite radio*
Function Command
Driving tips
Open the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio‹
Switch on the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio on‹
Select a satellite radio channel. ›Select satellite radio‹ e.g., satellite

radio channel 2
Stored stations
Navigation
Function Command
Open the stored stations. ›Presets‹
Choose a stored station. ›Select preset‹
Select a stored station. ›Preset ...‹ e.g., stored station 2
CD/multimedia*
CD/DVD drive
Function Command
Select a track. ›Track ...‹ e.g., track 5

or
›C D track ...‹ e. g., CD track 5
Play back a CD. ›C D on‹

Mobility
Select a CD. ›Select C D‹
Select a CD and track. ›C D ... track ...‹ e.g., CD 3 track 5
Open the CD and Multimedia menu. ›C D and multimedia‹

Reference
299
Short commands for voice activation system Function Command
CD and DVD. ›C D‹
Select a DVD. ›D V D ...‹ e.g., DVD 3
Display the entertainment details on a split screen*. ›Entertainment details‹
Music collection
Function Command
Search for music, open a menu. ›Music search‹
Open the current playback. ›Current playback‹
Open the music collection. ›Music collection‹
Play back the music collection. ›Music collection on‹
Play back the most frequently played tracks. ›Top fifty‹
External devices
Function Command
Open the external devices. ›External devices‹
Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
Tone
Function Command
Open the tone settings. ›Tone‹
Telephone*
Function Command
Dial a phone number. ›Dial number‹
Open the Telephone menu. ›Telephone‹
Display the phone book. ›Phonebook‹
Redialing. ›Redial‹
Display received calls. ›Received calls‹
300
Function Command
At a glance
List of messages. ›Messages‹
Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
Office*
Controls
Function Command
Open the Office menu. ›Office‹
Display Office Today. ›Current office‹
Driving tips
Display the contacts. ›Contacts‹
Display the messages. ›Messages‹
Display the calendar. ›Calendar‹
Display the tasks. ›Tasks‹
Navigation
Display the reminders. ›Reminders‹
Contacts*
Function Command
Select a name. ›Choose name‹
My contacts. ›My contacts‹
Open the contacts. ›Contacts‹
New contact. ›New contact‹
ConnectedDrive* or BMW Assist*
Function Command
Open BMW Assist. ›B M W Assist‹

Mobility
Open ConnectedDrive. ›Connected Drive‹
Open BMW Online. ›B M W Online‹

Reference
301
Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
0-9 Air distribution, auto‐ Approved axle loads, refer to
matic 120, 125 Weights 292
3rd row seats 47 Air distribution, manual 121 Approved engine oils 266
Air drying, refer to Cooling Approved gross vehicle
A function 122 weight, refer to Weights 292
Air flow rate 121 Armrest, refer to Center arm‐
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ Air flow rate, blower, refer to Air rest 134
tem 96 volume 125 Arrival time, refer to Com‐
ACC Active Cruise Con‐ Airing, refer to Ventilation 123 puter 74
trol 102 Air pressure, refer to Tire infla‐ Ashtray 130
Access to 3rd row seats 47 tion pressure 252 Ashtray, front 130
Accident, refer to Emergency Air vents 119 Ashtray, rear 130
Request, initiating 280 Air vents, refer to Ventila‐ Assist 237
Acoustic signal, refer to Check tion 123 Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
Control 76 AKI, refer to Fuel specifica‐ tance 281
Activated-charcoal filter 124 tions 248 Assistance with driving off, re‐
Active Cruise Control Alarm system 39 fer to Drive-off assistant 100
ACC 102 Alarm system Assistance with starting en‐
Active cruise control, indicator – Avoiding unintentional gine, refer to Jump-start‐
lamp 105 alarms 40 ing 281
Active Cruise Control, radar – Ending an alarm 39 Audio CD with rear DVD sys‐
sensor 106 – Interior motion sensor 40 tem 206
– Tilt alarm sensor 40
Active Cruise Control, select‐ Audio device, external 134
All around the headliner 17
ing the distance 104 Audio playback 181
All-season tires, refer to Win‐
Active Cruise Control, warning Audio playback, Blue‐
ter tires 261
lamps 105 tooth 196
All-wheel drive, refer to
Active seat 49 Automatic, air distribu‐
xDrive 98
Active seat ventilation 49 tion 120, 125
Alternating-code hand-held
Active steering 100 Automatic air distribution 125
transmitter 128
Adaptive brake lights, refer to Automatic, air flow rate 120
AM/FM station 174
Brake force display 94 Automatic car wash 285
Announcement, navigation,
Adaptive Drive 99 Automatic climate con‐
refer to Spoken instruc‐
Adaptive fixing system 137 trol 119
tions 163
Adaptive light control 82 Automatic climate control, au‐
Antifreeze, coolant 267
Additional telephone 216 tomatic air distribu‐
Antifreeze, washer fluid 68
Additives, coolant 267 tion 120, 125
Antilock Brake System,
Additives, engine oil 266 Automatic climate control, in
ABS 96
After washing vehicle 286 rear 124
Anti-slip control, refer to Dy‐
Airbags 86 Automatic climate control in
namic Stability Control
Airbags, indicator/warning rear, activating on Control
DSC 96
light 88 Display 124
Anti-theft protection 30
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ Automatic climate control in
Appointments 232
culated air mode 122 rear, air supply 125
302
Automatic climate control in B BMW EfficientDynamics, refer
At a glance
rear, deactivating on Control to Saving fuel 148
Display 124 Backrest curvature, refer to BMW homepage 6
Automatic climate control in Lumbar support 46 BMW Internet page 6
rear, switching off 125 Backrest width 46 BMW maintenance sys‐
Automatic climate control, Back seats, adjusting the head tem 268
switching off 123, 125 restraints 52 BMW Online 239
Automatic climate control, Backup camera 112 BMW TeleService 237
ventilation in rear 123 Backup camera, cleaning 114 Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐
Controls
Automatic climate control, Backup camera, obstacle pholder 135
with 2-zone control 120 marking 113 Brake assistant 96
Automatic climate control, Backup camera, pathway Brake discs, breaking in 142
with 4-zone control 124 lines 113 Brake fluid, refer to Service re‐
Automatic, cruise control 108 Backup camera, turning quirements 75
Driving tips
Automatic Cruise Control 102 lines 113 Brake force display 94
Automatic Curb Monitor 54 Balance 172 Brake force distribution, elec‐
Automatic headlamp con‐ Band-aids, refer to First aid tronic 96
trol 81, 82 kit 281 Brake lamps, brake force dis‐
Automatic Hold 64 Bass 172 play 94
Automatic Hold, activating 64 Battery Brake lights, adaptive 94
Automatic Hold, deactivat‐ – Remote control 28 Brake pads, breaking in 142
Navigation
ing 64 Battery change, remote con‐ Brakes, BMW maintenance
Automatic Hold, parking 65 trol for rear DVD system 202 system 268
Automatic recirculated air Battery disposal 278 Brakes, parking brake 63
control 122 Battery, refer to Vehicle bat‐ Brakes, service require‐
Automatic Soft Closing, tery 278 ments 75
doors 33 Battery replacement, remote Brake system, BMW mainte‐
Automatic Soft Closing, tail‐ control for vehicle 39 nance system 268
gate 34 Before entering the car Braking, notes 143
Automatic tailgate opera‐ wash 285 Breakdown assistance 281
tion 34, 36 Belts, refer to Safety belts 50 Breakdown, transporting the
Automatic transmission with Belt tensioners, refer to Safety vehicle 282
Steptronic 69 belts 50 Breaking in 142
Automatic transmission with Beverage holder, refer to Cu‐ Brightness, on the Control
Steptronic pholder 135 Display 80
– Kickdown 69 Black and white map dis‐ Bulb replacement, refer to
AUTO program with automatic play 166 Lamp and bulb replace‐
climate control 120, 125 Blower, refer to Air flow ment 270
AUX-IN port 134, 192 rate 121 Button for starting the engine,
Average fuel consumption 74 Bluetooth audio 196 refer to Start/Stop button 61
Average fuel consumption, Bluetooth connection, activat‐
setting the units 80 ing/deactivating 217 C
Mobility
Average speed 73 BMW Advanced Diesel 249

Average speed, refer to Com‐ BMW Apps 241 Calendar 232
puter 73 BMW Apps, video play‐ Calibration, driver's seat 51
Axle loads, refer to back 195 California Proposition 65
Weights 292 BMW Assist 237 Warning 7
BMW Assist, refer to Connec‐ Camera, care 287
Reference
tedDrive 237
303
Everything from A to Z Camera, refer to Backup cam‐ Car wash 285 Child seats, refer to Transport‐
era 112 Catalytic converter, refer to ing children safely 56
Camera, Side View 117 Hot exhaust system 142 Chrome parts, care 286
Camera, Top View 116 CBC, refer to Cornering Brake Cigarette lighter, connecting
Can holder, refer to Cu‐ Control 96 electrical devices 131
pholder 135 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ Cigarette lighter, refer to
Car battery, refer to Vehicle ice 268 Lighter 130
battery 278 CD/DVD 181 Cigarette lighter socket 131
Car care products 286 CD/DVD changer 185 Circulation of air, refer to Re‐
Care 285 CD/DVD in rear 201 circulated air mode 122
Care, displays 287 CD/DVD notes 187 Cleaning, displays 287
Care, vehicle 286 CD, refer to Playing audio Cleaning your BMW, refer to
Cargo 144 tracks, rear DVD system 206 Care 285
Cargo area CDs, storing 188 Clock 71
– Comfort Access 38 Cell phone 216 Clock, 12h/24h mode 79
Cargo area, capacities 292 Cell phone, installation loca‐ Closing
Cargo area, enlarging 133 tion, refer to Center arm‐ – From the inside 33
Cargo area lamp, refer to Inte‐ rest 134 – From the outside 30
rior lamps 84 Center armrest, front 134 Clothes hooks 135
Cargo area lid, refer to Tail‐ Center armrest, rear 135 Cockpit 12
gate 33, 36 Center brake lamp 273, 275 Cold start, refer to Starting the
Cargo area, opening/closing, Center console, refer to engine 62
refer to Lower tailgate 36 Around the center con‐ Combination instrument, refer
Cargo area, opening/closing, sole 16 to Instrument cluster 14
refer to Tailgate 33, 36 Central locking Combination switch, refer to
Cargo area, opening from the – Comfort Access 37 Turn signal/high beams/
inside 34 – From the inside 33 headlamp flasher 66
Cargo area, opening from the – Setting the unlocking char‐ Combination switch, refer to
outside 34 acteristics 30 Washer/wiper system 67
Cargo area, refer to Cargo Central locking system Comfort Access
area 132 – From the outside 29 – Battery replacement 39
– Principle 29 Comfort area, refer to Around
Cargo cover, refer to Luggage
Central screen, refer to Control the center console 16
compartment roller
Display 19 Compact wheel, inflation pres‐
cover 132
Changes, technical, refer to sure 252, 253
Cargo, securing with ski bag,
Safety 6 Compartment for remote con‐
refer to Securing cargo 139
Changing wheels/tires 260 trol, refer to Ignition lock 61
Cargo straps, securing
Chassis number, refer to En‐ Compartments, refer to Stor‐
cargo 146
gine compartment 263 age compartments 134, 135
Car key, refer to Integrated
Check Control 76 Compass, digital 129
key/remote control 28
Children, transporting 56 Computer 73
Carpet, care 287
Child restraint fixing system Computer, displaying informa‐
Car phone, installation loca‐
LATCH 57 tion 73
tion, refer to Center arm‐
Child restraint fixing sys‐ Computer, displays on the
rest 134
tems 56 Control Display 74
Car phone, refer to Tele‐
Child restraint fixing systems, Concierge service 238
phone 216
mounting 56 Condensation on windows, re‐
Car vacuum cleaner, connect‐
Child safety locks 60 moving 121
ing, refer to Connecting elec‐
Child seat, mounting 56
trical devices 131
304
Condensation under the vehi‐ Curb weight, refer to Displacement, refer to Engine
At a glance
cle 144 Weights 292 data 290
Condition Based Service Current fuel consumption 72 Display in front wind‐
CBS 268 Current location, storing 155 shield 117
Confirmation signals for lock‐ Curve lights, refer to Adaptive Display lighting, refer to Instru‐
ing/unlocking the vehicle 31 light control 82 ment lighting 84
ConnectedDrive 237 Cylinders, number of, refer to Displays and controls 12
Connecting, mobile phone, re‐ Engine data 290 Displays, care 287
fer to Pairing the mobile Displays, cleaning 287
Controls
phone 216 D Displays, refer to Instrument
Consumption, refer to Aver‐ cluster 14
age fuel consumption 74 Dashboard lighting, refer to In‐ Disposal, coolant 267
Contacts 227, 235 strument lighting 84 Disposal, vehicle battery 278
Control Display 19 Dashboard, refer to Cock‐ Distance control, refer to Ac‐
Driving tips
Control Display, care 287 pit 12 tive Cruise Control 102
Control Display, setting the Data memory 269 Distance, selecting, with Ac‐
brightness 80 Data, technical 290 tive Cruise Control 104
Controller, refer to Con‐ Date 71 Distance warning, refer to Park
trols 18 Date, display format 79 Distance Control PDC 110
Controls and displays 12 Date, retrieving 71 Divided screen view, split
Controls, rear DVD sys‐ Date, setting 79 screen 22
Navigation
tem 200 Daytime running lights 82 Door key, refer to Remote con‐
Control systems, driving sta‐ Defroster, rear window 121 trol with integrated key 28
bility 96 Defrosting windows 121 Door lock 32
Convenient operation Defrost setting, refer to De‐ Doors, manual operation 32
– Glass sunroof 30, 32 frosting windows 121 Doors, unlocking and locking
– Window 30 Destination entry via the ad‐ – Confirmation signals 31
Coolant 267 dress book 154 – From the inside 33
Coolant, checking the Destination guidance 161 – From the outside 30
level 267 Destination guidance with in‐ DOT Quality Grades 258
Coolant temperature 72 termediate destinations 159 Downhill control 98
Cooling function, switching on Destination input, naviga‐ Draft-free ventilation 123
and off 122 tion 153 Drive-off assistant 100
Cooling, maximum 122 Diesel exhaust fluid, at low Driver's seat, calibrating 51
Cooling system, refer to Cool‐ temperatures 250 Driving away on inclines, refer
ant 267 Diesel exhaust fluid, at mini‐ to Drive-off assistant 100
Cornering Brake Control mum 249 Driving notes, breaking in 142
CBC 96 Diesel exhaust fluid, having re‐ Driving notes, general 142
Corrosion on brake discs 144 filled 250 Driving on poor roads 147
Courtesy lamps, refer to Inte‐ Diesel exhaust fluid, refilling Driving stability control sys‐
rior lamps 84 yourself 250 tems 96
Cradle for telephone or mobile Diesel particulate filter 143 Driving through water 143
Mobility
phone, refer to Snap-in Digital clock 71 Driving tips, refer to Driving

adapter 225 Digital compass 129 notes 142
Cruise control 108 Digital radio 175 Dry air, refer to Cooling func‐
Cruise control Dimming mirrors 55 tion 122
– Malfunction 110 Directional indicators, refer to DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
Cruise control, active 102 Turn signals 66 trol 96
Reference
Cupholder 135
305
Everything from A to Z DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ Energy-conscious driving, re‐ ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
trol 97 fer to Current fuel consump‐ gram, refer to Dynamic Sta‐
DTMF suffix dialing 222 tion 72 bility Control DSC 96
DVD/CD 181 Energy, saving, refer to Saving Exchanging wheels/tires 260
DVDs, storing 188 fuel 148 Exhaust system 142
DVD system in rear 200 Engine, breaking in 142 Exterior mirrors 53
DVD, video 183 Engine compartment 263 Exterior mirrors, adjusting 53
Dynamic destination guid‐ Engine coolant, refer to Cool‐ Exterior mirrors, automatic
ance 167 ant 267 dimming 55
Dynamic Performance Con‐ Engine oil, adding 266 Exterior mirrors, automatic
trol 98 Engine oil, additives, refer to heating 54
Dynamic Stability Control Approved engine oils 266 Exterior mirrors, folding in and
DSC 96 Engine oil, alternative oil out 54
Dynamic Traction Control types 266 External audio device 134
DTC 97 Engine oil, BMW maintenance External devices 192
system 268 External temperature dis‐
E Engine oil change intervals, re‐ play 71
fer to Service require‐ External temperature display,
Easy entry/exit 55 ments 75 changing the units of meas‐
EfficientDynamics, refer to Engine oil, checking the ure, changing the units of
Saving fuel 148 level 265 measure on the Control Dis‐
Electrical malfunction Engine oil, filling capacity 293 play 80
– Door lock 32 Engine oil temperature 72 External temperature warn‐
– Driver's door 32 Engine oil types, alterna‐ ing 71
– Fuel filler flap 246 tive 266 Eyes for securing cargo 146
Electrical malfunction of upper Engine oil types, ap‐
tailgate 34 proved 266 F
Electrical malfunction, parking Engine, overheating, refer to
brake 65 Coolant temperature 72 Fader 172
Electric seat adjustment 46 Engine power, refer to Engine Failure messages, refer to
Electric steering wheel adjust‐ data 290 Check Control 76
ment 55 Engine, RPM 290 False alarm
Electronic brake-force distri‐ Engine start, assistance 281 – Avoiding unintentional
bution 96 Engine, starting 62 alarms 40
Electronic engine oil level Engine, starting – Ending an alarm 39
check 265 – Comfort Access 37 Fastening safety belts, refer to
Electronic Stability Program Engine, starting, Start/Stop Safety belts 50
ESP, refer to Dynamic Stabil‐ button 61 Fault messages, refer to
ity Control DSC 96 Engine, stopping, Start/Stop Check Control 76
Emergency operation button 61 Filling capacities 293
– Door lock, refer to Manual Engine, switching off 62 Filter, refer to Microfilter/acti‐
operation 32 Entry lamps, refer to Interior vated-charcoal filter 124
Emergency operation, fuel lamps 84 Fine wood, care 287
filler flap, unlocking man‐ Environmentally friendly driv‐ First aid kit 281
ually 246 ing, refer to Current fuel con‐ Fitting for towing 283
Emergency Request 280 sumption 72 Fixing system, adaptive 137
Emergency service, refer to Equalizer 172 Flashing when locking/unlock‐
Roadside Assistance 281 Equipment, interior 127 ing 31
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 88
306
Flat Tire Monitor FTM, snow Fuel, quality 248 H
At a glance
chains 261 Fuel, saving 148
Flat tire, run-flat tires 261 Fuel, specifications 248 Handbrake, refer to Parking
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor Fuel tank capacity, refer to Fill‐ brake 63
TPM 90 ing capacities 293 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
Flat tire, warning lamp 89, 91 Fuel tank contents, refer to nating code 128
Flat tire, wheel change 275 Filling capacities 293 Hands-free microphone 16
Flooding, refer to Driving Fuel tank, refer to Filling ca‐ Hazard warning sys‐
through water 143 pacities 293 tem 16, 280
Controls
Floor carpet, care 287 Fuse 279 HDC Hill Descent Control 98
Floor mats, care 287 HD Radio 175
FM/AM station 174 G Head airbags 86
Fog on windows, remov‐ Headlamp control, auto‐
ing 121 Garage door opener, refer to matic 81, 82
Driving tips
Foldable rear seat back‐ Integrated universal remote Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
rest 133 control 127 ture 81
Foot brake 143 Gasoline gauge, refer to Fuel Headlamp flasher 66, 83
Footwell lamps, refer to Inte‐ gauge 73 Headlamp flasher, indicator
rior lamps 84 Gasoline, refer to Required lamp 15
For your own safety 6 fuel 248 Headlamps 81
Four-wheel drive, refer to Gas station recommenda‐ Headlamps, care 285
Navigation
xDrive 98 tion 162 Headlamps, cleaning 67
Front airbags 86 Gear change, automatic trans‐ Headlamps, cleaning, washer
Front fog lamps 84 mission with Steptronic 70 fluid 68
Front fog lamps, indicator Gear change, via shift pad‐ Headliner 17
lamp 84 dles 70 Headphones, connecting, rear
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 88 General driving notes 142 DVD system 201
Fuel 248 Glass sunroof, closing 43 Head restraints 51
Fuel Glass sunroof, electric Head-up Display 117
– Refer to Average fuel con‐ – Convenient operation 30 Head-up Display, care 287
sumption 74 – Remote control 30 Heatable rear window 121
Fuel, average consump‐ Glass sunroof, initializing 44 Heating 119
tion 74 Glass sunroof, opening 43 Heating
Fuel cap 246 Glass sunroof, pinch protec‐ – Seats 48
Fuel cap, closing 246 tion 44 Heating, interior 119
Fuel consumption display Glass sunroof, power fail‐ Heating, mirrors 54
– Average fuel consump‐ ure 44 Heating, residual heat 122
tion 74 Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐ Heating with the engine
Fuel consumption display, amic glass sunroof 42 switched off, refer to Resid‐
current fuel consumption 72 Glass sunroof, tilting 43 ual heat 122
Fuel-efficient driving, refer to Glove compartment 134 Heavy cargo, refer to Stowing
Current fuel consumption 72 Glove compartment cargo 145
Mobility
Fuel filler flap, closing 246 – USB interface 134 Height, refer to Dimen‐
Fuel filler flap, opening 246 Glove compartment, light‐ sions 291
Fuel filler flap, unlocking in ing 134 High-beam Assistant 83
case of an electrical malfunc‐ GPS navigation, refer to Navi‐ High beams 83
tion 246 gation system 152 High beams/low beams, auto‐
Fuel gauge 73 Gross vehicle weight, refer to matic, refer to High-beam
Reference
Fuel, high-quality brands 248 Weights 292 Assistant 83
307
Everything from A to Z High beams, indicator Ignition, switched off 61 Interior temperature, setting,
lamp 15 Ignition, switched on 61 automatic climate con‐
High-pressure washers 285 Images, displaying, rear DVD trol 119
Hill Descent Control HDC 98 system 208 Intermediate destinations 159
Hill drive-off assistant, refer to Indication of a flat tire 89, 91 Internet page 6
Drive-off assistant 100 Indicator and warning Intersection, entering for navi‐
Hills 144 lamps 15 gation 154
Holder for beverages 135 Inflation pressure monitor, re‐ iPod/iPhone 193
Holder for remote control, re‐ fer to Flat Tire Monitor 88
fer to Ignition lock 61 Inflation pressure, refer to Tire J
Homepage 6 inflation pressure 252
Hood 264 Information on the navigation Jacking points for the vehicle
Hood, opening 264 data 152 jack 276
Horn 12 Initialization after power fail‐ Jack, refer to Vehicle jack 276
Hot exhaust system 142 ure 278 Joystick, refer to Selector
Hotline 240 Initializing lever 69
House number, entering for – Compass, refer to Calibrat‐ Jump-starting 281
navigation 154 ing 129
– Panoramic glass sunroof 43
Hydraulic brake assistant 96 K
Hydroplaning 143 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 89 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
Initializing, glass sunroof 44
I Access 37
Initializing, refer to Setting the Keyless opening and closing,
Ice warning, refer to External date 79 refer to Comfort Access 37
temperature warning 71 Initializing, refer to Setting the Key Memory, refer to Personal
Icy roads, refer to External time 79 Profile 28
temperature warning 71 Initializing, Tire Pressure Mon‐ Key, refer to Integrated key/re‐
Identification marks, tires 258 itor TPM 91 mote control 28
iDrive 18 Installation location, tele‐ Kickdown
iDrive, changing settings 78 phone 134 – Automatic transmission with
iDrive, changing the lan‐ Instrument cluster 14 Steptronic 69
guage 80 Instrument lighting 84 Knocking control 248
iDrive, changing the units of Instrument panel, refer to In‐
measure and display for‐ strument cluster 14 L
mat 80 Instruments, refer to Cock‐
iDrive, setting the bright‐ pit 12 Label, run-flat tire 261
ness 80 Integrated key 28 Lamp and bulb replacement,
iDrive, setting the date 79 Integrated universal remote lamp replacement 270
iDrive, setting the time 79 control 127 Lamps 81
Ignition 61 Interactive map 157 Lamps, automatic headlamp
Ignition key position 1, refer to Interior equipment 127 control 81, 82
Radio ready state 61 Interior lamps 84 Lamps, High-beam Assis‐
Ignition key position 2, refer to Interior lamps tant 83
– Remote control 30 Lamps, parking lamps/low
Ignition on 61
Interior mirror 54 beams 81
Ignition key, refer to Remote
Interior rearview mirror, auto‐ Lamps, replacing, refer to
control with integrated
matic dimming 55 Lamp and bulb replace‐
key 28
Interior rearview mirror, com‐ ment 270
Ignition lock 61
pass 129 Lane departure warning 93
308
Lane margin, warning 93 Low beams Manual operation, Top
At a glance
Language, changing on Con‐ – Automatic 82 View 115
trol Display 80 Low beams, automatic 81 Map, destination entry 157
Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer to Low beams, automatic, refer to Map display in black and
Safety belts 50 High-beam Assistant 83 white 166
Lashing eyes, securing Lower back support, refer to Map in split screen 164
cargo 146 Lumbar support 46 Map view 163
LATCH child restraint fixing Lower tailgate 36 Marking on approved
system 57 Low-sulfur diesel 248 tires 260
Controls
Leather, care 286 Luggage compartment roller Master key, refer to Remote
LEDs, light-emitting di‐ cover 132 control with integrated
odes 271 Luggage rack, refer to Roof- key 28
Length, refer to Dimen‐ mounted luggage rack 147 Maximum cooling 122
sions 291 Lumbar support 46 Maximum speed, winter
Driving tips
Letters and numbers, enter‐ tires 261
ing 23 M Medical kit, refer to First aid
License plate lamps, replacing kit 281
bulbs 273, 275 Main inspection, refer to Serv‐ Memory, refer to Seat and mir‐
Light-alloy wheels, care 286 ice requirements 75 ror memory 53
Light-emitting diodes, Maintenance 268 Menus, operating, iDrive 18
LEDs 271 Maintenance, refer to Service Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐
Navigation
Lighter 130 booklet ing concept 19
Lighting Maintenance, refer to Service Message list, traffic bulle‐
– Instruments 84 requirements 75 tins 165
Lighting, vehicle, refer to Maintenance require‐ Messages 230
Lamps 81 ments 268 Microfilter 124
Light switch 81 Maintenance system Minimum tread, tires 259
Limit, refer to Speed limit 78 BMW 268 Mirror
Load 145 Malfunction – Mirror memory, refer to Seat
Loading 144 – Door lock 32 and mirror memory 53
Lock buttons, doors, refer to – Fuel filler flap 246 Mirrors 53
Locking 33 Malfunction of upper tail‐ Mirrors
Locking gate 34 – Automatic Curb Monitor 54
– From the inside 33 Malfunction, parking brake 65 Mirrors, folding in and out 54
– From the outside 30 Malfunction warnings, refer to Mirrors, heating 54
– Setting the confirmation sig‐ Check Control 76 Mirrors, interior mirror 54
nals 31 Manual air distribution 121 Mobile communication devi‐
– Without remote control, refer Manual mode, automatic ces in the vehicle 143
to Comfort Access 37 transmission with Step‐ Mobile phone, installation lo‐
Locking the vehicle tronic 70 cation, refer to Center arm‐
– From the inside 33 Manual operation rest 134
– From the outside 30 – Door lock 32 Mobile phone, refer to Tele‐
Locks, doors, and win‐
Mobility
– Driver's door 32 phone 216

dows 60 Manual operation, fuel filler Modifications, technical, refer
Longlife oils, alternative oil flap 246 to Safety 6
types 266 Manual operation of upper tail‐ Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐
Longlife oils, refer to Approved gate 34 play 19
engine oils 266 Manual operation, Side Mounting of child restraint fix‐
Low beams 81
Reference
View 116 ing systems 56
309
Everything from A to Z MP3 player 192 Opening and closing Particulate filter, refer to Diesel
Multimedia 181 – Comfort Access 37 particulate filter 143
Music collection 188 – From the inside 33 Passenger airbags, deactivat‐
Music search 189 – From the outside 30 ing 87
Music, storing 188 – Using the door lock 32 Passenger side mirror, tilt‐
– Using the remote control 30
ing 54
Opening height, adjust‐
N ing 34, 36
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 110
Operating concept, iDrive 18
Navigation 152 Personal information 227
Outside-air mode, automatic
Navigation data 152 Personal Profile 28
climate control 122
Navigation data, updating 152 Pinch protection
Outside air, refer to Recircu‐ – Panoramic glass sunroof 43
Navigation system
– Destination entry by lated air mode 122 – Windows 41
voice 158 Overheating of engine, refer to Pinch protection, glass sun‐
Neck restraints, refer to Head Coolant temperature 72 roof 44
restraints 51 Plastic, care 287
Nets, refer to Storage com‐ P Playing videos, rear DVD sys‐
partments 135 tem 202
New wheels and tires 260 Paint, vehicle 286 PlugIn 242
Notes 6, 233 Pairing, mobile phone 216 Pollen, refer to Microfilter/acti‐
Nozzles of automatic climate Panic mode 30 vated-charcoal filter 124
control 119 Panoramic glass sunroof Poor road operation 147
Nozzles, refer to Ventila‐ – Convenient operation 30 Position, storing 155
– Initializing 43
tion 123 Postal code, entering in navi‐
– Opening, closing 42
gation 154
– Pinch protection 43
O – Power failure 43 Power, refer to Engine
– Remote control 30 data 290
OBD Onboard Diagnos‐ – Tilting 42 Power windows
tics 269 Park Distance Control – Safety switch 41
OBD socket, refer to Socket PDC 110 Power windows, opening and
for OBD Onboard Diagno‐ Parked-car ventilation 125 closing 40
sis 269 Parked vehicle, condensa‐ Power windows, refer to Win‐
Octane numbers, refer to Fuel tion 144 dows 40
specifications 248 Parking aid, refer to Park Dis‐ Preheating, refer to Diesel en‐
Odometer 71 tance Control PDC 110 gine 62
Office 227 Parking assistant, refer to Park Prescribed engine oils, refer to
Oil additives 266 Distance Control PDC 110 Approved engine oils 266
Oil consumption 265 Parking brake 63 Pressure, tires 252
Oil level 265 Parking brake, Automatic Pressure warning, tires 88
Oil, refer to Engine oil 265 Hold 64 Profile depth, refer to Mini‐
Oil types, alternative 266 Parking brake, releasing man‐ mum tread depth 259
Oil types, approved 266 ually 64, 65 Profile, tires 259
Old batteries, disposal 278 Parking brake, setting man‐ Programmable memory but‐
Onboard Diagnostics ually 63 tons, iDrive 22
OBD 269 Parking lamps 81 Protection function, refer to
Onboard monitor, refer to Parking lamps/low beams 81 Pinch protection 44
Control Display 19 Parking with Automatic Protection function, refer to
Onboard vehicle tool kit 270 Pinch protection
Hold 65
– Panoramic glass sunroof 43
310
Protective function, refer to Recommended tire Roadside Assistance 238
At a glance
Pinch protection brands 260 Roadside parking lamps 83
– Windows 41 Redialing 222 Roller sunblinds 41
Push-and-turn switch, refer to Refueling 246 Roof load capacity 292
Controls 18 Remaining distance to desti‐ Roof-mounted luggage
nation, refer to Computer 74 rack 147
R Remaining range for service, Rope, refer to Towing 283
refer to Service require‐ Route 162
Radiator fluid, refer to Cool‐ ments 75 Route criteria, route 161
Controls
ant 267 Remaining range, refer to Route, displaying 162
Radio-operated key, refer to Range 73 Route section, bypassing 162
Remote control with Reminders 233 RPM, refer to Engine
integrated key 28 Remote control data 290
Radio ready state 61 – Battery replacement 39 RSC Runflat System Compo‐
Driving tips
Radio ready state, switched – Comfort Access 37 nent, refer to Run-flat
off 61 – Malfunction 31, 38 tires 261
Radio ready state, switched – Tailgate 31 Rubber components,
on 61 Remote control, garage door care 286
Radio setting, refer to Radio opener 127 Run-flat tires 261
ready state 61 Remote control, rear DVD sys‐ Run-flat tires, tire inflation
Rain sensor 67 tem 201 pressure 252
Navigation
Random 182 Remote control, removing Running lights, refer to Parking
Random playback 182 from the ignition lock 61 lamps/low beams 81
Range 73 Remote control, service
RDS 175 data 268
Remote control, universal 127
S
Reading lamps 85
Remote inquiry 222
Reading out loud 234 Safe braking 143
Rear entertainment, refer to Replacement fuse 279 Safety 6
DVD system in rear 200 Replacement remote con‐ Safety belts 50
Rear lamps, refer to Tail trol 28 Safety belts
lamps 271, 274 Replacing wheels/tires 260 – Damage 50
Rear seat backrest, folda‐ Reporting safety defects 8 Safety belts, care 287
ble 133 Reserve warning, refer to Fuel Safety belts, indicator/warning
Rear seats, adjusting 47 gauge 73 lamp 50
Rear seats, adjusting the head Reservoir for washer fluid, re‐ Safety belts, reminder 50
restraints 52 fer to Washer fluid reser‐ Safety switch for rear win‐
Rear seats, heating 48 voir 68 dows 41
Rear socket 131 Resetting, Tire Pressure Mon‐ Safety systems
Rear ventilation 123 itor TPM 91 – Safety belts 50
Rear ventilation, 3rd row Residual heat 122 Safety systems, airbags 86
seats 123 Restraining systems Safety tires, refer to Run-flat
Rear ventilation, automatic cli‐ – Refer to Safety belts 50 tires 261
Mobility
mate control in rear 124 Restraint systems for chil‐ Satellite radio 176
Rearview mirror, refer to Mir‐ dren 56 Saving fuel 148
rors 53 Retaining straps, securing Scale, changing during navi‐
Rear window defroster 121 cargo 146 gation 164
Rear window, washing 68 Retreaded tires 261 Screen, folding open/closed,
Rear window wiper 68 Road, avoiding 161 rear DVD system 200
Reference
Recirculated air mode 122 Road detour 161
311
Everything from A to Z Screen, refer to Control Dis‐ Settings, clock, 12h/24h Speed limit 78
play 19 mode 79 Speed limit, setting 78
Search, refer to BMW On‐ Settings, configuring, refer to Speedometer 14
line 239 Personal Profile 28 Speed, with winter tires 261
Seat adjustment, electric 46 Settings, DVD 184 Split screen 22
Seat adjustment, manual 45 Settings on the Control Dis‐ Split screen map settings 164
Seat and mirror memory 53 play, changing 78 Spoken instructions, naviga‐
Seat belts Shifting, automatic transmis‐ tion 163
– Refer to Safety belts 50 sion with Steptronic 70 Sport program, automatic
Seat heating 48, 49 Shift paddles 70 transmission with Step‐
Seat heating, rear 48 Short commands, voice acti‐ tronic 70
Seats vation 295 Spray nozzles, refer to Clean‐
– Adjusting electrically 46 Side airbags 86 ing the windshield and head‐
– Heating 48 Side View 116 lamps 67
– Memory, refer to Seat and
Side windows, refer to Win‐ Spray nozzles, refer to Wind‐
mirror memory 53
dows 40 shield washer nozzles 68
– Sitting safely 45
– Storing the setting, refer to Size, refer to Dimensions 291 Stability control systems 96
Seat and mirror memory 53 Ski bag 138 Start/Stop button 61
– Ventilation, refer to Active Slide/tilt glass roof, refer to Start/Stop button, starting the
seat ventilation and seat Glass sunroof 43 engine 62
heating 49 Slide/tilt glass roof, refer to Start/Stop button, switching
Seats, adjusting 45 Panoramic glass sunroof 42 off the engine 62
Seats, backrest width 46 Slot for remote control 61 Starting the engine 62
Seats in the rear 47 Smokers' package, refer to Start problems, refer to Jump-
Seats, shoulder support 46 Ashtray 130 starting 281
2nd row seats 47 Snap-in adapter, mobile State/province, selecting for
Selector lever, automatic phone 225 navigation 153
transmission with Step‐ Snap-in adapter, refer to Stor‐ Stations, stored 180
tronic 69 age compartment of center Station, storing 174
Selector lever lock, releas‐ armrest 134 Status information, iDrive 21
ing 69 Snow chains 261 Status of Owner's Manual 6
Self-leveling suspension 100 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ Steam jets 285
Sensors, care 287 nosis 269 Steering wheel 55
Service and warranty 7 Socket, refer to Connecting Steering wheel, adjusting 55
Service data in the remote electrical devices 131 Steering wheel, easy entry/
control 268 Software applications, exit 55
Service interval display, refer iPhone 241 Steering wheel lock 61
to Condition Based Service Software part number 216 Steering with variable transla‐
CBS 268 Software update 199 tion, refer to Active steer‐
Service interval display, refer Soot particulate filter, refer to ing 100
to Service requirements 75 Diesel particulate filter 143 Steptronic, refer to Sport pro‐
Service requirements 75 SOS, refer to Emergency Re‐ gram and manual mode M/
Service requirements, CBS quest, initiating 280 S 70
Condition Based Serv‐ Sound output 174, 181 Stopping, engine 62
ice 268 Spare fuse 279 Storage compartment
Service, Roadside Assis‐ Special destinations, naviga‐ nets 135
tance 281 tion 156 Storage compart‐
Speed, average 73 ments 134, 135
312
Storage, tires 261 Temperature display Top View 114
At a glance
Storing the seat position, refer – External temperature 71 Torque, refer to Engine
to Seat and mirror mem‐ – External temperature warn‐ data 290
ory 53 ing 71 Tow bar 283
Storing the vehicle 287 Temperature display, setting Tow fitting 283
Street, entering for naviga‐ the units 80 Towing 282
tion 154 Temperature, engine oil 72 Town/city, navigation 153
Summer tires, refer to Wheels Temperature, setting with au‐ Tow rope 283
and tires 252 tomatic climate con‐ Tow-starting 282, 284
Controls
Summer tires, tread 259 trol 121, 125 TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
Sunblinds, roller sunblinds 41 Temperature warning 71 tor 90
Surround View 112 Text messages 230 Traction control 97
Switches, refer to Cockpit 12 Theft alarm system, refer to Traffic bulletins, naviga‐
Switching off, engine 62 Alarm system 39 tion 165
Driving tips
Switching off, vehicle 62 Thigh support adjustment 45 Transmission, automatic
Switch-on times, parked-car Third brake lamp, refer to Cen‐ transmission with Step‐
ventilation 126 ter brake lamp 273, 275 tronic 69
Symbols 6 Seats, 3rd row seats 47 Transmission positions, auto‐
Tilting the passenger side mir‐ matic transmission with
ror 54
T Steptronic 69
Time, setting 79 Transporting children
Navigation
Tachometer 72 Tire age 258 safely 56
Tailgate Tire identification marks 258 Treble, tone 172
– Comfort Access 38 Tire inflation pressure 252 Trip computer, refer to Dis‐
– Remote control 31 Tire inflation pressure, check‐ plays on the Control Dis‐
Tailgate, adjusting the open‐ ing 252 play 74
Tire pressure monitor, refer to
ing height 34, 36 Trip-distance counter, refer to
Tailgate, automatic opera‐ Flat Tire Monitor 88 Trip odometer 71
tion 36 Tire Pressure Monitor Triple turn signal activa‐
Tail lamps 271, 274 TPM 90 tion 66
Tank gauge, refer to Fuel Tire Quality Grading 258 Trip odometer 71
gauge 73 Tires Trips, planning 159
Tasks 232 – Inflation pressure 252
Trunk lid, refer to Tailgate 36
Technical changes, refer to Tires, breaking in 142
Turning circle, refer to Dimen‐
Safety 6 Tires, changing 260
sions 291
Technical data 290 Tires, condition 259
Turning lamps, refer to Adap‐
Telephone 216 Tires, damage 260
tive light control 82
Telephone, adjusting the vol‐ Tire size 258
Turn signal, indicator lamp 14
ume 220 Tires, minimum tread 259
Turn signals 66
Telephone, installation loca‐ Tires, retreaded tires 261
Turn signals, triple turn signal
tion, refer to Center arm‐ Tires, run-flat tires 261
activation 66
rest 134 Tires, storage 261
Mobility
TeleService 237 Tire tread 259

Toll roads, route 161
U
Temperature, adjusting in up‐
per body region 121 Tone 172
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
Temperature, coolant, refer to Tool kit, refer to Onboard ve‐
UTQG 258
Coolant temperature 72 hicle tool kit 270
Unintentional alarms, avoid‐
Tools, refer to Onboard vehicle
ing 40
Reference
tool kit 270
313
Everything from A to Z Units, average fuel consump‐ Vehicle jack 276 Waste tray, refer to Ash‐
tion 80 Vehicle paint 286 tray 130
Units, temperature 80 Vehicle storage 287 Water on roads, refer to Driving
Universal garage door opener, Vehicle, switching off 62 through water 143
refer to Integrated universal Vehicle wash 285 Weights 292
remote control 127 Ventilation 123 Welcome lamps 81
Universal remote control 127 Ventilation, 3rd row seats 123 Wheelbase, refer to Dimen‐
Unlocking Ventilation, automatic climate sions 291
– From the outside 30 control in rear 125 Wheel change 275
– Setting the unlocking char‐ Ventilation, draft-free 123 Wheels and tires 252
acteristics 30 Ventilation, in rear 123 Wheels, changing 260
– Tailgate 38 Ventilation, refer to Parked-car Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
– Without remote control, refer
ventilation 125 FTM 88
to Comfort Access 37
Vents of automatic climate Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor
Unlocking, from the inside 33
control 119 TPM 90
Unlocking, hood 264
Version of the navigation Width, refer to Dimen‐
Updates made after the edito‐
data 152 sions 291
rial deadline 6
Video playback 183 Window, convenient opera‐
Update, software 199
Video playback, iPhone 195 tion 30
Upholstery care 286
Video playback, snap-in Windows
Upper tailgate 33
adapter 195 – Safety switch 41
Upper tailgate, automatic op‐ Windows, defrosting and de‐
Voice activation
eration 34 fogging, automatic climate
– Navigation 158
Upper tailgate, closing 34 Voice activation, mobile control 121
Upper tailgate, emergency op‐ phone 224 Windows, pinch protection 41
eration, refer to Opening Voice activation, short com‐ Windshield, cleaning 67
manually 34 mands 295 Windshield, defrosting, refer
Upper tailgate, opening from Voice activation system 24 to Defrosting windows 121
the inside 34 Volume, setting 172 Windshield wash 67
Upper tailgate, opening from Windshield washer fluid 68
the outside 34
Upper tailgate, opening man‐
W Windshield wash, rear win‐
dow 68
ually 34 Warning and indicator Windshield wash, reservoir for
USB audio interface 193 lamps 15 washer fluid 68
Warning messages, refer to Windshield wash, washer
V Check Control 76 fluid 68
Warning signal volumes 173 Windshield wash, washer noz‐
Vacuum cleaner, connecting, Warning triangle 281 zles 68
refer to Connecting electrical Washer/wiper system 67 Windshield wiper blades,
devices 131 Washer/wiper system, rain changing 270
Vehicle
sensor 67 Windshield wiper, refer to
– Identification number 216
Washer/wiper system, washer Washer/wiper system 67
– Identification number, refer
to Engine compartment 263 fluid 68 Winter diesel 249
Vehicle battery, changing 278 Washer/wiper system, wind‐ Winter storage, care 287
Vehicle, breaking in 142 shield washer nozzles 68 Winter tires, setting the speed
Vehicle care 286 Washer fluid 68 limit 78
Vehicle care, refer to Washer fluid reservoir 68 Winter tires, suitable tires 261
Care 285 Washing, vehicle 285 Winter tires, tread 259
Wiper blades, changing 270
314
Wiper fluid 68
At a glance
Wood, care 287
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 23
Working in the engine com‐
partment 264
Wrench/screwdriver, refer to
Onboard vehicle tool kit 270
Controls
X
xDrive 98
Xenon headlamps 271
Driving tips
Y
Your individual vehicle 6
Your individual vehicle
– Settings, refer to Personal
Profile 28
Navigation
Mobility
Reference
315
More about BMW
The Ultimate Driving

bmwusa.com Machine
01 40 2 606 735 ue
*BL2606735003*

2012 BMW x5 Xdrive35d 17743

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

2012 BMW x5 Xdrive35d 17743

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Owner's Manual for

The Ultimate Driving

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 735 - 03 11 500

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 735 - 03 11 500

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 735 - 03 11 500

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 735 - 03 11 500

Using this Owner's Manual Your individual vehicle

›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐

Symbols on vehicle components For your own safety

tions or exclusions for such country or region. In

Reporting safety defects

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 735 - 03 11 500

All around the steering wheel

1 Rear window safety switch 41 Low beams 81

Front fog lamps* 84 5 Head-up Display* 117

Parking lamps 81 6 Steering column stalk, left

High-beam Assistant* 83 Lane departure warning* 93

15 Cruise control lever

7 BMW X6: shifting up or down with automatic Active cruise control* 102

17 Releasing the hood 264

Next entertainment source

3 Indicator/warning lamps 15 8 Display for

4 Active cruise control* 102 ▷ Automatic transmission position 69

5 Tachometer 72 ▷ HDC Hill Descent Control 98

6 BMW X5: current fuel consumption 72 ▷ Computer 73

7 Display for ▷ Odometer and trip odometer 71

▷ Clock 71 ▷ High-beam Assistant* 83

▷ External temperature 71 ▷ Check Control message

Symbol Function or system

Canada: parking brake set, refer to

1 Headliner 17 7 Open the tailgate 33 36

Central locking system 33 Park Distance Control

Side View* 116 12 Selector lever for automatic transmis‐

8 Controller with buttons 18

2 Glass sunroof* 42 43 5 Interior lamps 85

3 Indicator lamp for the front pas‐

The concept Using the iDrive during a trip

1 Control Display ▷ Move in four directions, arrow 3

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

CD Opens the CD/Multimedia

TEL Opens the Telephone

Control Display Selecting menu items

1. Press the button.

2. Press the controller.

Menu items in the Owner's Manual

Changing between panels

White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate

View of an opened menu

Additional options: move the controller to the

3. If necessary, move the controller to the left Radio symbols

HD Radio* is switched on.

Satellite radio* is switched on.

Incoming or outgoing call*.

Wireless network is not available*.

Bluetooth* is switched on.

Text message*, e-mail* was re‐

press the controller.

SIM card* is missing. 1. Press the button.

CD/DVD* player. 5. Select the desired menu item.

USB audio interface*.

Mobile phone audio interface*.

Symbol Meaning Programmable memory

Switching the split screen on and off* Running a function

Text message, e-mail was re‐